WO2008088772A9 - Mpeg objects and systems and methods for using mpeg objects - Google Patents

Mpeg objects and systems and methods for using mpeg objects Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2008088772A9
WO2008088772A9 PCT/US2008/000450 US2008000450W WO2008088772A9 WO 2008088772 A9 WO2008088772 A9 WO 2008088772A9 US 2008000450 W US2008000450 W US 2008000450W WO 2008088772 A9 WO2008088772 A9 WO 2008088772A9
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
mpeg
video
content
returns
scene
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2008/000450
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2008088772A2 (en
WO2008088772A3 (en
Inventor
Donald Gordon
Lena Y Pavlovskaia
Airan Landau
Andreas Lennartsson
Glenn M Cloud
Original Assignee
Ictv Inc
Donald Gordon
Lena Y Pavlovskaia
Airan Landau
Andreas Lennartsson
Glenn M Cloud
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Ictv Inc, Donald Gordon, Lena Y Pavlovskaia, Airan Landau, Andreas Lennartsson, Glenn M Cloud filed Critical Ictv Inc
Priority to EP08705578A priority Critical patent/EP2116051A2/en
Publication of WO2008088772A2 publication Critical patent/WO2008088772A2/en
Publication of WO2008088772A9 publication Critical patent/WO2008088772A9/en
Publication of WO2008088772A3 publication Critical patent/WO2008088772A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B27/00Editing; Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Monitoring; Measuring tape travel
    • G11B27/02Editing, e.g. varying the order of information signals recorded on, or reproduced from, record carriers
    • G11B27/031Electronic editing of digitised analogue information signals, e.g. audio or video signals
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/20Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using video object coding
    • H04N19/23Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using video object coding with coding of regions that are present throughout a whole video segment, e.g. sprites, background or mosaic
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/48Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using compressed domain processing techniques other than decoding, e.g. modification of transform coefficients, variable length coding [VLC] data or run-length data
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/50Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding
    • H04N19/503Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding involving temporal prediction
    • H04N19/51Motion estimation or motion compensation
    • H04N19/527Global motion vector estimation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/20Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/23Processing of content or additional data; Elementary server operations; Server middleware
    • H04N21/234Processing of video elementary streams, e.g. splicing of video streams, manipulating MPEG-4 scene graphs
    • H04N21/23412Processing of video elementary streams, e.g. splicing of video streams, manipulating MPEG-4 scene graphs for generating or manipulating the scene composition of objects, e.g. MPEG-4 objects
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/20Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/23Processing of content or additional data; Elementary server operations; Server middleware
    • H04N21/234Processing of video elementary streams, e.g. splicing of video streams, manipulating MPEG-4 scene graphs
    • H04N21/23424Processing of video elementary streams, e.g. splicing of video streams, manipulating MPEG-4 scene graphs involving splicing one content stream with another content stream, e.g. for inserting or substituting an advertisement
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/20Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/23Processing of content or additional data; Elementary server operations; Server middleware
    • H04N21/234Processing of video elementary streams, e.g. splicing of video streams, manipulating MPEG-4 scene graphs
    • H04N21/2343Processing of video elementary streams, e.g. splicing of video streams, manipulating MPEG-4 scene graphs involving reformatting operations of video signals for distribution or compliance with end-user requests or end-user device requirements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/20Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/23Processing of content or additional data; Elementary server operations; Server middleware
    • H04N21/236Assembling of a multiplex stream, e.g. transport stream, by combining a video stream with other content or additional data, e.g. inserting a URL [Uniform Resource Locator] into a video stream, multiplexing software data into a video stream; Remultiplexing of multiplex streams; Insertion of stuffing bits into the multiplex stream, e.g. to obtain a constant bit-rate; Assembling of a packetised elementary stream
    • H04N21/2365Multiplexing of several video streams
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/20Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/23Processing of content or additional data; Elementary server operations; Server middleware
    • H04N21/236Assembling of a multiplex stream, e.g. transport stream, by combining a video stream with other content or additional data, e.g. inserting a URL [Uniform Resource Locator] into a video stream, multiplexing software data into a video stream; Remultiplexing of multiplex streams; Insertion of stuffing bits into the multiplex stream, e.g. to obtain a constant bit-rate; Assembling of a packetised elementary stream
    • H04N21/2368Multiplexing of audio and video streams
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/43Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
    • H04N21/431Generation of visual interfaces for content selection or interaction; Content or additional data rendering
    • H04N21/4312Generation of visual interfaces for content selection or interaction; Content or additional data rendering involving specific graphical features, e.g. screen layout, special fonts or colors, blinking icons, highlights or animations
    • H04N21/4316Generation of visual interfaces for content selection or interaction; Content or additional data rendering involving specific graphical features, e.g. screen layout, special fonts or colors, blinking icons, highlights or animations for displaying supplemental content in a region of the screen, e.g. an advertisement in a separate window
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/43Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
    • H04N21/434Disassembling of a multiplex stream, e.g. demultiplexing audio and video streams, extraction of additional data from a video stream; Remultiplexing of multiplex streams; Extraction or processing of SI; Disassembling of packetised elementary stream
    • H04N21/4347Demultiplexing of several video streams
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/43Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
    • H04N21/434Disassembling of a multiplex stream, e.g. demultiplexing audio and video streams, extraction of additional data from a video stream; Remultiplexing of multiplex streams; Extraction or processing of SI; Disassembling of packetised elementary stream
    • H04N21/4348Demultiplexing of additional data and video streams
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/43Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
    • H04N21/44Processing of video elementary streams, e.g. splicing a video clip retrieved from local storage with an incoming video stream, rendering scenes according to MPEG-4 scene graphs
    • H04N21/44012Processing of video elementary streams, e.g. splicing a video clip retrieved from local storage with an incoming video stream, rendering scenes according to MPEG-4 scene graphs involving rendering scenes according to scene graphs, e.g. MPEG-4 scene graphs
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/47End-user applications
    • H04N21/472End-user interface for requesting content, additional data or services; End-user interface for interacting with content, e.g. for content reservation or setting reminders, for requesting event notification, for manipulating displayed content
    • H04N21/4722End-user interface for requesting content, additional data or services; End-user interface for interacting with content, e.g. for content reservation or setting reminders, for requesting event notification, for manipulating displayed content for requesting additional data associated with the content
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/80Generation or processing of content or additional data by content creator independently of the distribution process; Content per se
    • H04N21/81Monomedia components thereof
    • H04N21/812Monomedia components thereof involving advertisement data
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/80Generation or processing of content or additional data by content creator independently of the distribution process; Content per se
    • H04N21/85Assembly of content; Generation of multimedia applications
    • H04N21/854Content authoring
    • H04N21/8543Content authoring using a description language, e.g. Multimedia and Hypermedia information coding Expert Group [MHEG], eXtensible Markup Language [XML]
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F2203/00Indexing scheme relating to G06F3/00 - G06F3/048
    • G06F2203/048Indexing scheme relating to G06F3/048
    • G06F2203/04804Transparency, e.g. transparent or translucent windows
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/16Sound input; Sound output

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to interactive encoded video and more specifically to interactive MPEG video that can be used with a client device having a decoder and limited caching capabilities.
  • Set-top boxes of cable television systems have preferably been simple devices.
  • the boxes generally include a QAM decoder, an MPEG decoder, and a transceiver for receiving signals from a remote control and transferring the signals to the cable headend.
  • set-top boxes have not included sophisticated processors, such as those found in personal computers or extensive memory for caching content or programs.
  • developers attempting to provide interactive content that includes encoded video elements such as those found in dynamic web pages to subscribers have been forced to find solutions that are compatible with the set-top boxes.
  • These solutions require having the processing functionality reside at the cable headend and further require that the content is delivered in MPEG format.
  • the content forming the web page first must be decoded and then rendered within the webpage frame as a
  • the rendered frames are then re-encoded into an MPEG stream that the set-top box of a requesting user can decode.
  • This decoding and re-encoding scheme is processor intensive.
  • a system for providing interactive MPEG content for display on a display device associated with a client device having an MPEG decoder operates in a client/server environment wherein the server includes a plurality of session processors that can be assigned to an interactive session requested by a client device.
  • the session processor runs a virtual machine, such as a JAVA virtual machine.
  • the virtual machine includes code that in response to a request for an application accesses the requested application.
  • the virtual machine is capable of parsing the application and interpreting scripts.
  • the application contains a layout for an MPEG frame composed of a plurality of MPEG elements.
  • the application also includes a script that refers to one or more MPEG objects that provide the interactive functionality and the MPEG elements (MPEG encoded audio/video) or methodology for accessing the encoded MPEG audio/video content if the content is stored external to the MPEG object.
  • the MPEG object includes an object interface that defines data received by the MPEG object and data output by the MPEG object. Additionally, the MPEG object includes one or more MPEG video or audio elements. The MPEG elements are preferably groomed so that the elements can be stitched together to form an MPEG video frame. In some embodiments, the MPEG elements are located external to the MPEG object and the MPEG object includes a method for accessing the MPEG element(s). In certain embodiments, the MPEG object includes a plurality of MPEG video elements wherein each element represents a different state for the MPEG object. For example, a button may have an "on" state and an "off state and an MPEG button object would include an MPEG element composed of a plurality of macroblocks/slices for each state. The MPEG object also includes methods for receiving input from the client device through the object interface and for outputting data from the MPEG object through the object interface.
  • the program on the virtual machine After the program running on the virtual machine, has obtained all of the MPEG objects indicated in the application, the program on the virtual machine provides the MPEG elements and the layout to a stitcher.
  • the virtual machine and program for retrieving and parsing the application and interpreting the scripts may be subsumed in the stitcher.
  • the stitcher then stitches together each of the MPEG elements in their position within the MPEG frame.
  • the stitched MPEG video frame is passed to a multiplexor that multiplexes in any MPEG audio content and additional data streams and the MPEG video frame is placed into an MPEG transport stream that is directed to the client device.
  • the multiplexor may be internal to the stitcher.
  • the client device receives the MPEG frame and can then decode and display the video frame on an associated display device. This process repeats for each video frame that is sent to the client device.
  • the virtual machine in conjunction with the MPEG object updates the MPEG element provided to the stitcher and the stitcher will replace the MPEG element within the MPEG video frame based upon the request of the client device.
  • each MPEG element representative of a different state of the MPEG object is provided to the stitcher.
  • the virtual machine forwards the client's request to the stitcher and the stitcher selects the appropriate MPEG element based upon the MPEG objects state from a buffer to stitch into the MPEG video frame.
  • An interactive MPEG application may be constructed in an authoring environment.
  • the authoring environment includes an editor with one or more scene windows that allow a user to create a scene based upon placement of MPEG objects within a scene window.
  • An object tool bar is included within the authoring environment that allows the MPEG objects to be added.
  • the authoring environment also includes a processor that produces an application file that contains at least reference to the MPEG objects and the display position for each of the MPEG objects within the scene.
  • the MPEG video element for the MPEG object is automatically snapped to a macroblock boundary.
  • the properties for the object can be modified.
  • the authoring environment also allows a programmer to create scripts for using the MPEG objects.
  • a script within the application may relate a button state to an execution of a program.
  • the authoring environment also provides for the creation of new MPEG objects.
  • a designer may create an MPEG object by providing graphical content such as a video file or still image.
  • the authoring environment will encode the graphical content so that the content includes MPEG elements/slices or a sequence of MPEG elements/slices.
  • the authoring environment allows the designer to add methods, properties, object data and scripts to the MPEG object.
  • Fig. 1 graphically shows an example of an atomic MPEG object as used in a client/ server environment
  • Fig. IA is a flow chart showing process flow between a stitcher and events from a client device
  • Fig. 2 graphically shows an example of a streaming MPEG object as used in a client/ server environment
  • Fig. 2A graphically shows an embodiment employing several session processors
  • Fig. 3 provides an exemplary data structure and pseudo code for an atomic MPEG button object
  • Fig. 4 provides an exemplary data structure and pseudo code for a progress bar MPEG object
  • Fig. 5 shows an exemplary screen shot of an authoring environment for creating applications that use MPEG objects
  • Fig. 6A shows an exemplary screen shot of a properties tab for an MPEG object
  • Fig. 6B shows an exemplary screen shot of an event tab for an MPEG object
  • Fig. 6C shows an exemplary screen shot of a script editor that can be used to create a script for an application that uses MPEG objects
  • Fig. 7 shows a system for using MPEG objects for interactive content.
  • Embodiments of the present invention disclose MPEG objects and systems and methods of using MPEG objects in a client/server environment for providing interactive encoded video content to a client device that includes an MPEG decoder and an upstream data connection to the server in an interactive communications network.
  • MPEG element and MPEG video element shall refer to graphical information that has been formatted according to an MPEG standard (Motion Picture Experts Group). The graphical information may only be partially encoded. For example, graphical information that has been transform coded using the discrete cosine transform will be considered to be an MPEG element without requiring quantization, entropy encoding and additional MPEG formatting.
  • MPEG elements may include MPEG header information for macroblocks and the slice level.
  • An MPEG element may include data for either a full MPEG video frame, a portion of an MPEG video frame (macroblocks or slices) that are contiguous or non-contiguous, or data representative of a temporal sequence (frames, macroblocks or slices).
  • Interactive content formed from MPEG objects is preferably used in a client/server environment 100 as shown in Fig. 1 wherein the client device 101 does not need memory for caching data and includes a standard MPEG video decoder.
  • An example of such a client device is a set-top box or other terminal that includes an MPEG decoder.
  • Client devices may include a full processor and memory for caching; however these elements are not necessary for operation of this system.
  • the server device in the client/server environment contains at least a session processor 102 formed from at least one processor that includes associated memory.
  • the client 101 and server establish an interactive session wherein the client device 101 transmits a request for an interactive session through an interactive communication network.
  • the server assigns a session processor 102 and the request is sent to an input receiver 103 of the assigned session processor 102.
  • the session processor 102 runs a virtual machine 104 that can interpret scripts.
  • the virtual machine 104 may be any one of a number of virtual machines, such as a JAVA virtual machine.
  • addressing information for the session processor is passed to the client 101.
  • the client 101 selects an interactive application, as defined in an AVML (Active Video Mark-up Language) file to view and interact with.
  • Interactive applications may include references to video content along with selection controls, such as buttons, lists, and menus.
  • the request for the selected application is directed to the virtual machine 104.
  • the virtual machine 104 accesses the AVML file defining the application, that indicates the MPEG objects, along with any other graphical content that is necessary for composing a video frame within a video sequence for display on a display device.
  • the AVML file also includes the location within the frame for positioning each of the MPEG objects.
  • the AVML file may include one or more scripts.
  • One use for a script is to maintain the state of an MPEG object.
  • These MPEG objects can reside and be accessed at different locations and may be distributed.
  • the graphical elements of the MPEG objects are stitched together by a stitcher 105 based upon the location information within the application file (AVML file) to form complete MPEG video frames.
  • the video frames along with MPEG audio frames are multiplexed together in a multiplexor 106 within the stitcher to form an MPEG stream that is sent to the requesting client device.
  • the MPEG stream may then be decoded and displayed on the client's device.
  • the input receiver, virtual machine, and stitcher may be embodied as either computer code that can be executed/interpreted on the session processor or may embodied in hardware or a combination of hardware and software.
  • any of the software i.e. input receiver, virtual machine, or stitcher
  • the stitcher which may be a computer program application may incorporate the functionality of the input receiver, the virtual machine and may process and parse the application file (AVML).
  • AVML application file
  • the stitcher may stitch the graphical elements together based upon the type of device that has requested the application.
  • Devices have different capabilities. For example MPEG decoders on certain devices may not be as robust and capable of implementing all aspects of the chosen MPEG standard.
  • the bandwidth of the transmission path between the multiplexor and the client device may vary. For example, in general, wireless devices may have less bandwidth than wireline devices.
  • the stitcher may insert into the MPEG header parameters a load delay or no delay, allow skips or not allow skips, force all frames to be encoded as I-frames or use a repeated uniform quantization to reduce the number of bits required to represent the values.
  • An MPEG object is part of a programming paradigm that allows individual MPEG video elements to be stitched together to form a frame of a video stream that incorporates active elements wherein a client can interact with the active elements and more specifically change the video stream.
  • the MPEG video elements associated with an MPEG object may be a plurality of encoded macroblocks or slices that form a graphical element.
  • a client can use a client device to select a graphical element on a display screen and interact with that graphical element.
  • An MPEG object 110 includes an association with MPEG video and/or audio data along with methods and properties for the object.
  • the MPEG video or audio may reside internal to the MPEG object or may be externally accessed through remote function calls.
  • the methods within an MPEG object are code that may receive data from outside of the object, process the received data and/or the MPEG video 1 15 and audio data 120 and output data from the object according to video and audio directives.
  • Object data 160 may indicate the state of the object or other internal variables for the object. For example, parameters such as display priority may be used to determine the priority of stacked media.
  • parental control parameters such as a content rating, may be associated with the audio or video data or an audio or video source or address.
  • a parental control may be a method internal to an MPEG object that provides for control over access to the content.
  • a virtual machine is made active on a session processor 102. in response to a request for an interactive application (AVML file having a script) and accesses a first MPEG object 110 which is an atomic object.
  • An atomic object is self-contained in that the object contains all of the encoded data and methods necessary to construct all of the visual states for the object. Once the object is retrieved by the virtual machine the object requires no additional communications with another source.
  • An example of an atomic object is a button that is displayed within a frame. The button object would have an MPEG video file for all states of the button and would include methods for storing the state based upon a client's interaction.
  • the atomic object includes both pre-encoded MPEG data (video and audio data) 115, 120 along with methods 130.
  • the audio or video data may not initially be MPEG elements, but rather graphical or audio data in another format that is converted either by the virtual machine or the stitcher into MPEG elements.
  • the atomic object can include object data 160, such as state information.
  • the object interacts with external sources through an interface definition 170 along with a script 180 for directing data to and from the object.
  • the interface 170 may be for interacting with C++ code, Java Script or binary machine code.
  • the interface may be embodied in a class definitions.
  • An event may be received from a client device into the input receiver 103 that passes the event to an event dispatcher 1 11.
  • the event dispatcher 111 identifies an MPEG object within the AVML file that is capable of processing the event. The event dispatcher then communicates the event to that object.
  • the MPEG object accesses the MPEG video 115 and/or audio data 120.
  • the MPEG object may implement a method 130 for handling the event.
  • the interface definitions may directly access the data (object data, audio data and video data)
  • Each MPEG object may include multiple MPEG video files that relate to different states of the object wherein the state is stored as object data 160.
  • the method may include a pointer that points the stitcher to the current frame and that is updated each time the stitcher is provided with a video frame.
  • the MPEG audio data 120 may have associated methods within the MPEG object.
  • the audio methods 130 may synchronize the MPEG audio data 120 with the MPEG video data 115.
  • state information is contained within the AVML file 1 1.
  • Fig. IA The process flow for the MPEG object and system for implementing the MPEG object is shown in the flow chart of Fig. IA.
  • Fig. IA all code for accessing and parsing of an application is contained within the stitcher.
  • the stitcher may be a software module that operates within the virtual machine on the session processor.
  • the stitcher After receiving the request for the application and retrieving the application the stitcher first loads any script that exists within the application. IOOA The stitcher accesses the layout for the video frame and loads this information into memory. 11 OA The layout will include the background, the overall size of the video frame, the aspect ratio, and position of any objects within the application. The stitcher then instantiates any MPEG objects that are present within the application. 120A Based upon a script within the application that keeps track of the state of an object, the graphical element associated with the state for each object is retrieved from a memory location. The graphical element may be in a format other than MPEG and may not initially be an MPEG element. The stitcher will determine the format of the graphical element.
  • the stitcher will render the graphical element into a spatial representation. 130A
  • the stitcher will then encode the spatial representation of the graphical element, so that it becomes an MPEG element. 135 A
  • the MPEG element will have macroblock data formed into slices. If the graphical element associated with the MPEG object is already in an MPEG element format then neither rendering or encoding is necessary.
  • the MPEG elements may include one or more macroblocks that have associated position information. The stitcher then converts the relative macroblock/slice information into global MPEG video frame locations based upon the position information from the layout and encodes each of the slices.
  • the slices are then stored to memory so that they are cached for quick retrieval.
  • An MPEG video frame is then created.
  • the MPEG elements for each object based upon the layout are placed into scan order by slice for an MPEG frame.
  • the stitcher sequences the slices into the appropriate order to form an MPEG frame.
  • the MPEG video frame is sent to the stitcher's multiplexor and the multiplexor multiplexes the video frame with any audio content.
  • the MPEG video stream that includes the MPEG video frame and any audio content is directed through the interactive communication network to the client device of the user for display on a display device.
  • Changes to the MPEG frames are event driven.
  • a user through an input device sends a signal through a client device to the session processor that is provided to the stitcher.
  • the stitcher checks to see if the input that is received is input that is handled by the script of the application using the event dispatcher. 165 A If it is handled by the script, the script directives are executed/interpreted. 170A
  • the stitcher determines if the object state has changed. 175 A The stitcher will retrieve the graphical element associated with the state of that object from a memory location.
  • 180A The stitcher may retrieve the graphical element from a memory location associated with the MPEG object after the event has been processed, or the MPEG object may place the graphical element in a memory location associated with the stitcher during event processing.
  • the stitcher will again determine the format of the graphical element. If the graphical element is in a non-MPEG element format and therefore is not structured according to macroblocks and slices, the stitcher will render and encode the element as an MPEG element and will cache the element into a buffer. 130A, 135A, 140A This new MPEG element representative of the change in state will be stitched into the MPEG frame at the same location as defined by the layout for the MPEG frame from the application. 145 A The stitcher will gather all of the MPEG elements and places the slices into scan order and format the frame according to the appropriate MPEG standard. The MPEG frame will then be sent to the client device for display. 190A The system will continue to output MPEG frames into an MPEG stream until the next event causes a change in state and therefore, a change to one or more MPEG elements within the frame layout.
  • a second MPEG object is a streaming MPEG object.
  • the streaming MPEG object operates within the same environment as the atomic object, but the object is not self-contained and accesses an outside source for source data.
  • the object may be a media player that allows for selection between various sources of audio and video.
  • the MPEG object is not self-contained for each of the audio and video sources, but the MPEG object accesses the sources based upon requests from the client device.
  • the MPEG object 200 and methods implemented according to interface definitions (input, output) 211 link the MPEG object 200 to the virtual machine 230, the stitcher 250, as well as an RPC (remote procedure call) receiver 212 at a stream source 220.
  • the streaming MPEG object is in communication with the virtual machine/client 230, 240 a stitcher 250, a source entity, the stream source 220 and other sources.
  • the interface definitions may also directly access the data (object, audio and video).
  • an event dispatcher accesses the MPEG object capable of handling the event using the interface.
  • the event dispatcher causes the MPEG object to access or request the video and audio content requested by the client. This request may be achieved directly by a method within the MPEG object that accesses the data source.
  • a script within the AVML file calls an RPC receiver 212 that accesses a server script 213.
  • the server script 213 retrieves the requested content (event source 214, data source 215, video source 216, or audio source 217) or accesses an address for the content and either provides this information or content to the MPEG object or to the stitcher 250.
  • the server script 213 may render the requested content and encode the content as one or more MPEG slices.
  • MPEG video content can be passed through the MPEG object to the stitcher 250 that stitches together the MPEG video content into an MPEG video frame.
  • the MPEG object may also request or retrieve audio MPEG content that can be passed to the stitcher.
  • audio MPEG content may be processed in a similar fashion to MPEG video content.
  • the MPEG video data may be processed by a method within the MPEG object.
  • a method may synchronize all of the MPEG content prior to providing the MPEG content to the stitcher, or the method may confirm that all of the MPEG content has been received and is temporally aligned, so that the stitcher can stitch together a complete MPEG video frame from a plurality of MPEG object video and audio data for presentation to the client in a compliant MPEG stream.
  • the script of the AVML file or the MPEG object may request updated content from the stream source through the server script 213 or directly from an addressable location.
  • An event requesting updated content may originate from communication with the client.
  • the content may originate from a data, audio, video, or event source 214-217.
  • Event data 214 includes but is not limited to trigger data.
  • Triggers include data that can be inserted into the MPEG transport stream.
  • triggers may be internal to an MPEG video or audio source.
  • triggers may be located in header information or within the data content itself. These triggers when triggered can cause different events, such as an overlay to be presented on the screen of the client or a pop-up advertisement.
  • the data source 215 may include data that is not traditionally audio or video data.
  • a data from the data source may include an alert notification for the client script, data to be embedded within the MPEG video stream or stock data that is to be merged with a separate graphical element.
  • the MPEG object using a method may combine the data sources into a single stream for transport to the session processor.
  • the single stream is received by the session processor and the session processor
  • the streaming object may include audio and video methods 281, 282 that synchronize the audio and video data.
  • the video method 282 provides the video content to the stitcher so that the stitcher can stitch each of the MPEG video elements together to form a series of MPEG frames.
  • the audio method 281 provides the audio data to the multiplexor within the stitcher so that the audio data is multiplexed together with the video data into an MPEG transport stream.
  • the MPEG object also includes methods 283, 284 for the event data and for the other data.
  • Steaming MPEG objects may be produced by stitching multiple streaming MPEG objects 201 A, 202A...203A together in a session processor 200A. Construction of a scene may occur by linking multiple session processors 21OA...220A wherein each session processor feeds the next session processor with the MPEG elements of an MPEG object as shown in Fig. 2A.
  • the MPEG object either an atomic object or a streaming object may itself be an application with a hierarchy of internal objects. For example, there may be an application object that defines the type of application at the top level. Below the application object there may be a scene object that defines a user interface including the locations of MPEG elements that are to be stitched together along with reference to other MPEG objects that are necessary for the application. Below the scene object, the individual MPEG object could be located. Thus, an MPEG object may be a self contained application. In such an embodiment, in response to a request for an application, the client script would call the MPEG object that contains the application and the application would be instantiated.
  • Each MPEG object includes an interface segment 315 that may provide such information as class definitions and/or the location of the object and related class definitions in a distributed system.
  • MPEG objects also include either a resource segment 316 or a method for at least receiving one or more resources.
  • the data structure 300 of Fig. 3 shows the object container/package 320 that includes an interface segment 315 that provides the location of the button MPEG object.
  • the object also includes an object data segment 317.
  • object data is data that is used to define parameters of the object.
  • the visible data 330 for the object defines the height and the width of the button.
  • the resource segment 316 of the MPEG button object includes one or more video and/or audio files.
  • the various state data for the button are provided 350, 351 wherein the video content would be a collection of macroblocks that represent one or more frames of MPEG video data.
  • the video content would be a collection of macroblocks that represent one or more frames of MPEG video data.
  • the MPEG video elements would be the size of the height and width of the button and may be smaller than a frame to be displayed on a client's display device.
  • Fig. 4 shows another example of a possible MPEG object including the data structure 400 and pseudo code 410.
  • This example is of a progress bar object.
  • the progress bar MPEG object includes an interface segment 415 that identifies the location of the object's classes.
  • Sample class definitions are provided in both XML and JAVA 422, 423.
  • the class includes methods for clearing the variable percentage and for setting the MPEG graphic initially to Opercent.slc wherein sic represents an MPEG slice.
  • the progress bar includes an Object Data Segment 417 that provides interface data (name of the progress bar), visible data (the size of the progress bar MPEG slices) and progress data (an internal variable that is updated as progress of the event being measured increases) 418.
  • the progress bar MPEG object includes resource data 316 that includes MPEG slices that represent the various graphical states representing percentages of completion of the event being monitored. Thus, there may be ten different progress bar graphics each composed of MPEG slices 419. These MPEG slices can be combined with other MPEG slices to form a complete MPEG frame.
  • An authoring environment provides for the creation and manipulation of MPEG objects and allows for the creation of scenes for an interactive application.
  • the authoring environment is preferably a graphical user interface authoring tool for creating MPEG objects and interactive applications by graphical selection of MPEG objects.
  • the authoring environment includes two interfaces. The first interface is the authoring tool for creating MPEG objects and defining application scenes. The second interface is a script editor that allows a designer to add events and methods to MPEG object or to a scene.
  • the output of the authoring environment may be self contained binary code for an MPEG object or a structured data file representing an application.
  • the structured data file for an application includes information regarding the MPEG objects within a scene, the location of the MPEG graphical element of the MPEG object within a frame, properties for the MPEG object, the address/memory location of the MPEG object, and scripts for the application that access and use the MPEG objects.
  • the self contained binary code for an MPEG object may be used by an application.
  • the application may access an MPEG object by referencing the memory location wherein the self-contained binary code is located.
  • Fig. 5 graphically shows the authoring environment 600.
  • the graphical environment allows an application designer to add MPEG objects into a scene layout 610 though graphical selection of a representative icon 620 that is linked to the underlying object code.
  • the authoring environment allows a user to create new MPEG objects.
  • a top level scene will be the first scene that is provided to a user's device when the application is loaded.
  • the application designer can select and drag and drop an object from the object toolbar 620.
  • the designer can insert user interface objects such as: a media player object, a ticker object, a button object, a static image, a list box object, or text.
  • the authoring environment includes other objects such as container objects, session objects and timer objects that are not graphical in nature, but are part of the MPEG object model.
  • the authoring environment includes an application tree 630 that indicates the level of the application.
  • an application may include a plurality of video scenes wherein a single scene is equivalent to a portion of a webpage.
  • the video scene may allow a user of the interactive video to drill down to a second scene by selecting a link within the video scene.
  • the second scene would be at a level that is lower than the first scene.
  • the application tree 630 provides both a listing of the scene hierarchy as well as a listing of the objects within the scene in a hierarchical order.
  • the designer may create an object or a hierarchical object that contains a plurality of objects.
  • the output of the authoring environment may also be that of an MPEG object.
  • the designer would provide graphical content, for example in the form of a JPEG image, and the authoring environment would render the JPEG image and encode the JPEG image as a sequence of slices.
  • the authoring environment would also allow the designer to define scripts, methods and properties for the object.
  • a designer may wish to create a new media player MPEG object to display viewable media streams.
  • the designer may import a graphic that provides a skin for the media player that surrounds the media stream.
  • the graphic would be rendered by the authoring environment and encoded as a plurality of MPEG slices.
  • the designer could then add in properties for the media player object such as the name and location of the media stream, whether a chaser (highlighting of the media stream within the video frame) is present, or the type of highlighting (i.e. yellow ring around the object that has focus).
  • the designer may include properties that indicate the objects that are located in each direction in case a user decides to move focus from the media player object to another object.
  • the MPEG object designer may provide the media player object with events such as onLoad that is triggered every time a user views the scene that has the media player object. Other events may include onFocus that indicates that the object has received focus and onBlur that indicates the object has lost focus. An onKeyPress event may be included indicating that if the object is in focus and a key is pressed that this event will occur.
  • the events and properties for the Media Player Object are provided for exemplary purposes to show the nature and scope of events and properties that can be associated with an MPEG object.
  • Other MPEG objects can be created having similar event and properties as well as distinct events and properties as required by the application designer.
  • the authoring environment includes a properties 640 and event tab 650 for defining the properties of a predefined or new object.
  • An example of the properties pane 660 is shown in Fig. 6 A.
  • the properties for a predefined ticker object (a banner that appears to scroll across the video frame) includes the background color, the text color, the text font and the transparency of the ticker 665. It should be recognized that each object type will have different properties.
  • the events tab allows the application designer to make associations between events (received signals from the user) and the object.
  • a button object may include a plurality of states (on and off). Associated with each state may be a separate MPEG video sequence.
  • the event tab allows the application designer to make the association between the signal received from the user, the state change of the object and the change in the video content that is part of the scene.
  • Fig. 6B shows an example of the event tab when selected for a predefined media player object.
  • the events include an onLoad, onFocus, onBlur, onKeyPress, and onClick events 670 for the media player.
  • the authoring environment allows the designer to tab between scenes 680 and tab between the scene layout and the scripting page 690. As shown, the authoring environment includes a template tab.
  • the template tab 695 allows for selection of previously saved scenes, so that a designer can use design information from previous scenes for the creation of new scenes.
  • the designer may be provided with blank event panes and properties panes so that the designer can create a new MPEG object defining properties and events for the new object.
  • Scripts can be added to an application or to a newly created object by selecting the scripting tab.
  • Fig. 6C shows the script editor 691.
  • the script may determine the function that is provided if a client attempts to select a button graphic 692.
  • the script would be part of the application file.
  • the designer may designate that the script is to be used for creating a script internal to the MPEG object such as the client script within the MPEG streaming object shown in Fig. 2 or the script shown in the atomic object of Fig. 1.
  • MPEG objects may also be generated in real-time.
  • a request for an MPEG object is made to the session processor wherein the MPEG object has undefined video and/or audio content.
  • a script at the session processor will cause a separate processor/server to obtain and render the video content for the object, encode the content as an MPEG element and return a complete MPEG object in real-time to the session processor.
  • the server may construct either an atomic or streaming MPEG object.
  • the server may also employee caching techniques to store the newly defined MPEG objects for subsequent MPEG object requests. This methodology is useful for distributed rendering of user specific or real-time generated content.
  • the server may act as a proxy that transcodes a client's photo album where the photos originate in a JPEG format and the server stores the photos as MPEG elements within an MPEG photo album object.
  • the server may then pass the MPEG photo album object to the session processor for use with the requested application. Additionally, the MPEG photo album object would be saved for later retrieval when the client again requests the photo album.
  • the system takes the received information and converts the information into either binary code if a new MPEG object is created or an AVML (active video mark-up language) file if the designer has created a new application.
  • the AVML file is XML based in syntax, but contain specific structures relevant to the formation of an interactive video.
  • the AVML file can contain scripts that interact with MPEG objects.
  • All objects within an application scene have a hierarchy in a logical stack.
  • the hierarchy is assigned based on the sequence of adding the object in the scene.
  • the object first added to the scene is at the bottom of the stack.
  • Objects may be moved up or down within the hierarchy prior to completion of the design and conversion of the graphical scene into the AVML file format.
  • New MPEG objects that are in binary code may be incorporated into applications by referencing the storage location for the binary code.
  • the AVML file output from the authoring environment allows a stitcher module to be aware of the desired output slice configuration from the plurality of MPEG elements associated with the MPEG objects referenced within the AVML file.
  • the AVML file indicates the size of the slices and the location of the slices within an MPEG frame.
  • the AVML file describes the encapsulated self-describing object presentations or states of the MPEG objects. For example, if a button object is graphically placed into the authoring environment by a user, the authoring environment will determine the position of the button within an MPEG video frame based upon this dynamic placement. This position information will be translated into a frame location and will be associated with the MPEG button object. State information will also be placed within the AVML file.
  • the AVML file will list the states for the MPEG button object (on and off) and will have a reference to the location of each MPEG graphical file (MPEG elements) for those two states.
  • a client can request the application by using the client's device 700 as shown in Fig. 7.
  • the client's device 700 will request an interactive session and a session processor 701 will be assigned.
  • the session processor 701 will retrieve the AVML file 702 from a memory location 703 for the requested application and will run a virtual machine 705.
  • the virtual machine 705 will parse the AVML file and identify the MPEG objects that the session processor 701 needs to access for the application.
  • the virtual machine 705 will determine the position of each graphical element 710 from the accessed MPEG objects 720 within a video frame based upon the position information from the AVML file 730 and the sizing information as defined within the MPEG objects 720.
  • the MPEG object that is shown stored in memory has two representative components, the MPEG element 710 and the MPEG method 775.
  • the MPEG element may be internal to the MPEG object or may be external.
  • the MPEG elements 710a,b, which are preferably MPEG slices from one or more MPEG objects are then passed to the stitcher 740 by the virtual machine 705 and the stitcher sequences the slices so that they form an MPEG video frame 750 according to the position information parsed by the virtual machine.
  • the stitcher is presented with the MPEG elements associated with the objects for each state.
  • an MPEG button object has MPEG elements of 64x64 pixels and has two states (on and off)
  • the stitcher will buffer the pre-encoded 64x64 pixel MPEG elements for each state.
  • the MPEG video frame 750 is encapsulated so that it forms a part of an MPEG video stream 760 that is then provided to the client device 700.
  • the client device 700 can then decode the MPEG video stream.
  • the client may then interact with MPEG objects by using an input device 770.
  • the session processor 701 receives the signal form the input device 770 and based on the signal and the object selected methods 775 of the MPEG object 720 will be executed or interpreted by the virtual machine 705 and an MPEG video element 710a will be updated and the updated video element content 710c will be passed to the stitcher 740. Additionally, state information maintained by the session processor for the MPEG object that has been selected will be updated within the application (AVML file).
  • the MPEG video element 710c may already be stored in a buffer within the stitcher. For example, the MPEG element 710c may be representative of a state.
  • a request for change in state of a button may be received by the session processor and the stitcher can access the buffer that contains the MPEG slices of the MPEG element for the 'off-state' assuming the button was previously in the 'on-state.' The stitcher 740 can then replace the MPEG element slice 710a within the MPEG frame 750 and the updated MPEG frame 750a will be sent to the client device 700.
  • the client interacts with the MPEG content even though the client device may only have an MPEG decoder and an upstream connection for sending signals/instructions to the assigned session processor 701.
  • the present invention has been described in terms of MPEG encoding, the invention may be employed with other block based encoding techniques for creating objects that are specific to those block based encoding techniques.
  • the present invention may be embodied in many different forms, including, but in no way limited to, computer program logic for use with a processor (e.g., a microprocessor, microcontroller, digital signal processor, or general purpose computer), programmable logic for use with a programmable logic device (e.g., a Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) or other PLD), discrete components, integrated circuitry (e.g., an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC)), or any other means including any combination thereof.
  • a processor e.g., a microprocessor, microcontroller, digital signal processor, or general purpose computer
  • programmable logic for use with a programmable logic device
  • FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
  • ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
  • predominantly all of the reordering logic may be implemented as a set of computer program instructions that is converted into a computer executable form, stored as such in a computer readable medium, and executed by a microprocessor within the array under the control of an operating system.
  • Source code may include a series of computer program instructions implemented in any of various programming languages (e.g., an object code, an assembly language, or a high-level language such as FORTRAN, C, C++, JAVA, or HTML) for use with various operating systems or operating environments.
  • the source code may define and use various data structures and communication messages.
  • the source code may be in a computer executable form (e.g., via an interpreter), or the source code may be converted (e.g., via a translator, assembler, or compiler) into a computer executable form.
  • the computer program may be fixed in any form (e.g., source code form, computer executable form, or an intermediate form) either permanently or transitorily in a tangible storage medium, such as a semiconductor memory device (e.g., a RAM, ROM, PROM, EEPROM, or Flash-Programmable RAM), a magnetic memory device (e.g., a diskette or fixed disk), an optical memory device (e.g., a CD-ROM), a PC card (e.g., PCMCIA card), or other memory device.
  • the computer program may be fixed in any form in a signal that is transmittable to a computer using any of various communication technologies, including, but in no way limited to, analog technologies, digital technologies, optical technologies, wireless technologies, networking technologies, and internetworking technologies.
  • the computer program may be distributed in any form as a removable storage medium with accompanying printed or electronic documentation (e.g., shrink wrapped software or a magnetic tape), preloaded with a computer system (e.g., on system ROM or fixed disk), or distributed from a server or electronic bulletin board over the communication system (e.g., the Internet or World Wide Web.)
  • printed or electronic documentation e.g., shrink wrapped software or a magnetic tape
  • a computer system e.g., on system ROM or fixed disk
  • a server or electronic bulletin board over the communication system (e.g., the Internet or World Wide Web.)
  • Hardware logic including programmable logic for use with a programmable logic device
  • implementing all or part of the functionality previously described herein may be designed using traditional manual methods, or may be designed, captured, simulated, or documented electronically using various tools, such as Computer Aided Design (CAD), a hardware description language (e.g., VHDL or AHDL), or a PLD programming language (e.g., PALASM, ABEL, or CUPL.)
  • CAD Computer Aided Design
  • a hardware description language e.g., VHDL or AHDL
  • PLD programming language e.g., PALASM, ABEL, or CUPL.
  • the present invention relates to systems and methods for providing interactive content to a remote device and more specifically to systems and methods wherein an object model is associated with pre-encoded video content.
  • the cable head-end transmits content to one or more subscribers wherein the content is transmitted in an encoded form.
  • the content is encoded as digital MPEG video and each subscriber has a set-top box or cable card that is capable of decoding the MPEG video stream.
  • cable providers can now provide interactive content, such as web pages or walled-garden content.
  • the Internet has become more dynamic, including video content on web pages and requiring applications or scripts for decoding the video content, cable providers have adapted to allow subscribers the ability to view these dynamic web pages.
  • the cable head end retrieves the requested web page and renders the web page.
  • the cable headend must first decode any encoded content that appears within the dynamic webpage. For example, if a video is to be played on the webpage, the headend must retrieve the encoded video and decode each frame of the video. The cable headend then renders each frame to form a sequence of bitmap images of the Internet web page. Thus, the web page can only be composited together if all of the content that forms the web page is first decoded. Once the composite frames are complete, the composited video is sent to an encoder, such as an MPEG encoder to be re-encoded. The compressed MPEG video frames are then sent in an MPEG video stream to the user's set-top box.
  • an encoder such as an MPEG encoder to be re-encoded.
  • the compressed MPEG video frames are then sent in an MPEG video stream to the user's set-top box.
  • Embodiments of the invention disclose a system for encoding at least one composite encoded video frame for display on a display device.
  • the system includes a markup language-based graphical layout, the graphical layout including frame locations within the composite frame for at least the first encoded source and the second encoded source. Additionally, the system has a stitcher module for stitching together the first encoded source and the second encoded source according to the frame locations of the graphical layout.
  • the stitcher forms an encoded frame without having to decode the block-based transform encoded data for at least the first source.
  • the encoded video may be encoded using one of the MPEG standards, AVS, VC-I or another block-based encoding protocol.
  • the system allows a user to interact with graphical elements on a display device.
  • the processor maintains state information about one or more graphical elements identified in the graphical layout.
  • the graphical elements in the graphical layout are associated with one of the encoded sources.
  • a user transmits a request to change state of one of the graphical elements through a client device in communication with the system.
  • the request for the change in state causes the processor to register the change in state and to obtain a new encoded source.
  • the processor causes the stitcher to stitch the new encoded source in place of the encoded source representing the graphic element.
  • the processor may also execute or interpret computer code associated with the graphic element.
  • the graphic element may be a button object that has a plurality of states, associated encoded content for each state, and methods associated which each of the states.
  • the system may also include a transmitter for transmitting to the client device the composited video content.
  • the client device can then decode the composited video content and cause the composited video content to be displayed on a display device.
  • each graphical element within the graphical layout is associated with one or more encoded MPEG video frames or portions of a video frame, such as one or more macroblocks or slices.
  • the compositor may use a single graphical element repeatedly within the MPEG video stream.
  • the button may be only a single video frame in one state and a single video frame in another state and the button may be composited together with MPEG encoded video content wherein the encoded macroblocks representing the button are stitched into the MPEG encoded video content in each frame.
  • FIG. 1 A block diagram illustrating an MPEG video stream.
  • FIG. 1 A block diagram illustrating an MPEG video stream.
  • FIG. 1 A block diagram illustrating an MPEG video stream.
  • FIG. 1 A block diagram illustrating an MPEG video stream.
  • FIG. 1 A block diagram illustrating an MPEG video stream.
  • FIG. 1 A block diagram illustrating an MPEG video stream.
  • FIG. 1 A block diagram illustrating an MPEG video stream.
  • FIG. 1 A block diagram illustrating an MPEG video stream.
  • FIG. 1 A block diagram illustrating an MPEG video stream.
  • FIG. 1 A block diagram illustrating an MPEG video stream.
  • FIG. 1 A block diagram illustrating an MPEG video stream.
  • FIG. 1 A block diagram illustrating an MPEG video stream.
  • FIG. 1 A block diagram illustrating an MPEG video stream.
  • FIG. 1 A block diagram illustrating an MPEG video stream.
  • FIG. 1 A block diagram illustrating an MPEG video stream.
  • FIG. 1 A block diagram illustrating an MPEG video stream.
  • the stitcher module stitches together the first MPEG source and the second MPEG source according to the frame locations of the graphical layout to form an MPEG frame without having to decode the macroblock data of the MPEG sources.
  • the MPEG sources are only decoded to the slice layer and a processor maintains the positions of the slices within the frame for the first and second MPEG sources. This process is repeated for each frame of MPEG data in order to form an MPEG video stream.
  • the system includes a groomer.
  • the groomer grooms the MPEG sources so that each MPEG element of the MPEG source is converted to an MPEG P- frame format.
  • the groomer module may also identify any macroblocks in the second MPEG source that include motion vectors that reference other macroblocks in a section of the first MPEG source and re-encodes those macroblocks as intracoded macroblocks.
  • the system may include an association between an MPEG source and a method for the MPEG source forming an MPEG object.
  • a processor would receive a request from a client device and in response to the request, a method of the MPEG object would be used. The method may change the state of the MPEG object and cause the selection of a different MPEG source.
  • the stitcher may replace a first MPEG source with a third MPEG source and stitch together the third and second MPEG sources to form a video frame.
  • the video frame would be streamed to the client device and the client device could decode the updated MPEG video frame and display the updated material on the client's display.
  • an MPEG button object may have an "on” state and an "off state and the MPEG button object may also include two MPEG graphics composed of a plurality of macroblocks forming slices.
  • a method would update the state and cause the MPEG graphic representing an "on" button to be passed to the stitcher.
  • the video frame may be constructed from an unencoded graphic or a graphic that is not MPEG encoded and a groomed MPEG video source.
  • the unencoded graphic may first be rendered.
  • a background may be rendered as a bit map.
  • the background may then be encoded as a series of MPEG macroblocks divided up into slices.
  • the stitcher can then stitch together the background and the groomed MPEG video content to form an MPEG video stream.
  • the background may then be saved for later reuse. In such a configuration, the background would have cut-out regions wherein the slices in those regions would have no associated data, thus video content slices could be inserted into the cut-out.
  • real-time broadcasts may be received and groomed for creating MPEG video streams.
  • Fig. 1 is a block diagram showing a communications environment for implementing one version of the present invention
  • Fig. IA shows the regional processing offices and the video content distribution network
  • Fig. IB is a sample composite stream presentation and interaction layout file
  • Fig. 1C shows the construction of a frame within the authoring environment
  • Fig. ID shows breakdown of a frame by macroblocks into elements
  • Fig. 2 is a diagram showing multiple sources composited onto a display
  • Fig. 3 is a diagram of a system incorporating grooming
  • Fig. 4 is a diagram showing a video frame prior to grooming, after grooming, and with a video overlay in the groomed section;
  • Fig. 5 is a diagram showing how grooming is done, for example, removal of B - frames
  • Fig. 6 is a diagram showing an MPEG frame structure
  • Fig. 7 is a flow chart showing the grooming process for I, B, and P frames
  • Fig. 8 is a diagram depicting removal of region boundary motion vectors
  • Fig. 9 is a diagram showing the reordering of the DCT coefficients
  • Fig. 10 shows an alternative groomer
  • Fig. 11 is an example of a video frame
  • Fig. 12 is a diagram showing video frames starting in random positions relative to each other;
  • Fig. 13 is a diagram of a display with multiple MPEG elements composited within the picture
  • Fig. 14 is a diagram showing the slice breakdown of a picture consisting of multiple elements
  • Fig. 15 is a diagram showing slice based encoding in preparation for stitching
  • Fig. 16 is a diagram detailing the compositing of a video element into a picture
  • Fig. 17 is a diagram detailing compositing of a 16x16 sized macroblock element into a background comprised of 24x24 sized macroblocks;
  • Fig. 18 is a flow chart showing the steps involved in encoding and building a composited picture
  • Fig. 19 is a diagram providing a simple example of grooming
  • Fig. 20 is a diagram showing that the composited element does not need to be rectangular nor contiguous
  • Fig. 21 shows a diagram of elements on a screen wherein a single element is noncontiguous
  • Fig. 22 shows a groomer for grooming linear broadcast content for multicasting to a plurality of processing offices and/or session processors
  • Fig. 23 shows an example of a customized mosaic when displayed on a display device
  • Fig. 24 is a diagram of an IP based network for providing interactive MPEG content
  • FIG. 25 is a diagram of a cable based network for providing interactive MPEG content
  • FIG. 26 is a flow-chart of the resource allocation process for a load balancer for use with a cable based network.
  • FIG. 27 is a system diagram used to show communication between cable network elements for load balancing.
  • region shall mean a logical grouping of MPEG (Motion Picture Expert Group) slices that are either contiguous or non-contiguous.
  • MPEG Motion Picture Expert Group
  • MPEG Motion Picture Expert Group
  • the present invention as described in the embodiments below provides an environment for interactive MPEG content and communications between a processing office and a client device having an associated display, such as a television,.
  • the present invention specifically references the MPEG specification and encoding, principles of the invention may be employed with other encoding techniques that are based upon block-based transforms that result in a representation of the content in the frequency domain.
  • encode, encoded, and encoding shall refer to the process of compressing a digital data signal and formatting the compressed digital data signal to a protocol or standard.
  • Encoded video data can be in any state other than a spatial representation.
  • encoded video data may be transform coded, quantized, and entropy encoded or any combination thereof. Therefore, data that has been transform coded will be considered to be encoded.
  • the display device may be a cell phone, a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA) or other device that includes a display.
  • a client device including a decoding device, such as a set-top box that can decode MPEG content, is associated with the display device of the user.
  • the decoder and the display device may be integrated.
  • the interactive MPEG content is created in an authoring environment allowing an application designer to design the interactive MPEG content creating an application having one or more scenes from various elements including video content from content providers and linear broadcasters.
  • An application file is formed in an Active Video Markup Language (AVML).
  • the AVML file produced by the authoring environment is an XML-based file defining the video graphical elements (i.e.
  • the MPEG slices within a single frame/page, the sizes of the video graphical elements, the layout of the video graphical elements within the page/frame for each scene, links to the video graphical elements, and any scripts for the scene.
  • the AVML file may also be authored in a text editor in addition to being generated by the authoring environment.
  • the video graphical elements may be static graphics, dynamic graphics, or video content. It should be recognized that each element within a scene is really a sequence of images and a static graphic is an image that is repeatedly displayed and does not change over time.
  • Each of the elements may be an MPEG object that can include both MPEG data for graphics and operations associated with the graphics.
  • the interactive MPEG content can include multiple interactive MPEG objects within a scene with which a user can interact.
  • the scene may include a button MPEG object that provides encoded MPEG data forming the video graphic for the object and also includes a procedure for keeping track of the button state.
  • the MPEG objects may work in coordination with the scripts.
  • an MPEG button object may keep track of its state (on/off), but a script within the scene will determine what occurs when that button is pressed.
  • the script may associate the button state with a video program so that the button will indicate whether the video content is playing or stopped.
  • MPEG objects always have an associated action as part of the object.
  • the MPEG objects such as a button MPEG object, may perform actions beyond keeping track of the status of the button.
  • the MPEG object may also include a call to an external program, wherein the MPEG object will access the program when the button graphic is engaged.
  • the MPEG object may include code that keeps track of the state of the button, provides a graphical overlay based upon a state change, and/or causes a video player object to play or pause the video content depending on the state of the button.
  • the processing office assigns a processor for the interactive session.
  • the assigned processor operational at the processing office runs a virtual machine and accesses and runs the requested application.
  • the processor prepares the graphical part of the scene for transmission in the MPEG format.
  • a user can interact with the displayed content by using an input device in communication with the client device.
  • the client device sends input requests from the user through a communication network to the application running on the assigned processor at the processing office or other remote location.
  • the assigned processor updates the graphical layout based upon the request and the state of the MPEG objects hereinafter referred to in total as the application state. New elements may be added to the scene or replaced within the scene or a completely new scene may be created.
  • the assigned processor collects the elements and the objects for the scene, and either the assigned processor or another processor processes the data and operations according to the object(s) and produces the revised graphical representation in an MPEG format that is transmitted to the transceiver for display on the user's television.
  • the assigned processor may be located at a remote location and need only be in communication with the processing office through a network connection.
  • the assigned processor is described as handling all transactions with the client device, other processors may also be involved with requests and assembly of the content (MPEG objects) of the graphical layout for the application.
  • Fig. l is a block diagram showing a communications environment 100 for implementing one version of the present invention.
  • the communications environment 100 allows an applications programmer to create an application for two-way interactivity with an end user.
  • the end user views the application on a client device 110, such as a television, and can interact with the content by sending commands upstream through an upstream network 120 wherein upstream and downstream may be part of the same network or a separate network providing the return path link to the processing office.
  • the application programmer creates an application that includes one or more scenes. Each scene is the equivalent of an HTML webpage except that each element within the scene is a video sequence.
  • the application programmer designs the graphical representation of the scene and incorporates links to elements, such as audio and video files and objects, such as buttons and controls for the scene.
  • the application programmer uses a graphical authoring tool 130 to graphically select the objects and elements.
  • the authoring environment 130 may include a graphical interface that allows an application programmer to associate methods with elements creating video objects.
  • the graphics may be MPEG encoded video, groomed MPEG video, still images or video in another format.
  • the application programmer can incorporate content from a number of sources including content providers 160 (news sources, movie studios, RSS feeds etc.) and linear broadcast sources (broadcast media and cable, on demand video sources and web-based video sources) 170 into an application.
  • the application programmer creates the application as a file in AVML (active video mark-up language) and sends the application file to a proxy/cache 140 within a video content distribution network 150.
  • the AVML file format is an XML format. For example see Fig. IB that shows a sample AVML file.
  • the content provider 160 may encode the video content as MPEG video/audio or the content may be in another graphical format (e.g. JPEG, BITMAP, H263, H264, VC-I etc.).
  • the content may be subsequently groomed and/or scaled in a Groomer/Scaler 190 to place the content into a preferable encoded MPEG format that will allow for stitching. If the content is not placed into the preferable MPEG format, the processing office will groom the format when an application that requires the content is requested by a client device.
  • Linear broadcast content 170 from broadcast media services, like content from the content providers, will be groomed.
  • the linear broadcast content is preferably groomed and/or scaled in Groomer/Scaler 180 that encodes the content in the preferable MPEG format for stitching prior to passing the content to the processing office.
  • the video content from the content producers 160 along with the applications created by application programmers are distributed through a video content distribution network 150 and are stored at distribution points 140. These distribution points are represented as the proxy/cache within Fig. 1.
  • Content providers place their content for use with the interactive processing office in the video content distribution network at a proxy/cache 140 location.
  • content providers 160 can provide their content to the cache 140 of the video content distribution network 150 and one or more processing office that implements the present architecture may access the content through the video content distribution network 150 when needed for an application.
  • the video content distribution network 150 may be a local network, a regional network or a global network.
  • the application can be retrieved from one of the distribution points and the content as defined within the application's AVML file can be retrieved from the same or a different distribution point.
  • An end user of the system can request an interactive session by sending a command through the client device 110, such as a set-top box, to a processing office 105.
  • a processing office 105 In Fig. 1, only a single processing office is shown. However, in real-world applications, there may be a plurality of processing offices located in different regions, wherein each of the processing offices is in communication with a video content distribution network as shown in Fig. IB.
  • the processing office 105 assigns a processor for the end user for an interactive session.
  • the processor maintains the session including all addressing and resource allocation.
  • virtual machine 106 shall refer to the assigned processor, as well as, other processors at the processing office that perform functions, such as session management between the processing office and the client device as well as resource allocation (i.e. assignment of a processor for an interactive session).
  • the virtual machine 106 communicates its address to the client device 110 and an interactive session is established.
  • the user can then request presentation of an interactive application (AVML) through the client device 110.
  • AVML interactive application
  • the request is received by the virtual machine 106 and in response, the virtual machine 106 causes the AVML file to be retrieved from the proxy/cache 140 and installed into a memory cache 107 that is accessible by the virtual machine 106.
  • the virtual machine 106 may be in simultaneous communication with a plurality of client devices 110 and the client devices may be different device types.
  • a first device may be a cellular telephone
  • a second device may be a set-top box
  • a third device may be a personal digital assistant wherein each device access the same or a different application.
  • An MPEG object includes both a visual component and an actionable component.
  • the visual component may be encoded as one or more MPEG slices or provided in another graphical format.
  • the actionable component may be storing the state of the object, may include performing computations, accessing an associated program, or displaying overlay graphics to identify the graphical component as active.
  • An overlay graphic may be produced by a signal being transmitted to a client device wherein the client device creates a graphic in the overlay plane on the display device. It should be recognized that a scene is not a static graphic, but rather includes a plurality of video frames wherein the content of the frames can change over time.
  • the virtual machine 106 determines based upon the scene information, including the application state, the size and location of the various elements and objects for a scene.
  • Each graphical element may be formed from contiguous or non-contiguous MPEG slices.
  • the virtual machine keeps track of the location of all of the slices for each graphical element. All of the slices that define a graphical element form a region.
  • the virtual machine 106 keeps track of each region. Based on the display position information within the AVML file, the slice positions for the elements and background within a video frame are set. If the graphical elements are not already in a groomed format, the virtual machine passes that element to an element renderer.
  • the renderer renders the graphical element as a bitmap and the renderer passes the bitmap to an MPEG element encoder 109.
  • the MPEG element encoder encodes the bitmap as an MPEG video sequence.
  • the MPEG encoder processes the bitmap so that it outputs a series of P-frames.
  • An example of content that is not already pre-encoded and pre- groomed is personalized content. For example, if a user has stored music files at the processing office and the graphic element to be presented is a listing of the user's music files, this graphic would be created in real-time as a bitmap by the virtual machine.
  • the virtual machine would pass the bitmap to the element renderer 108 which would render the bitmap and pass the bitmap to the MPEG element encoder 109 for grooming.
  • the MPEG element encoder 109 After the graphical elements are groomed by the MPEG element encoder, the MPEG element encoder 109 passes the graphical elements to memory 107 for later retrieval by the virtual machine 106 for other interactive sessions by other users. The MPEG encoder 109 also passes the MPEG encoded graphical elements to the stitcher 115. The rendering of an element and MPEG encoding of an element may be accomplished in the same or a separate processor from the virtual machine 106. The virtual machine 106 also determines if there are any scripts within the application that need to be interpreted. If there are scripts, the scripts are interpreted by the virtual machine 106.
  • Each scene in an application can include a plurality of elements including static graphics, object graphics that change based upon user interaction, and video content.
  • a scene may include a background (static graphic), along with a media player for playback of audio video and multimedia content (object graphic) having a plurality of buttons, and a video content window (video content) for displaying the streaming video content.
  • object graphic static graphic
  • video content window video content
  • Each button of the media player may itself be a separate object graphic that includes its own associated methods.
  • the virtual machine 106 acquires each of the graphical elements (background, media player graphic, and video frame) for a frame and determines the location of each element. Once all of the objects and elements (background, video content) are acquired, the elements and graphical objects are passed to the stitcher/compositor 115 along with positioning information for the elements and MPEG objects.
  • the stitcher 115 stitches together each of the elements (video content, buttons, graphics, background) according to the mapping provided by the virtual machine 106.
  • Each of the elements is placed on a macroblock boundary and when stitched together the elements form an MPEG video frame.
  • On a periodic basis all of the elements of a scene frame are encoded to form a reference P-frame in order to refresh the sequence and avoid dropped macroblocks.
  • the MPEG video stream is then transmitted to the address of client device through the down stream network. The process continues for each of the video frames.
  • the virtual machine 106 or other processor or process at the processing office 105 maintains information about each of the elements and the location of the elements on the screen.
  • the virtual machine 106 also has access to the methods for the objects associated with each of the elements.
  • a media player may have a media player object that includes a plurality of routines.
  • the routines can include, play, stop, fast forward, rewind, and pause.
  • Each of the routines includes code and upon a user sending a request to the processing office 105 for activation of one of the routines, the object is accessed and the routine is run.
  • the routine may be a JAVA-based applet, a script to be interpreted, or a separate computer program capable of being run within the operating system associated with the virtual machine.
  • the processing office 105 may also create a linked data structure for determining the routine to execute or interpret based upon a signal received by the processor from the client device associated with the television.
  • the linked data structure may be formed by an included mapping module.
  • the data structure associates each resource and associated object relative to every other resource and object. For example, if a user has already engaged the play control, a media player object is activated and the video content is displayed. As the video content is playing in a media player window, the user can depress a directional key on the user's remote control. In this example, the depression of the directional key is indicative of pressing a stop button.
  • the transceiver produces a directional signal and the assigned processor receives the directional signal.
  • the virtual machine 106 or other processor at the processing office 105 accesses the linked data structure and locates the element in the direction of the directional key press.
  • the database indicates that the element is a stop button that is part of a media player object and the processor implements the routine for stopping the video content.
  • the routine will cause the requested content to stop.
  • the last video content frame will be frozen and a depressed stop button graphic will be interwoven by the stitcher module into the frame.
  • the routine may also include a focus graphic to provide focus around the stop button.
  • the virtual machine can cause the stitcher to enclose the graphic having focus with a boarder that is 1 macroblock wide. Thus, when the video frame is decoded and displayed, the user will be able to identify the graphic/object that the user can interact with.
  • the frame will then be passed to a multiplexor and sent through the downstream network to the client device.
  • the MPEG encoded video frame is decoded by the client device displayed on either the client device (cell phone, PDA) or on a separate display device (monitor, television). This process occurs in near real-time with a minimal delay.
  • each scene from an application results in a plurality of video frames each representing a snapshot of the media player application state.
  • the virtual machine 106 will repeatedly receive commands from the client device and in response to the commands will either directly or indirectly access the objects and execute or interpret the routines of the objects in response to user interaction and application interaction model.
  • the video content material displayed on the television of the user is merely decoded MPEG content and all of the processing for the interactivity occurs at the processing office and is orchestrated by the assigned virtual machine.
  • the client device only needs a decoder and need not cache or process any of the content.
  • the processing office could replace a video element with another video element.
  • a user may select from a list of movies to display and therefore a first video content element would be replaced by a second video content element if the user selects to switch between two movies.
  • the virtual machine which maintains a listing of the location of each element and region forming an element can easily replace elements within a scene creating a new MPEG video frame wherein the frame is stitched together including the new element in the stitcher 115.
  • Fig. IA shows the interoperation between the digital content distribution network 10OA, the content providers HOA and the processing offices 120A.
  • the content providers 130A distribute content into the video content distribution network 10OA.
  • Either the content providers 130A or processors associated with the video content distribution network convert the content to an MPEG format that is compatible with the processing office's 120A creation of interactive MPEG content.
  • a content management server 140A of the digital content distribution network 100 A distributes the MPEG-encoded content among proxy/caches 150A- 154 A located in different regions if the content is of a global/national scope. If the content is of a regional/local scope, the content will reside in a regional/local proxy/cache.
  • the content may be mirrored throughout the country or world at different locations in order to increase access times.
  • the regional processing office When an end user, through their client device 160A, requests an application from a regional processing office, the regional processing office will access the requested application.
  • the requested application may be located within the video content distribution network or the application may reside locally to the regional processing office or within the network of interconnected processing offices.
  • the virtual machine assigned at the regional processing office will determine the video content that needs to be retrieved.
  • the content management server 140 A assists the virtual machine in locating the content within the video content distribution network.
  • the content management server 140A can determine if the content is located on a regional or local proxy/cache and also locate the nearest proxy/cache.
  • the application may include advertising and the content management server will direct the virtual machine to retrieve the advertising from a local proxy/cache.
  • both the Midwestern and Southeastern regional processing offices 120A also have local proxy/caches 153 A, 154A. These proxy/caches may contain local news and local advertising.
  • the scenes presented to an end user in the Southeast may appear different to an end user in the Midwest.
  • Each end user may be presented with different local news stories or different advertising.
  • the virtual machine processes the content and creates an MPEG video stream.
  • the MPEG video stream is then directed to the requesting client device.
  • the end user may then interact with the content requesting an updated scene with new content and the virtual machine at the processing office will update the scene by requesting the new video content from the proxy/cache of the video content distribution network.
  • the authoring environment includes a graphical editor as shown in Fig. 1C for developing interactive applications.
  • An application includes one or more scenes.
  • the application window shows that the application is composed of three scenes (scene 1, scene 2 and scene 3).
  • the graphical editor allows a developer to select elements to be placed into the scene forming a display that will eventually be shown on a display device associated with the user.
  • the elements are dragged-and-dropped into the application window. For example, a developer may want to include a media player object and media player button objects and will select these elements from a toolbar and drag and drop the elements in the window.
  • the developer can select the element and a property window for the element is provided.
  • the property window includes at least the location of the graphical element (address), and the size of the graphical element. If the graphical element is associated with an object, the property window will include a tab that allows the developer to switch to a bitmap event screen and alter the associated object parameters. For example, a user may change the functionality associated with a button or may define a program associated with the button.
  • the stitcher of the system creates a series of MPEG frames for the scene based upon the AVML file that is the output of the authoring environment.
  • Each element/graphical object within a scene is composed of different slices defining a region.
  • a region defining an element/object may be contiguous or non-contiguous.
  • the system snaps the slices forming the graphics on a macro-block boundary.
  • Each element need not have contiguous slices.
  • the background has a number of non-contiguous slices each composed of a plurality of macroblocks.
  • the background if it is static, can be defined by intracoded macroblocks.
  • graphics for each of the buttons can be intracoded; however the buttons are associated with a state and have multiple possible graphics.
  • the button may have a first state "off and a second state "on" wherein the first graphic shows an image of a button in a non-depressed state and the second graphic shows the button in a depressed state.
  • Fig. 1C also shows a third graphical element, which is the window for the movie.
  • the movie slices are encoded with a mix of intracoded and intercoded macroblocks and dynamically changes based upon the content.
  • the background is dynamic, the background can be encoded with both intracoded and intercoded macroblocks, subject to the requirements below regarding grooming.
  • the processing office When a user selects an application through a client device, the processing office will stitch together the elements in accordance with the layout from the graphical editor of the authoring environment.
  • the output of the authoring environment includes an Active Video Mark-up Language file (AVML)
  • AVML Active Video Mark-up Language file
  • the AVML file provides state information about multi-state elements such as a button, the address of the associated graphic, and the size of the graphic.
  • the AVML file indicates the locations within the MPEG frame for each element, indicates the objects that are associated with each element, and includes the scripts that define changes to the MPEG frame based upon user's actions. For example, a user may send an instruction signal to the processing office and the processing office will use the AVML file to construct a set of new MPEG frames based upon the received instruction signal.
  • a user may want to switch between various video elements and may send an instruction signal to the processing office.
  • the processing office will remove a video element within the layout for a frame and will select the second video element causing the second video element to be stitched into the MPEG frame at the location of the first video element. This process is described below.
  • the application programming environment outputs an AVML file.
  • the AVML file has an XML-based syntax.
  • the AVML file syntax includes a root object ⁇ AVML>.
  • Other top level tags include ⁇ initialscene> that specifies the first scene to be loaded when an application starts.
  • the ⁇ script> tag identifies a script and a ⁇ scene> tag identifies a scene.
  • a top level stream tag may include ⁇ aspect ratio> for the video stream, ⁇ video format>, ⁇ bit rate>, ⁇ audio format> and ⁇ audio bit rate>.
  • a scene tag may include each of the elements within the scene.
  • ⁇ background> for the background For example, ⁇ background> for the background, ⁇ button> for a button object, and ⁇ static image> for a still graphic.
  • Other tags include ⁇ size> and ⁇ pos> for the size and position of an element and may be lower level tags for each element within a scene.
  • An example of an AVML file is provided in Fig. IB. Further discussion of the AVML file syntax is provided in Appendix A attached hereto.
  • Fig. 2 is a diagram of a representative display that could be provided to a television of a requesting client device.
  • the display 200 shows three separate video content elements appearing on the screen.
  • Element #1 211 is the background in which element #2 215 and element #3 217 are inserted.
  • Fig. 3 shows a first embodiment of a system that can generate the display of Fig. 2.
  • the three video content elements come in as encoded video: element #1 303, element #2 305, and element #3 307.
  • the groomers 310 each receive an encoded video content element and the groomers process each element before the stitcher 340 combines the groomed video content elements into a single composited video 380.
  • groomers 310 may be a single processor or multiple processors that operate in parallel.
  • the groomers may be located either within the processing office, at content providers' facilities, or linear broadcast provider's facilities.
  • the groomers may not be directly connected to the stitcher, as shown in Fig. 1 wherein the groomers 190 and 180 are not directly coupled to stitcher 115.
  • Grooming removes some of the interdependencies present in compressed video.
  • the groomer will convert I and B frames to P frames and will fix any stray motion vectors that reference a section of another frame of video that has been cropped or removed.
  • a groomed video stream can be used in combination with other groomed video streams and encoded still images to form a composite MPEG video stream.
  • Each groomed video stream includes a plurality of frames and the frames can be can be easily inserted into another groomed frame wherein the composite frames are grouped together to form an MPEG video stream.
  • the groomed frames may be formed from one or more MPEG slices and may be smaller in size than an MPEG video frame in the MPEG video stream.
  • Fig. 4 is an example of a composite video frame that contains a plurality of elements 410, 420.
  • This composite video frame is provided for illustrative purposes.
  • the groomers as shown in Fig. 1 only receive a single element and groom the element (video sequence), so that the video sequence can be stitched together in the stitcher.
  • the groomers do not receive a plurality of elements simultaneously.
  • the background video frame 410 includes 1 row per slice (this is an example only; the row could be composed of any number of slices).
  • the layout of the video frame including the location of all of the elements within the scene are defined by the application programmer in the AVML file. For example, the application programmer may design the background element for a scene.
  • the application programmer may have the background encoded as MPEG video and may groom the background prior to having the background placed into the proxy cache 140. Therefore, when an application is requested, each of the elements within the scene of the application may be groomed video and the groomed video can easily be stitched together. It should be noted that although two groomers are shown within Fig. 1 for the content provider and for the linear broadcasters, groomers may be present in other parts of the system.
  • video element 420 is inserted within the background video frame 410 (also for example only; this element could also consist of multiple slices per row). If a macroblock within the original video frame 410 references another macroblock in determining its value and the reference macroblock is removed from the frame because the video image 420 is inserted in its place, the macroblocks value needs to be recalculated. Similarly, if a macroblock references another macroblock in a subsequent frame and that macroblock is removed and other source material is inserted in its place, the macroblock values need to be recalculated. This is addressed by grooming the video 430. The video frame is processed so that the rows contain multiple slices some of which are specifically sized and located to match the substitute video content.
  • the groomed video stream has been specifically defined to address that particular overlay. A different overlay would dictate different grooming parameters. Thus, this type of grooming addresses the process of segmenting a video frame into slices in preparation for stitching. It should be noted that there is never a need to add slices to the overlay element. Slices are only added to the receiving element, that is, the element into which the overlay will be placed.
  • the groomed video stream can contain information about the stream's groomed characteristics. Characteristics that can be provided include: 1. the locations for the upper left and lower right corners of the groomed window. 2. The location of upper left corner only and then the size of the window. The size of the slice accurate to the pixel level.
  • the first is to provide that information in the slice header.
  • the second is to provide the information in the extended data slice structure. Either of these options can be used to successfully pass the necessary information to future processing stages, such as the virtual machine and stitcher.
  • Fig. 5 shows the video sequence for a video graphical element before and after grooming.
  • the original incoming encoded stream 500 has a sequence of MPEG I-frames 510, B-frames 530 550, and P-frames 570 as are known to those of ordinary skill in the art.
  • the I-frame is used as a reference 512 for all the other frames, both B and P. This is shown via the arrows from the I-frame to all the other frames.
  • the P- frame is used as a reference frame 572 for both B-frames.
  • the groomer processes the stream and replaces all the frames with P-frames.
  • First the original I-frame 510 is converted to an intracoded P-frame 520.
  • the B-frames 530, 550 are converted 535 to P-frames 540 and 560 and modified to reference only the frame immediately prior. Also, the P-frames 570 are modified to move their reference 574 from the original I-frame 510 to the newly created P- frame 560 immediately in preceding themselves. The resulting P-frame 580 is shown in the output stream of groomed encoded frames 590.
  • Fig. 6 is a diagram of a standard MPEG-2 bitstream syntax.
  • MPEG-2 is used as an example and the invention should not be viewed as limited to this example.
  • the hierarchical structure of the bitstream starts at the sequence level. This contains the sequence header 600 followed by group of picture (GOP) data 605.
  • the GOP data contains the GOP header 620 followed by picture data 625.
  • the picture data 625 contains the picture header 640 followed by the slice data 645.
  • the slice data 645 consists of some slice overhead 660 followed by macroblock data 665.
  • the macroblock data 665 consists of some macroblock overhead 680 followed by block data 685 (the block data is broken down further but that is not required for purposes of this reference). Sequence headers act as normal in the groomer.
  • Fig. 7 provides a flow for grooming the video sequence.
  • First the frame type is determining 700: 1-frame 703 B-frame 705, or P-frame 707.
  • I-frames 703 as do B-frames 705 need to be converted to P-frames.
  • 1-frames need to match the picture information that the stitcher requires. For example, this information may indicate the encoding parameters set in the picture header. Therefore, the first step is to modify the picture header information 730 so that the information in the picture header is consistent for all groomed video sequences.
  • the stitcher settings are system level settings that may be included in the application. These are the parameters that will be used for all levels of the bit stream. The items that require modification are provided in the table below:
  • slice overhead information 740 must be modified.
  • the parameters to modify are given in the table below.
  • the macroblock overhead 750 information may require modification.
  • the values to be modified are given in the table below.
  • block information 760 may require modification.
  • the items to modify are given in the table below.
  • the process can start over with the next frame of video.
  • the frame type is a B-frame 705
  • the same steps required for an I-frame are also required for the B-frame.
  • the motion vectors 770 need to be modified. There are two scenarios: B-frame immediately following an I-frame or P-frame, or a B-frame following another B-frame. Should the B-frame follow either an I or P frame, the motion vector, using the I or P frame as a reference, can remain the same and only the residual would need to change. This may be as simple as converting the forward looking motion vector to be the residual.
  • the motion vector and its residual will both need to be modified.
  • the second B-frame must now reference the newly converted B to P frame immediately preceding it.
  • the B-frame and its reference are decoded and the motion vector and the residual are recalculated. It must be noted that while the frame is decoded to update the motion vectors, there is no need to re-encode the DCT coefficients. These remain the same. Only the motion vector and residual are calculated and modified.
  • the last frame type is the P-frame.
  • This frame type also follows the same path as an I-frame Fig. 8 diagrams the motion vector modification for macroblocks adjacent to a region boundary. It should be recognized that motion vectors on a region boundary are most relevant to background elements into which other video elements are being inserted. Therefore, grooming of the background elements may be accomplished by the application creator. Similarly, if a video element is cropped and is being inserted into a "hole" in the background element, the cropped element may include motion vectors that point to locations outside of the "hole”.
  • Grooming motion vectors for a cropped image may be done by the content creator if the content creator knows the size that the video element needs to be cropped, or the grooming may be accomplished by the virtual machine in combination with the element Tenderer and MPEG encoder if the video element to be inserted is larger than the size of the "hole" in the background.
  • Fig. 8 graphically shows the problems that occur with motion vectors that surround a region that is being removed from a background element.
  • the scene includes two regions: #1 800 and #2 820.
  • region #2 820 that is inserting into region #1 800 (background) uses region #1 800 (background) as a reference for motion 840.
  • region #1 800 uses region #2 820 as a reference for motion 860.
  • the groomer removes these improper motion vector references by either re-encoding them using a frame within the same region or converting the macroblocks to be intracoded blocks.
  • the groomer may also convert field based encoded macroblocks to frame based encoded macroblocks.
  • Fig. 9 shows the conversion of a field based encoded macroblocks to frame based.
  • a frame based set of blocks 900 is compressed.
  • the compressed block set 910 contains the same information in the same blocks but now it is contained in compressed form.
  • a field based macroblock 940 is also compressed. When this is done, all the even rows (0, 2, 4, 6) are placed in the upper blocks (0 & 1) while the odd rows (1, 3, 5, 7) are placed in the lower blocks (2&3).
  • Fig. 10 shows a second embodiment of the grooming platform. All the components are the same as the first embodiment: groomers 111OA and stitcher 1130A. The inputs are also the same: input #1 1103A, input #2 1105A, and input #3 1107A as well as the composited output 1280.
  • the difference in this system is that the stitcher 1140A provides feedback, both synchronization and frame type information, to each of the groomers 11 1OA. With the synchronization and frame type information, the stitcher 1240 can define a GOP structure that the groomers 111OA follow. With this feedback and the GOP structure, the output of the groomer is no longer P-frames only but can also include I-frames and B-frames.
  • the limitation to an embodiment without feedback is that no groomer would know what type of frame the stitcher was building.
  • the groomers 111OA will know what picture type the stitcher is building and so the groomers will provide a matching frame type. This improves the picture quality assuming the same data rate and may decrease the data rate assuming that the quality level is kept constant due to more reference frames and less modification of existing frames while, at the same time, reducing the bit rate since B-frames are allowed.
  • Fig. 11 shows an environment for implementing a stitcher module, such as the stitcher shown in Fig. 1.
  • the stitcher 1200 receives video elements from different sources.
  • Uncompressed content 1210 is encoded in an encoder 1215, such as the MPEG element encoder shown in Fig. 1 prior to its arrival at the stitcher 1200.
  • Compressed or encoded video 1220 does not need to be encoded. There is, however, the need to separate the audio 1217 1227 from the video 1219 1229 in both cases.
  • the audio is fed into an audio selector 1230 to be included in the stream.
  • the video is fed into a frame synchronization block 1240 before it is put into a buffer 1250.
  • the frame constructor 1270 pulls data from the buffers 1250 based on input from the controller 1275.
  • the video out of the frame constructor 1270 is fed into a multiplexer 1280 along with the audio after the audio has been delayed 1260 to align with the video.
  • the multiplexer 1280 combines the audio and video streams and outputs the composited, encoded output streams 1290 that can be played on any standard decoder. Multiplexing a data stream into a program or transport stream is well known to those familiar in the art.
  • the encoded video sources can be real-time, from a stored location, or a combination of both. There is no requirement that all of the sources arrive in real-time.
  • Fig. 12 shows an example of three video content elements that are temporally out of sync.
  • element #1 1300 is used as an "anchor" or “reference” frame. That is, it is used as the master frame and all other frames will be aligned to it (this is for example only; the system could have its own master frame reference separate from any of the incoming video sources).
  • the output frame timing 1370 1380 is set to match the frame timing of element #1 1300.
  • Elements #2 & 3 1320 and 1340 do not align with element #1 1300. Therefore, their frame start is located and they are stored in a buffer. For example, element #2 1320 will be delayed one frame so an entire frame is available before it is composited along with the reference frame.
  • Element #3 is much slower than the reference frame. Element #3 is collected over two frames and presented over two frames. That is, each frame of element #3 1340 is displayed for two consecutive frames in order to match the frame rate of the reference frame. Conversely if a frame, not shown, was running at twice the rate of the reference frame, then every other frame would be dropped (not shown). More than likely all elements are running at almost the same speed so only infrequently would a frame need to be repeated or dropped in order to maintain synchronization.
  • Fig. 13 shows an example composited video frame 1400.
  • the frame is made up of 40 macroblocks per row 1410 with 30 rows per picture 1420.
  • the size is used as an example and it not intended to restrict the scope of the invention.
  • the frame includes a background 1430 that has elements 1440 composited in various locations. These elements 1440 can be video elements, static elements, etc. That is, the frame is constructed of a full background, which then has particular areas replaced with different elements. This particular example shows four elements composited on a background.
  • Fig. 14 shows a more detailed version of the screen illustrating the slices within the picture.
  • the diagram depicts a picture consisting of 40 macroblocks per row and 30 rows per picture (non-restrictive, for illustration purposes only). However, it also shows the picture divided up into slices.
  • the size of the slice can be a full row 1590 (shown as shaded) or a few macroblocks within a row 1580 (shown as rectangle with diagonal lines inside element #4 1528).
  • the background 1530 has been broken into multiple regions with the slice size matching the width of each region. This can be better seen by looking at element #1 1522.
  • Element #1 1522 has been defined to be twelve macroblocks wide.
  • the slice size for this region for both the background 1530 and element #1 1522 is then defined to be that exact number of macroblocks.
  • Element #1 1522 is then comprised of six slices, each slice containing 12 macroblocks.
  • element #2 1524 consists of four slices of eight macroblocks per slice;
  • element #3 1526 is eighteen slices of 23 macroblocks per slice;
  • element #4 1528 is seventeen slices of five macroblocks per slice.
  • the background 1530 and the elements can be defined to be composed of any number of slices which, in turn, can be any number of macroblocks. This gives full flexibility to arrange the picture and the elements in any fashion desired.
  • the process of determining the slice content for each element along with the positioning of the elements within the video frame are determined by the virtual machine of Fig.1 using the AVML file.
  • Fig. 15 shows the preparation of the background 1600 by the virtual machine in order for stitching to occur in the stitcher.
  • the virtual machine gathers an uncompressed background based upon the AVML file and forwards the background to the element encoder.
  • the virtual machine forwards the locations within the background where elements will be placed in the frame.
  • the background 1620 has been broken into a particular slice configuration by the virtual machine with a hole(s) that exactly aligns with where the element(s) will (are to) be placed prior to passing the background to the element encoder.
  • the encoder compresses the background leaving a "hole” or "holes" where the element(s) will be placed.
  • the encoder passes the compressed background to memory.
  • the virtual machine then access the memory and retrieves each element for a scene and passes the encoded elements to the stitcher along with a list of the locations for each slice for each of the elements.
  • the stitcher takes each of the slices and places the slices into the proper position.
  • slice based encoder/virtual machine is one that is aware of the desired slice structure of the output frame and performs its encoding appropriately. That is, the encoder knows the size of the slices and where they belong. It knows where to leave holes if that is required. By being aware of the desired output slice configuration, the virtual machine provides an output that is easily stitched.
  • Fig. 16 shows the compositing process after the background element has been compressed.
  • the background element 1700 has been compressed into seven slices with a hole where the element 1740 is to be placed.
  • the composite image 1780 shows the result of the combination of the background element 1700 and element 1740.
  • the composite video frame 1780 shows the slices that have been inserted in grey.
  • Fig. 17 is a diagram showing different macroblock sizes between the background element 1800 (24 pixels by 24 pixels) and the added video content element 1840 (16 pixels by 16 pixels).
  • the stitcher is aware of such differences and can extrapolate either the element or the background to fill the gap.
  • the element 1840 consisted of four slices. Should this element actually be five slices, it would overlap with the background element 1800 in the composited video frame 1880. There are multiple ways to resolve this conflict with the easiest being to composite only four slices of the element and drop the fifth. It is also possible to composite the fifth slice into the background row, break the conflicting background row into slices and remove the background slice that conflicts with the fifth element slice (then possibly add a sixth element slice to fill any gap).
  • Fig. 18 is a diagram depicting elements of a frame.
  • a simple composited picture 1900 is composed of an element 1910 and a background element 1920.
  • the stitcher builds a data structure 1940 based upon the position information for each element as provided by the virtual machine.
  • the data structure 1940 contains a linked list describing how many macroblocks and where the macroblocks are located. For example, the data row 1 1943 shows that the stitcher should take 40 macroblocks from buffer B, which is the buffer for the background.
  • Data row 2 1945 should take 12 macroblocks from buffer B, then 8 macroblocks from buffer E (the buffer for element 1910), and then another 20 macroblocks from buffer B.
  • the stitcher uses the data structure to take 40 macroblocks from buffer B.
  • the buffer structure 1970 has separate areas for each background or element.
  • the B buffer 1973 contains all the information for stitching in B macroblocks.
  • the E buffer 1975 has the information for stitching in E macroblocks.
  • Fig. 19 is a flow chart depicting the process for building a picture from multiple encoded elements.
  • the sequence 2000 begins by starting the video frame composition 2010. First the frames are synchronized 2015 and then each row 2020 is built up by grabbing the appropriate slice 2030. The slice is then inserted 2040 and the system checks to see if it is the end of the row 2050. If not, the process goes back to "fetch next slice” block 2030 until the end of row 2050 is reached. Once the row is complete, the system checks to see if it is the end of frame 2080. If not, the process goes back to the "for each row” 2020 block. Once the frame is complete, the system checks if it is the end of the sequence 2090 for the scene. If not, it goes back to the "compose frame" 2010 step. If it is, the frame or sequence of video frames for the scene is complete 2090. If not, it repeats the frame building process. If the end of sequence 2090 has been reached, the scene is complete and the process ends or it can start the construction of another frame.
  • the performance of the stitcher can be improved (build frames faster with less processor power) by providing the stitcher advance information on the frame format.
  • the virtual machine may provide the stitcher with the start location and size of the areas in the frame to be inserted.
  • the information could be the start location for each slice and the stitcher could then figure out the size (the difference between the two start locations).
  • This information could be provided externally by the virtual machine or the virtual machine could incorporate the information into each element. For instance, part of the slice header could be used to carry this information.
  • the stitcher can use this foreknowledge of the frame structure to begin compositing the elements together well before they are required.
  • Fig. 20 shows a further improvement on the system.
  • the graphical video elements can be groomed thereby providing stitchable elements that are already compressed and do not need to be decoded in order to be stitched together.
  • a frame has a number of encoded slices 2100. Each slice is a full row (this is used as an example only; the rows could consist of multiple slices prior to grooming).
  • the virtual machine in combination with the AVML file determines that there should be an element 2140 of a particular size placed in a particular location within the composited video frame.
  • the groomer processes the incoming background 2100 and converts the full-row encoded slices to smaller slices that match the areas around and in the desired element 2140 location.
  • the resulting groomed video frame 2180 has a slice configuration that matches the desired element 2140.
  • the stitcher then constructs the stream by selecting all the slices except #3 and #6 from the groomed frame 2180. Instead of those slices, the stitcher grabs the element 2140 slices and uses those in its place. In this manner, the background never leaves the compressed domain and the system is still able to composite the element 2140 into the frame.
  • Fig. 21 shows the flexibility available to define the element to be composited. Elements can be of different shapes and sizes. The elements need not reside contiguously and in fact a single element can be formed from multiple images separated by the background. This figure shows a background element 2230 (areas colored grey) that has had a single element 2210 (areas colored white) composited on it.
  • the composited element 2210 has areas that are shifted, are different sizes, and even where there are multiple parts of the element on a single row.
  • the stitcher can perform this stitching just as if there were multiple elements used to create the display.
  • the slices for the frame are labeled contiguously Sl - S45. These include the slice locations where the element will be placed.
  • the element also has its slice numbering from ESl - ES 14.
  • the element slices can be placed in the background where desired even though they are pulled from a single element file.
  • the source for the element slices can be any one of a number of options. It can come from a real-time encoded source. It can be a complex slice that is built from separate slices, one having a background and the other having text. It can be a pre-encoded element that is fetched from a cache. These examples are for illustrative purposes only and are not intended to limit the options for element sources.
  • Fig. 22 shows an embodiment using a groomer 2340 for grooming linear broadcast content.
  • the content is received by the groomer 2340 in real-time.
  • Each channel is groomed by the groomer 2340 so that the content can be easily stitched together.
  • the groomer 2340 of Fig. 22 may include a plurality of groomer modules for grooming all of the linear broadcast channels.
  • the groomed channels may then be multicast to one or more processing offices 2310, 2320, 2330 and one or more virtual machines within each of the processing offices for use in applications.
  • client devices request an application for receipt of a mosaic 2350 of linear broadcast sources and/or other groomed content that are selected by the client.
  • a mosaic 2350 is a scene that includes a background frame 2360 that allows for viewing of a plurality of sources 2371-2376 simultaneously as shown in Fig. 23.
  • the user can request each of the channels carrying the sporting events for simultaneous viewing within the mosaic.
  • the user can even select an MPEG object (edit) 2380 and then edit the desired content sources to be displayed.
  • the groomed content can be selected from linear/live broadcasts and also from other video content (i.e. movies, pre-recorded content etc.).
  • a mosaic may even include both user selected material and material provided by the processing office/session processor, such as, advertisements.
  • client devices 2301-2305 each request a mosaic that includes channel 1.
  • the multicast groomed content for channel 1 is used by different virtual machines and different processing offices in the construction of personalized mosaics.
  • the processing office associated with the client device assigns a processor/virtual machine for the client device for the requested mosaic application.
  • the assigned virtual machine constructs the personalized mosaic by compositing the groomed content from the desired channels using a stitcher.
  • the virtual machine sends the client device an MPEG stream that has a mosaic of the channels that the client has requested.
  • An application such as a mosaic
  • the user could log into a website associated with the processing office by providing information about the user's account.
  • the server associated with the processing office would provide the user with a selection screen for selecting an application. If the user selected a mosaic application, the server would allow the user to select the content that the user wishes to view within the mosaic.
  • the processing office server In response to the selected content for the mosaic and using the user's account information, the processing office server would direct the request to a session processor and establish an interactive session with the client device of the user. The session processor would then be informed by the processing office server of the desired application.
  • the session processor would retrieve the desired application, the mosaic application in this example, and would obtain the required MPEG objects.
  • the processing office server would then inform the session processor of the requested video content and the session processor would operate in conjunction with the stitcher to construct the mosaic and provide the mosaic as an MPEG video stream to the client device.
  • the processing office server may include scripts or application for performing the functions of the client device in setting up the interactive session, requesting the application, and selecting content for display. While the mosaic elements may be predetermined by the application, they may also be user configurable resulting in a personalized mosaic.
  • Fig. 24 is a diagram of an IP based content delivery system.
  • content may come from a broadcast source 2400, a proxy cache 2415 fed by a content provider 2410, Network Attached Storage (NAS) 2425 containing configuration and management files 2420, or other sources not shown.
  • NAS Network Attached Storage
  • the NAS may include asset metadata that provides information about the location of content.
  • This content could be available through a load balancing switch 2460.
  • BladeSession processors/virtual machines 2460 can perform different processing functions on the content to prepare it for delivery.
  • Content is requested by the user via a client device such as a set top box 2490. This request is processed by the controller 2430 which then configures the resources and path to provide this content.
  • the client device 2490 receives the content and presents it on the user's display 2495.
  • Fig. 25 provides a diagram of a cable based content delivery system. Many of the components are the same: a controller 2530, broadcast source 2500, a content provider 2510 providing their content via a proxy cache 2515, configuration and management files 2520 via a file server NAS 2525, session processors 2560, load balancing switch 2550, a client device, such as a set top box 2590, and a display 2595.
  • the added resources include: QAM modulators 2575, a return path receiver 2570, a combiner and diplexer 2580, and a Session and Resource Manager (SRM) 2540.
  • SRM Session and Resource Manager
  • QAM upconverter 2575 are required to transmit data (content) downstream to the user. These modulators convert the data into a form that can be carried across the coax that goes to the user.
  • the return path receiver 2570 also is used to demodulate the data that comes up the cable from the set top 2590.
  • the combiner and diplexer 2580 is a passive device that combines the downstream QAM channels and splits out the upstream return channel.
  • the SRM is the entity that controls how the QAM modulators are configured and assigned and how the streams are routed to the client device.
  • the desire is to minimize the number of additional resources that are required to deliver a level of performance to the user that mimics a non-blocking system such as an IP network. Since there is not a one-to-one correspondence between the cable network resources and the users on the network, the resources must be shared. Shared resources must be managed so they can be assigned when a user requires a resource and then freed when the user is finished utilizing that resource. Proper management of these resources is critical to the operator because without it, the resources could be unavailable when needed most. Should this occur, the user either receives a "please wait” message or, in the worst case, a "service unavailable" message.
  • Fig. 26 is a diagram showing the steps required to configure a new interactive session based on input from a user. This diagram depicts only those items that must be allocated or managed or used to do the allocation or management. A typical request would follow the steps listed below:
  • the Set Top 2609 requests content 2610 from the Controller 2607
  • the Controller 407 allocates the Session processor 2650
  • the Controller 2607 configures 2660 the Set Top 2609. This includes: a. Frequency to tune b. Programs to acquire or alternatively PIDs to decode c. IP port to connect to the Session processor for keystroke capture
  • the Controller 2607 allocates the resources based on a request for service from a set top box 2609. It frees these resources when the set top or server sends an "end of session". While the controller 2607 can react quickly with minimal delay, the SRM 2603 can only allocate a set number of QAM sessions per second i.e. 200. Demand that exceeds this rate results in unacceptable delays for the user. For example, if 500 requests come in at the same time, the last user would have to wait 5 seconds before their request was granted. It is also possible that rather than the request being granted, an error message could be displayed such as "service unavailable".
  • Client device requests content from the Controller via a Session Manager (i.e. controller proxy).
  • a Session Manager i.e. controller proxy
  • Session Manager forwards request to Controller.
  • Controller responds with the requested content via Session Manager (i.e. client proxy).
  • Session Manager opens a unicast session and forwards Controller response to client over unicast IP session.
  • Client device acquires Controller response sent over unicast IP session.
  • Session manager may simultaneously narrowcast response over multicast IP session to share with other clients on node group that request same content simultaneously as a bandwidth usage optimization technique.
  • Fig. 27 is a simplified system diagram used to break out each area for performance improvement. This diagram focuses only on the data and equipment that will be managed and removes all other non-managed items. Therefore, the switch, return path, combiner, etc. are removed for the sake of clarity. This diagram will be used to step through each item, working from the end user back to the content origination.
  • a first issue is the assignment of QAMs 2770 and QAM channels 2775 by the SRM 2720.
  • the resources must be managed to prevent SRM overload, that is, eliminating the delay the user would see when requests to the SRM 2720 exceed its sessions per second rate.
  • time based modeling may be used.
  • the Controller 2700 monitors the history of past transactions, in particular, high load periods. By using this previous history, the Controller 2700 can predict when a high load period may occur, for example, at the top of an hour. The Controller 2700 uses this knowledge to pre-allocate resources before the period comes. That is, it uses predictive algorithms to determine future resource requirements. As an example, if the Controller 2700 thinks 475 users are going to join at a particular time, it can start allocating those resources 5 seconds early so that when the load hits, the resources have already been allocated and no user sees a delay.
  • the resources could be pre-allocated based on input from an operator. Should the operator know a major event is coming, e.g., a pay per view sporting event, he may want to pre-allocate resources in anticipation. In both cases, the SRM 2720 releases unused QAM 2770 resources when not in use and after the event.
  • QAMs 2770 can be allocated based on a "rate of change" which is independent of previous history. For example, if the controller 2700 recognizes a sudden spike in traffic, it can then request more QAM bandwidth than needed in order to avoid the QAM allocation step when adding additional sessions.
  • An example of a sudden, unexpected spike might be a button as part of the program that indicates a prize could be won if the user selects this button.
  • the controller 2700 could request the whole QAM 2770 or a large part of a single QAM' s bandwidth and allow this invention to handle the data within that QAM channel 2775. Since one aspect of this system is the ability to create a channel that is only 1, 2, or 3 Mb/sec, this could reduce the number of requests to the SRM 2720 by replacing up to 27 requests with a single request.
  • the Controller 2700 has to tell the SRM 2720 to deallocate the QAM 2770, then the Controller 2700 must de-allocate the session processor 2750 and the content 2730, and then request another QAM 2770 from the SRM 2720 and then allocate a different session processor 2750 and content 2730. Instead, the controller 2700 can change the video stream 2755 feeding the QAM modulator 2770 thereby leaving the previously established path intact. There are a couple of ways to accomplish the change.
  • the controller 2700 can merely change the session processor 2750 driving the QAM 2770.
  • the controller 2700 can leave the session processor 2750 to set top 2790 connection intact but change the content 2730 feeding the session processor 2750, e.g., "CNN Headline News" to "CNN World Now". Both of these methods eliminate the QAM initialization and Set Top tuning delays.
  • the Controller can manipulate the video streams 2755 feeding the QAM 2770.
  • the Controller 2700 can maximize the channel usage within a QAM 2770. That is, it can maximize the number of programs in each QAM channel 2775 reducing wasted bandwidth and the required number of QAMs 2770.
  • the first profiling method consists of adding up the bit rates of the various video streams used to fill a QAM channel 2775.
  • the maximum bit rate of each element can be added together to obtain an aggregate bit rate for the video stream 2755.
  • the Controller 2700 can create a combination of video streams 2755 that most efficiently uses a QAM channel 2775. For example, if there were four video streams 2755: two that were 16 Mb/sec and two that were 20 Mb/sec then the controller could best fill a 38.8 Mb/sec QAM channel 2775 by allocating one of each bit rate per channel.
  • a second method is pre-profiling.
  • a profile for the content 2730 is either received or generated internally.
  • the profile information can be provided in metadata with the stream or in a separate file.
  • the profiling information can be generated from the entire video or from a representative sample.
  • the controller 2700 is then aware of the bit rate at various times in the stream and can use this information to effectively combine video streams 2755 together. For example, if two video streams 2755 both had a peak rate of 20 Mb/sec, they would need to be allocated to different 38.8 Mb/sec QAM channels 2775 if they were allocated bandwidth based on their peaks.
  • the controller 2700 could then combine the streams 2755 into a single 38.8 Mb/sec QAM channel 2775.
  • the particular QAM bit rate is used for the above examples only and should not be construed as a limitation.
  • a third method for profiling is via feedback provided by the system.
  • the system can inform the controller 2700 of the current bit rate for all video elements used to build streams and the aggregate bit rate of the stream after it has been built. Furthermore, it can inform the controller 2700 of bit rates of stored elements prior to their use. Using this information, the controller 2700 can combine video streams 2755 in the most efficient manner to fill a QAM channel 2775.
  • the system can also address the usage of the resources themselves. For example, if a session processor 2750 can support 100 users and currently there are 350 users that are active, it requires four session processors. However, when the demand goes down to say 80 users, it would make sense to reallocate those resources to a single session processor 2750, thereby conserving the remaining resources of three session processors. This is also useful in failure situations. Should a resource fail, the invention can reassign sessions to other resources that are available. In this way, disruption to the user is minimized. The system can also repurpose functions depending on the expected usage.
  • the session processors 2750 can implement a number of different functions, for example, process video, process audio, etc.
  • the controller 2700 Since the controller 2700 has a history of usage, it can adjust the functions on the session processors 2700 to meet expected demand. For example, if in the early afternoons there is typically a high demand for music, the controller 2700 can reassign additional session processors 2750 to process music in anticipation of the demand. Correspondingly, if in the early evening there is a high demand for news, the controller 2700 anticipates the demand and reassigns the session processors 2750 accordingly.
  • the flexibility and anticipation of the system allows it to provide the optimum user experience with the minimum amount of equipment. That is, no equipment is idle because it only has a single purpose and that purpose is not required.
  • the present invention may be embodied in many different forms, including, but in no way limited to, computer program logic for use with a processor (e.g., a microprocessor, microcontroller, digital signal processor, or general purpose computer), programmable logic for use with a programmable logic device (e.g., a Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) or other PLD), discrete components, integrated circuitry (e.g., an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC)), or any other means including any combination thereof.
  • a processor e.g., a microprocessor, microcontroller, digital signal processor, or general purpose computer
  • programmable logic for use with a programmable logic device
  • FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
  • ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
  • predominantly all of the reordering logic may be implemented as a set of computer program instructions that is converted into a computer executable form, stored as such in a computer readable medium, and executed by a microprocessor within the array under the control of an operating system.
  • Source code may include a series of computer program instructions implemented in any of various programming languages (e.g., an object code, an assembly language, or a high-level language such as Fortran, C, C++, JAVA, or HTML) for use with various operating systems or operating environments.
  • the source code may define and use various data structures and communication messages.
  • the source code may be in a computer executable form (e.g., via an interpreter), or the source code may be converted (e.g., via a translator, assembler, or compiler) into a computer executable form.
  • the computer program may be fixed in any form (e.g., source code form, computer executable form, or an intermediate form) either permanently or transitorily in a tangible storage medium, such as a semiconductor memory device (e.g., a RAM, ROM, PROM, EEPROM, or Flash-Programmable RAM), a magnetic memory device (e.g., a diskette or fixed disk), an optical memory device (e.g., a CD-ROM), a PC card (e.g., PCMCIA card), or other memory device.
  • the computer program may be fixed in any form in a signal that is transmittable to a computer using any of various communication technologies, including, but in no way limited to, analog technologies, digital technologies, optical technologies, wireless technologies, networking technologies, and internetworking technologies.
  • the computer program may be distributed in any form as a removable storage medium with accompanying printed or electronic documentation (e.g., shrink wrapped software or a magnetic tape), preloaded with a computer system (e.g., on system ROM or fixed disk), or distributed from a server or electronic bulletin board over the communication system (e.g., the Internet or World Wide Web.)
  • printed or electronic documentation e.g., shrink wrapped software or a magnetic tape
  • a computer system e.g., on system ROM or fixed disk
  • a server or electronic bulletin board over the communication system (e.g., the Internet or World Wide Web.)
  • Hardware logic including programmable logic for use with a programmable logic device
  • implementing all or part of the functionality previously described herein may be designed using traditional manual methods, or may be designed, captured, simulated, or documented electronically using various tools, such as Computer Aided Design (CAD), a hardware description language (e.g., VHDL or AHDL), or a PLD programming language (e.g., PALASM, ABEL, or CUPL.)
  • CAD Computer Aided Design
  • a hardware description language e.g., VHDL or AHDL
  • PLD programming language e.g., PALASM, ABEL, or CUPL.
  • Embodiments of the present invention may be described, without limitation, by the following clauses. While these embodiments have been described in the clauses by process steps, an apparatus comprising a computer with associated display capable of executing the process steps in the clauses below is also included in the present invention. Likewise, a computer program product including computer executable instructions for executing the process steps in the clauses below and stored on a computer readable medium is included within the present invention. 1/30
  • This appendix describes MPEG Objects, their configurable attributes, methods and events (including arguments). It also provides examples of how to use MPEG Objects and Script (AVScript) to write programs that in turn control sessions which ultimately provide interactive television subscribers the capability to set-up their own personal viewing experiences by using only their regular TV channel selectors, in conjunction with any Set-top Box (IP or Cable).
  • AVScript MPEG Objects and Script
  • other devices that use MPEG and its variants, AVS, VC-I or other block-based decoders, and are capable of two way communication may also benefit from these Objects and the AVScript.
  • wireless devices such as cell phones could receive MPEG content and provide control instructions to a processing office that would maintain the AVScript and the state of the MPEG Objects/ A VObjects wherein the user of the cell phone would control the interactive content.
  • the AVScript language controls MPEG Objects, or AVObjects.
  • This language is similar to JavaScript (based on the ECMA-262 standard).
  • a programming development environment is provided and allows for the development of layouts of Graphical User Interface objects and other, non-graphical objects that control sound and external communications or, in other words, for the development of layouts of TV User/Service Subscriber Interfaces or, in still more succinct parlance, for the development of "Scenes" and their controlling AVScripts.
  • a group of AVObjects may be combined to form a Scene.
  • the code for the objects that comprise a Scene and all of the Scene's controlling AVScript are saved in a single AVML file.
  • AVML files are XML-like files that contain the names of objects and their attributes, plus other resource information that is necessary for a program to run on the Audio Video Distribution Network (AVDN) platform.
  • AVDN Audio Video Distribution Network
  • the AVDN platform provides the control interface between the commands received from interactive television subscribers and the Program that implements their individually specified commands.
  • Figure 1 shows the hierarchy of all of AVObject Properties.
  • a root Element Area object containing a top-level Scene, is always created by default.
  • the Scene could in turn contain multiple Element Areas that contain various Scenes which arc themselves comprised of various instances of individually specifiable AVObjects, ultimately make-up a subscriber's selectable viewing experience.
  • AVML file For each Scene in an AVProgram, an AVML file is created that contains the code that instantiates each specified AVComponent of that Scene and its associated AVScript that controls the use of each object thus created.
  • the AVScript can specify the inclusion of additional script files by using the # include directive followed by a quoted string that specifies the location of the file to be included. For example:
  • An AVScript file that is included through the use of a # include directive may itself contain additional # include directives.
  • the script interpreter currently limits the recursive depth of # include directives to 50 levels. If the depth limit is exceeded, the interpreter stops processing script and reports an error. This limit is arbitrary and may be set to any level or disabled.
  • script files might # include the same file; the script should work normally without causing a compile error.
  • the last definition compiled is the one that the script uses and, again, there is no compile error.
  • # include directive must be in the following form:
  • a file can list multiple files to be included; however, each # include directive must appear on a separate line.
  • the [path] component of the form of the # include directive is optional and a developer can specify no path, a relative path or an absolute path to an HTTP site for a file to be included.
  • the file that contains the # include directive is considered to be the "parent" file. If a path is not specified, then the file to be included must be in the same directory as the file that contains the # include directive.
  • a relative path is based on the location of a parent file.
  • a Program's AVML file is the top-most parent file and its location/path is the URL of the AVML file.
  • Include files stored locally i.e., on the computer hosting an AVProgram) must be referred to by a relative path that specifies the directory below the directory where the AVML file of the AVProgram is located.
  • AVScript files can also be accessed using the http web protocol.
  • the images of many objects are specified by their URLs which point to the location of information about them on the Internet. Images and media that can be played might be located on a server and the URL path for information about them begins with "http://.”
  • Image and media information is stored as part of the Audio Video Distribution Network (AVDN) Program.
  • Their URLs are considered to be "local content" and are packaged with the AVML file as part of the AVDN Program. These files are installed on the computer that hosts the AVDN Program when it runs.
  • the URL path for local content must point to a subdirectory of the directory that contains the AVML file. For example: if a developer is working in directory
  • the object gets notified about events (programmatic, keyboard or mouse events) or is affected by them. Only one object on a Scene can have focus at any given time.
  • a “chaser” is a graphical method of showing that an object has focus.
  • a chaser typically appears as a special colored polygon (usually a rectangle or a square) that surrounds an object to indicate that that object has focus.
  • Another approach is to have the object appear in a different color when it has focus.
  • a chaser can be made to appear by the use of either of these two different methods:
  • Method 1 An object that can receive focus is an object that can appear as a Clicked or a Focused image that shows the chaser around it or that changes to a different color. Buttons often use this method.
  • Method 2 A media player, a Static Image or an Input Box could have a chaser attribute similar to a picture frame.
  • the chaser appears on the outside of the object but the object is visible within the chaser.
  • the same image for a chaser attribute can appear only around objects that are the same size. To put chasers around objects that are of different sizes, multiple chaser images are required.
  • a subscriber can use the arrow keys of a remote control unit to move input focus from object to object.
  • Each object that can receive focus has specified for each direction (up, down, left or right) either some other Scene object or a chaser keyword. If some other Scene object is specified, then that object receives focus when the arrow key of the remote control for that direction is activated.
  • chaser keywords There are two chaser keywords, "None” and "Exit.”
  • the chaser keyword “None” is specified for an arrow direction, focus remains on the current object when that arrow key is activated.
  • the "Exit” keyword applies only when an object is in an ElementArea within another Scene and it causes keyboard focus to move to the external Scene.
  • the Element Area of each Scene could be defined as focusable (with or without other Chaser attributes defined) and each nested Scene might contain focusable Scene elements.
  • Default navigation logic allows focus to be passed transparently in the general case of nested navigation. If required, the programmer can override default behavior using focus-related attributes and methods.
  • Buttons and items within a ListBox are depicted with different images to represent their different states.
  • Figure 5 shows the normal states for a Button or a ListBox, which are:
  • a Button In addition to a transition to the normal state, a Button can be disabled or hidden or a ListBox can be disabled. If a Button is hidden and a script calls the enable() function, the Button appears in its default state. When a Button is hidden, a subscriber cannot see anything on the TV to indicate that there is a button present, even though the Scene background can be seen.
  • any time a script disables or hides a Button or disables a ListBox the object displays the disabled or hidden image, no matter what state was displayed before the command. If focus was on an object when that object was disabled or hidden, it moves to another object on the Scene. See the disable() and the hide() function commands 0 or 0 for information on how the new chaser position is set.
  • a script cannot set focus on a disabled or hidden object while it is disabled or hidden. If an object is not disabled and the enable command is called, the object remains in its current state. Making changes to the text, text color or background color of a Button or a ListBox does not change its state. If the state of a disabled object is changed, a new image appears for it.
  • a cable box remote control provides the keyboard input to an AVDN session.
  • the remote control might have buttons on it that are not normally found on a computer keyboard; for example, there might be a "play” or a "rewind” button.
  • a script receives a key value that relates to the remote control button that was pressed.
  • the key values are neither ASCII character values nor Unicode character values, but Table 1 lists their key values and their corresponding keys.
  • script commands are written to handle a subscriber event. For example, a subscriber might start to navigate to an AVML file or press a key on the remote. When these external events occur, event handlers like onLoad() or onKeyPress() notify an script.
  • onLoad() or onKeyPress() notify an script.
  • the following subsections describe the events (and specify their order) that assist in creating an script.
  • a Scene and all Scene elements support an onLoad() event.
  • a Scene also has an onlnitialUpdate() event that occurs only when a Scene loads for the first time in a session.
  • Tables 2 and 3 list and comment on these and other Scene-related event functions.
  • the onUnload() event occurs. Like the onLoad() event, scene and GUI objects support an onUnload() event. As can be seen from Table 3, first all Scene elements are unloaded, then all Scenes are unloaded and, lastly, the session is ended.
  • This event function gets called for each Scene that has been loaded during this session, when the session ends.
  • the Textlnput, Button, ListBox, MultiMedia and Staticlmage objects support onFocus() and onBlur() events.
  • the onFocus() and onBlur() events occur as input focus moves from object to object. Input focus can be controlled either by script code using the Scene command setFocus() or by subscriber input, using the arrow keys on the remote control. Events occur in an expected order. If focus is moved by the subscriber hitting an arrow key, the onKeyPress() is the first event, then the onBlur() for the object that currently has focus and finally the onFocus() for the object that receives focus. When the setFocus() command is used, the first event is onBlur() then the onFocus().
  • the default event handler for the onBlur() changes the appearance of an object to unfocused and the onFocus() default handler changes the appearance of an object to focused. If the script overrides a default handler by returning true for an event, then the script must be responsible for changing the appearances of objects.
  • onTopOfList() or onBottomOfList() event occurs and, if overridden, it prevents the default handler from moving focus away from the ListBox.
  • onClick() for button and onSelectItem() for ListBox have a default handler that changes the item to show it in the "Clicked" state. Table 4 shows the event order for these functions.
  • a subscriber inactivity timer terminates sessions that a subscriber has abandoned and thereby frees resources for other subscribers to use.
  • Default timeout values are assigned to all AVPrograms, but developers can change the timeout values (up to a maximum amount of time) by using script.
  • the Warning Timeout is the amount of time (in seconds) without subscriber input until the session onInactivityTimerExpired() event (see section 10.1) is called for the script (the developer can display a message to subscribers to caution them that their session is about to terminate unless they hit a key).
  • the script commands are part of the session attributes (see Section 10), which are: session. warningTimeout and session.logoutTimeout. 3 User Interface Objects
  • a button appears on the TV and allows a subscriber to interact with the GUI by selecting and clicking on it.
  • a button can have any one of the following five states: Clicked, Focused, Selected, Default or Disabled (see Button and ListBox images).
  • This event occurs for an object each time a subscriber views a Scene that contains that object.
  • This event occurs for an object each time a subscriber navigates away from a Scene that contains that object.
  • the default event handler updates the chaser position (keyboard focus), if needed, and fires the onClick event if the "OKAY" key was pressed If a Boolean true is returned, the default handler does not execute.
  • the keyCode is an integer for the key that was pressed. For additional information on keyCodes, see section 0.
  • buttons a button in its unselected state Shows a button in its unselected state. If the button has focus, the Focused image appears. If a button does not have focus, the Default image appears The button appears similar to the setNotSelected() command appearance. Use setSelected()/setNotSelected () to control button selection and enable()/disable() to enable or disable a button.
  • Selected and Focused are different states and they can have different appearances. If the button has focus then the Clicked image appears; however, if the button does not have focus, then the Selected image appears.
  • the button looks similar to the way it looks in response to the enable() command.
  • void hide() Description In the hidden state, the background image of the Scene appears in place of the button. This indicates that the button cannot be selected, nor can it receive focus. A subscriber cannot see a button in the hidden state. A button may be unhidden using one of the other view button commands like enable(), disable(), setSelected () or setNotSelected(); although typically, enable() would be used.
  • RGBvalue This specifies the RGB color value, which must be a string of three two-digit hexadecimal values. Each hexadecimal value represents an amount of a certain color.
  • the format is RRGGBB where RR is the hexadecimal value for Red, GG is for Green and BB is for blue.
  • the string “FFOOOO” would be completely red and "00FF00” would be green.
  • White is "FFFFFFFF " and black is -'OOOOOO:'
  • buttonState This string is the button state that should display the text with that specified color. Possible button states are: Focused, Clicked, Selected, Default and Disabled.
  • RGBvalue This specifies the RGB color value, which must be a string of three two-digit hexadecimal values. Each hexadecimal value represents an amount of that color.
  • the format is RRGGBB where RR is the hexadecimal value for Red, GG is for Green and BB is for blue.
  • the string “FFOOOO” is completely red, while “00FF00” is green.
  • White is "FFFFFF” and black is "000000..”
  • buttonState A string that is the button state that should display the background with this color. Possible button states are: Focused, Clicked, Selected, Default and Disabled.
  • buttonState A string that is the buttonState displays the background with this color. Possible button states are: Focused, Clicked, Selected, Default and Disabled.
  • RRGGBB The format is RRGGBB where RR is the hexadecimal value for Red, GG is for Green and BB is for blue.
  • Arguments buttonState A string that is the button state that should display the background with this color. Possible button states are- Focused, Clicked, Selected, Default, Disabled.
  • RGB color value of the button background as a text string.
  • the format is RRGGBB where RR is the hexadecimal value for Red, GG is for Green and BB is for blue.
  • a caption is a static text region that is encoded onto a background at runtime and can be updated at that time.
  • a caption can also be configured to be a clock.
  • the AV Editor (AVE) lets the developer define the text to be displayed in the Caption area. If the caption text is "Clock:” followed by the escape characters for time or date, then that information is displayed. (See Appendix A.I : Caption Clock Format 11). For example: “Clock:%a %b %d %I:%M %p" displays the abbreviated weekday, abbreviated month, the Day of the month as a decimal, the hour in 12-hour format, the minutes as a decimal and either AM or PM. The clock is updated automatically, so the developer does not need to write any script code for that.
  • This event occurs for an object each time the Scene that contains that object is viewed by a subscriber.
  • This event occurs for an object each time a subscriber navigates away from a Scene that contains that object.
  • This method changes the text that appears in the caption area. If the Caption has been configured to be a clock, then the setText() command is ignored.
  • RGBvalue This specifies the RGB color value and consists of a string of three two-digit hexadecimal values. Each hexadecimal value represents the amount of a particular color.
  • the format is RRGGBB where RR is the hexadecimal value for Red, GG is for Green and BB is for blue.
  • the string “FFOOOO” is completely red, while “00FF00” is green.
  • White is "FFFFFF” and black is "000000.” If the Caption has been configured to be a clock, then the setTextColor() command is ignored.
  • RGBvalue This specifies the RGB color value and must be a string of three two-digit hexadecimal values. Each hexadecimal value represents the amount of a particular color.
  • the form is RRGGBB where RR is the hexadecimal value for Red, GG is for Green and BB is for blue.
  • the string "FF0000” is completely red and “00FF00” is green.
  • White is "FFFFFF” and black is "000000.” If the Caption has been configured to be a clock then, the setBackgroundColor() command is ignored.
  • RRGGBB hexadecimal value for Red
  • GG is for Green
  • BB is for blue.
  • RGB color value of the caption background as a text string.
  • the format is RRGGBB where RR is the hexadecimal value for Red, GG is for Green and BB is for blue.
  • An Input Box is a component that is used to get text input from a subscriber.
  • This event occurs for an object each time the Scene that contains that object is viewed by a subscriber.
  • This event indicates that a key has been pressed while keyboard focus was on the InputBox.
  • Arguments keyCode keyCode value is an integer for the key that was pressed. For additional information on key values, please see Section 0. cursorPosition This is the integer value indicating the current position of the cursor within the InputBox text string.
  • This method retrieves the text that had been entered into the InputBox. Arguments None.
  • This method sets the text in the InputBox. Text in the input box is replaced with the specified text string.
  • RGBvalue This specifies the RGB color value, a string of three two-digit hexadecimal values. Each hexadecimal value represents the amount of a particular color.
  • the RRGGBB format uses RR to specify the hexadecimal value for Red, GG to specify the value for Green and BB for blue.
  • the string “FFOOOO” is completely red, while “00FF00” is green.
  • White is "FFFFFF” and black is "000000.”
  • RGBvalue This specifies the RGB color value, a string of three two-digit hexadecimal values. Each hexadecimal value represents the amount of a particular color.
  • the RRGGBB format uses RR to specify the hexadecimal value for Red, GG to specify the value for Green and BB for blue.
  • the string “FFOOOO” is completely red, while “00FF00” is green.
  • White is "FFFFFF” and black is "000000.”
  • RGBvalue This specifies the RGB color value, a string of three two-digit hexadecimal values in an RRGGBB format. Each hexadecimal value represents the amount of a particular color.
  • the RRGGBB format uses RR to specify the hexadecimal value for Red, GG to specify the value for Green and BB for blue.
  • the string “FFOOOO” is completely red, while “OOFFOO” is green.
  • White is "FFFFFFFF” and black is "000000.”
  • RRGGBB hexadecimal value for Red.
  • GG is for Green and BB is for blue.
  • RGB color value of the cursor as a text string.
  • the form is RRGGBB where RR is the hexadecimal value for Red. GG is for Green and BB is for blue.
  • RGB color value of the InputBox background as a text string.
  • the format is RRGGBB where RR is the hexadecimal value for Red, GG is for Green and BB is for blue.
  • This method inserts the "text" argument string into the InputBox at the location of the cursor.
  • This method erases one InputBox character either to the right or the left of the current cursor position.
  • Arguments rightLeft This is a case insensitive string (either "left” or "right") identifying whether to erase the character to the left or the character to the right of the current cursor position.
  • This method controls the display of the text cursor.
  • Arguments enable This boolean argument is used to enable or disable display of the text cursor.
  • a ListBox is a group of one or more items containing text or images or both.
  • the group of items/elements is displayed either vertically or horizontally. Any item/element within a ListBox can receive keyboard focus.
  • Each item/element has an associated data element that can be used by a script.
  • a data element is an integer value that has been assigned by the developer. While the text displayed in each box and the data element associated with it can be updated at runtime, the size of the viewable area of a ListBox cannot be changed at that time and therefore the number of items/elements that can be viewed on a TV screen at any one time can be more or less than the number of viewable boxes that are in the entire ListBox array. If the number of items/elements are more than what can be viewed at one time on a TV screen, the TV display can be scrolled to bring the hidden ListBox items/elements into its viewable area.
  • ListBox transparency can be configured with the AVE development tool.
  • the percent of transparency of a ListBox determines how much of a Scene background can be viewed. If 100% transparent, the ListBox text can be viewed on the Scene background; however, when transparency is used, the Scene background in the area of each list box element must be the same. If the area of a Scene behind a listbox is a solid color there is no problem, but if a pattern appears behind a ListBox when transparency is used, then the image behind each ListBox element must be the same image.
  • a ListBox item can be text with a background color or text with an image. Like a button, a ListBox item has five possible states; namely, Clicked, Selected, Over, Default and Disabled.
  • the developer When using images, the developer must provide an image to be displayed for each ListBox state.
  • Use the insertltem() function to add an item to a ListBox. If the new item uses images, those images must be added by using the changeltemlmage() function, which must be called for each ListBox Item state that is to be displayed. If an image is not provided for a particular state, then the ListBox Item Background color is displayed for that state.
  • the focus scrolls to each of the visible items/elements.
  • the focus is at the visible edge (top, bottom, left or right)
  • the next hidden item/element is scrolled into view and this continues until the last item/element is visible, at which time focus moves off the ListBox.
  • a developer can add optional navigation buttons to the top and bottom or to the right and left sides, depending on the orientation of the ListBox. These navigation buttons can be used to scroll through the list items/elements. When focus is on the navigation button, it is used to scroll the items/elements within the ListBox to move hidden items/elements into the viewable area. Scripts can be used to customize the performance of these navigation buttons.
  • This event occurs for an object each time the Scene that contains that object is viewed by a subscriber.
  • This event occurs for an object each time a subscriber navigates away from a Scene that contains the object.
  • This box is in focus and a key on the keyboard is pressed, then this event occurs
  • the default event handler updates the chaser position (keyboard focus) if needed and fires the onSelectltem() event if the "OKAY" key was pressed. If a Boolean true is returned the default handler does not execute.
  • Arguments keyCode The key value as an integer for the key that was pressed. For additional information on key values see Section 0 . index The index value of the ListBox item/element that currently has focus.
  • Arguments index This is the index value of the item/element in the ListBox that is Selected.
  • the default handler moves focus to a different item on the Scene. The developer can override this and handle keyboard focus in script.
  • This command inserts a new item to the ListBox list at the location specified by index.
  • the new items appearance is defined by the Default font, font size, font color, background color and font weight that were specified at development time.
  • Arguments index specifies the location where the new item/element is to be inserted.
  • text This is the text that is displayed when the item/element is in view.
  • value Data associated with the box This is an integer value associated with a ListBox item and can be used to index into an array where specific information for each ListBox item is stored.
  • This command modifies the text or the data value of the ListBox item at the location specified by the index.
  • Arguments index specifies the location of the item/element that changes.
  • text The text that appears when the item/element is in view.
  • value This is an integer value, data, that is associated with a ListBox item. It can be used to index into an array where specific information for each ListBox item is stored.
  • This command changes the Image associated with the stateName of the ListBox item at the location specified by index.
  • index specifies the location where the new item/element is to be inserted stateName The name of the Item state that should display the image URL.
  • the state names are: Clicked, Focused, Selected, Default and Disabled.
  • imageURL The URL location for the image to display on the ListBox Item when the stateName is displayed.
  • This command returns the name of the Image associated with the stateName of the ListBox item at the location specified by index.
  • the index specifies the item of the ListBox whose image URL is to be returned stateName
  • the state names are: Clicked, Focused, Selected, Default and Disabled.
  • This command returns the current state of the ListBox item at the location specified by index.
  • index specifies the item of the ListBox.
  • the state names are: Clicked, Focused, Selected, Default and Disabled.
  • index specifies the location of the item/element that is to be removed.
  • This command returns the text that is displayed in a box within a ListBox.
  • Arguments index The index specifies the location of the item/element whose text is to be retrieved
  • This command returns the data that is associated with the selected box within a ListBox. This value is specified by insertltem() and by changeltem(). ListBoxes that are created by AVE and not created by these script commands have a default value of 0. A -1 is returned if the index does not exist.
  • the index specifies the location of the item/element whose value is to be retrieved
  • void setItemFocus(int index) Description This command sets focus on an item within the ListBox. If the item specified by index is not currently in the visible area of the ListBox, the ListBox items are scrolled until the index item is in the visible area.
  • the index specifies the location of the Item/element that should receive focus
  • This method returns the index position of the item/element that currently has focus.
  • This command selects an item/element within the ListBox and displays its Selected or Clicked state. If the item is not visible it does not scroll into view.
  • the AV script is responsible for setting items in the Selected or the NotSelected state. Unlike keyboard focus only, the AV script controls Selecting items. Multiple items within a ListBox can be selected at the same time, but the AV script code must keep track of what items are selected.
  • index specifies the location of the Item/element that should be selected.
  • This command unselects an item/element within the ListBox and displays its Default or Focused state.
  • index specifies the location of the Item/element that should be shown in its not selected state.
  • index specifies the location of the Item/element that should be shown in its enabled state.
  • the Disabled image is displayed which indicates that the item cannot be selected and that it cannot receive keyboard focus. If the item has keyboard focus when the disable function is called and the script code does not move focus to a focusable item, then focus is put on the next focusable item (right for horizontal; down for vertical) of the ListBox. If the ListBox does not have a next item to receive focus, then focus is put on some other Scene object.
  • index specifies the location of the Item/element that should be shown in its Disabled state.
  • Arguments value This is an integer value associated with a ListBox item. This can be used to index into an array where specific information for each ListBox item is stored startindex The position to start looking for the item/element within the
  • This event occurs for an object each time the Scene that contains the object is viewed by a subscriber.
  • This event occurs for an object each time a subscriber navigates away from a Scene that contains that object.
  • this button is in focus and a key on the keyboard is pressed, this event occurs.
  • the default event handler updates the chaser position (keyboard focus) if needed and fires the onClick event if the "OKAY" key was pressed. If a Boolean true is returned, the default handler does not execute.
  • a playFromPosition() command is issued with a position beyond what is currently in the cache.
  • Returns true indicates that the event was handled and prevents the default handler from running. false Return false indicates that the default handler should run.
  • the default handler loops the asset if the looping property is set to true; otherwise it discontinues play.
  • This method locks audio focus on the media player.
  • the priority of the audio in this case, is elevated above the Scene element focus traversal and below transient audio.
  • Audio playback switches to whichever asset is at the top of the audio playback stack.
  • This method attaches the media player to an asset found at the specified location.
  • URL This parameter specifies the location from which to obtain the media player asset.
  • This method starts playback of the current media player asset from the beginning. Use the loadMedia method to set the player asset.
  • a loadMedia() command may be required before a playFromPosition() command can work. This command is ignored for live streams
  • This function returns the current temporal position from the beginning of the asset in milliseconds.
  • playFromPosition() When playing a file or using an HTTP connection, use the getPosition() and playFromPosition() to start the Media Player from the paused point. This command is ignored for live streams.
  • This command returns a Boolean value true to indicate that the audio for the Media Player has audio focus.
  • a subscriber can hear the audio.
  • Boolean string (true or false) is returned if the Audio of the
  • the fastForward() method can only be used for Real Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP) connections, where it fast forwards the media; however, this command is ignored for live streams.
  • RTSP Real Time Streaming Protocol
  • the rewind() method rewinds the media. It can be used only for Real Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP) connections; however, it is ignored for live streams.
  • RTSP Real Time Streaming Protocol
  • A"reference” image can be displayed in a MediaPlayer when no asset has been loaded or when an asset is being loading.
  • the setReference() method allows the "reference" image to be changed programmatically.
  • Static images typically are rectangular objects whose size falls on macro block boundaries; however, static images could be things like company logos.
  • a static image can have focus and focus is shown using a chaser.
  • the background of a Scene is a static image and, despite its name, the image that appears in a Static Image can be changed by using the loadlmage() method.
  • the new image must be the same size as the original image.
  • a static image could be a non-rectangular image such as a company logo where the area around the logo is transparent so that it shows the background image.
  • This event occurs for an object each time the Scene that contains the object is viewed by a subscriber.
  • This event occurs for an object each time a subscriber navigates away from a Scene that contains the object.
  • This Static Image is in focus and a key on the keyboard is pressed, this event occurs.
  • the default event handler updates the chaser position (keyboard focus) if needed and fires the onClick event if the "OKAY" key was pressed. If a Boolean true is returned the default handler does not execute.
  • Arguments keyCode This is the key value, as an integer, for the key that was pressed. Please see Section 0 for additional information on the key values.
  • keyCode The key value as an integer for the key that was released. For additional information on key values see Section 0.
  • Arguments imageURL Can be a URL, a pathname or part of the Programming data.
  • This command returns the URL that is displayed by the Static Image.
  • Arguments xAlign A string that specifies the x-dimension alignment. Options are
  • Update This is a Boolean value (true/false) that should be set to false if rendering is to be deferred; such as when additional settings are to be employed.
  • Arguments useBgFill This is a Boolean value - when true and the actual image is smaller than the allocated static image area, then the Scene background fills the area outside the actual image area. When false, the static image background (currently black) is displayed around the actual image. update This is a Boolean value (true/false) - set it to false to defer rendering; such as when additional settings are to be employed.
  • Range 0 - 255, 0 is source. duration The time to complete the effect in units of frame intervals.

Abstract

An MPEG object is an object-oriented data structure that may be used in the creation of interactive MPEG video stream. The MPEG object data structure includes an MPEG object interface defining data received by the MPEG object and data output by the MPEG object. The MPEG object data structure further includes either one or more MPEG video elements or an association to one or more MPEG video elements. The MPEG video elements are preferably defined as MPEG slices that include a plurality of encoded macroblocks. Additionally, the data structure may provide a method for receiving input through the MPEG object interface and in response to input from the client device outputting an MPEG video element. In certain configurations, the MPEG object contains a method that maintains state data for the MPEG object. The state data may be used to select between a plurality of MPEG elements to output. In other configurations, the MPEG object includes a method that provides for the control of streaming MPEG content from a source external to the MPEG object.

Description

MPEG Objects and Systems and Methods for Using MPEG Objects
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
U.S. Patent Application entitled "Interactive Encoded Content System including Object Models for Viewing on a Remote Device" and assigned to the same assignee filed contemporaneously herewith on January 11, 2008 is related generally to the subject matter of the present application and is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety and is attached as Appendix A.
The present application claims priority from U.S. provisional applications serial no 60/884,744, filed January 12, 2007, serial no. 60/884,773, filed January 12, 2007, and serial no. 60/884,772, filed January 12, 2007, the full disclosures of which are hereby incorporated herein by reference.
TECHNICAL FIELD AND BACKGROUND ART
The present invention relates to interactive encoded video and more specifically to interactive MPEG video that can be used with a client device having a decoder and limited caching capabilities.
Set-top boxes of cable television systems have preferably been simple devices. The boxes generally include a QAM decoder, an MPEG decoder, and a transceiver for receiving signals from a remote control and transferring the signals to the cable headend. In order to keep costs down, set-top boxes have not included sophisticated processors, such as those found in personal computers or extensive memory for caching content or programs. As a result, developers attempting to provide interactive content that includes encoded video elements such as those found in dynamic web pages to subscribers have been forced to find solutions that are compatible with the set-top boxes. These solutions require having the processing functionality reside at the cable headend and further require that the content is delivered in MPEG format. In order to provide dynamic web page content, the content forming the web page first must be decoded and then rendered within the webpage frame as a
i bitmap. Next, the rendered frames are then re-encoded into an MPEG stream that the set-top box of a requesting user can decode. This decoding and re-encoding scheme is processor intensive.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
In a first embodiment, a system for providing interactive MPEG content for display on a display device associated with a client device having an MPEG decoder is disclosed. The system operates in a client/server environment wherein the server includes a plurality of session processors that can be assigned to an interactive session requested by a client device. The session processor runs a virtual machine, such as a JAVA virtual machine. The virtual machine includes code that in response to a request for an application accesses the requested application. In addition the virtual machine is capable of parsing the application and interpreting scripts. The application contains a layout for an MPEG frame composed of a plurality of MPEG elements. The application also includes a script that refers to one or more MPEG objects that provide the interactive functionality and the MPEG elements (MPEG encoded audio/video) or methodology for accessing the encoded MPEG audio/video content if the content is stored external to the MPEG object.
The MPEG object includes an object interface that defines data received by the MPEG object and data output by the MPEG object. Additionally, the MPEG object includes one or more MPEG video or audio elements. The MPEG elements are preferably groomed so that the elements can be stitched together to form an MPEG video frame. In some embodiments, the MPEG elements are located external to the MPEG object and the MPEG object includes a method for accessing the MPEG element(s). In certain embodiments, the MPEG object includes a plurality of MPEG video elements wherein each element represents a different state for the MPEG object. For example, a button may have an "on" state and an "off state and an MPEG button object would include an MPEG element composed of a plurality of macroblocks/slices for each state. The MPEG object also includes methods for receiving input from the client device through the object interface and for outputting data from the MPEG object through the object interface.
After the program running on the virtual machine, has obtained all of the MPEG objects indicated in the application, the program on the virtual machine provides the MPEG elements and the layout to a stitcher. In certain embodiments, the virtual machine and program for retrieving and parsing the application and interpreting the scripts may be subsumed in the stitcher. The stitcher then stitches together each of the MPEG elements in their position within the MPEG frame. The stitched MPEG video frame is passed to a multiplexor that multiplexes in any MPEG audio content and additional data streams and the MPEG video frame is placed into an MPEG transport stream that is directed to the client device. In certain embodiments, the multiplexor may be internal to the stitcher. The client device receives the MPEG frame and can then decode and display the video frame on an associated display device. This process repeats for each video frame that is sent to the client device. As the client interacts and makes requests, for example changing the state of a button object, the virtual machine in conjunction with the MPEG object updates the MPEG element provided to the stitcher and the stitcher will replace the MPEG element within the MPEG video frame based upon the request of the client device. In certain other embodiments, each MPEG element representative of a different state of the MPEG object is provided to the stitcher. The virtual machine forwards the client's request to the stitcher and the stitcher selects the appropriate MPEG element based upon the MPEG objects state from a buffer to stitch into the MPEG video frame.
An interactive MPEG application may be constructed in an authoring environment. The authoring environment includes an editor with one or more scene windows that allow a user to create a scene based upon placement of MPEG objects within a scene window. An object tool bar is included within the authoring environment that allows the MPEG objects to be added. The authoring environment also includes a processor that produces an application file that contains at least reference to the MPEG objects and the display position for each of the MPEG objects within the scene. Preferably, when the MPEG object is placed within a scene window, the MPEG video element for the MPEG object is automatically snapped to a macroblock boundary. For each MPEG object that is added to the scene, the properties for the object can be modified. The authoring environment also allows a programmer to create scripts for using the MPEG objects. For example, a script within the application may relate a button state to an execution of a program. The authoring environment also provides for the creation of new MPEG objects. A designer may create an MPEG object by providing graphical content such as a video file or still image. The authoring environment will encode the graphical content so that the content includes MPEG elements/slices or a sequence of MPEG elements/slices. In addition to defining the MPEG video resource, the authoring environment allows the designer to add methods, properties, object data and scripts to the MPEG object. BRIEF DESCRIPTION FO THE DRAWINGS
The foregoing features of the invention will be more readily understood by reference to the following detailed description, taken with reference to the accompanying drawings, in which:
Fig. 1 graphically shows an example of an atomic MPEG object as used in a client/ server environment;
Fig. IA is a flow chart showing process flow between a stitcher and events from a client device;
Fig. 2 graphically shows an example of a streaming MPEG object as used in a client/ server environment;
Fig. 2A graphically shows an embodiment employing several session processors;
Fig. 3 provides an exemplary data structure and pseudo code for an atomic MPEG button object;
Fig. 4 provides an exemplary data structure and pseudo code for a progress bar MPEG object;
Fig. 5 shows an exemplary screen shot of an authoring environment for creating applications that use MPEG objects;
Fig. 6A shows an exemplary screen shot of a properties tab for an MPEG object;
Fig. 6B shows an exemplary screen shot of an event tab for an MPEG object;
Fig. 6C shows an exemplary screen shot of a script editor that can be used to create a script for an application that uses MPEG objects; and
Fig. 7 shows a system for using MPEG objects for interactive content.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF SPECIFIC EMBODIMENTS
Embodiments of the present invention disclose MPEG objects and systems and methods of using MPEG objects in a client/server environment for providing interactive encoded video content to a client device that includes an MPEG decoder and an upstream data connection to the server in an interactive communications network. As used in the detailed description and the claims the term MPEG element and MPEG video element shall refer to graphical information that has been formatted according to an MPEG standard (Motion Picture Experts Group). The graphical information may only be partially encoded. For example, graphical information that has been transform coded using the discrete cosine transform will be considered to be an MPEG element without requiring quantization, entropy encoding and additional MPEG formatting. MPEG elements may include MPEG header information for macroblocks and the slice level. An MPEG element may include data for either a full MPEG video frame, a portion of an MPEG video frame (macroblocks or slices) that are contiguous or non-contiguous, or data representative of a temporal sequence (frames, macroblocks or slices).
Interactive content formed from MPEG objects is preferably used in a client/server environment 100 as shown in Fig. 1 wherein the client device 101 does not need memory for caching data and includes a standard MPEG video decoder. An example of such a client device is a set-top box or other terminal that includes an MPEG decoder. Client devices may include a full processor and memory for caching; however these elements are not necessary for operation of this system. The server device in the client/server environment contains at least a session processor 102 formed from at least one processor that includes associated memory.
The client 101 and server establish an interactive session wherein the client device 101 transmits a request for an interactive session through an interactive communication network. The server assigns a session processor 102 and the request is sent to an input receiver 103 of the assigned session processor 102. The session processor 102 runs a virtual machine 104 that can interpret scripts. The virtual machine 104 may be any one of a number of virtual machines, such as a JAVA virtual machine. In response to the interactive request from the client, addressing information for the session processor is passed to the client 101. The client 101 then selects an interactive application, as defined in an AVML (Active Video Mark-up Language) file to view and interact with. Interactive applications may include references to video content along with selection controls, such as buttons, lists, and menus. Further explanation of such applications is explained in the U.S. patent application entitled, filed concurrently herewith entitled, "Interactive Encoded Content System including Object Models for Viewing on a Remote Device" and assigned to the same assignee, which is incorporated by reference in its entirety and attached as Appendix A. The request for the selected application is directed to the virtual machine 104. The virtual machine 104 accesses the AVML file defining the application, that indicates the MPEG objects, along with any other graphical content that is necessary for composing a video frame within a video sequence for display on a display device. The AVML file also includes the location within the frame for positioning each of the MPEG objects. In addition, the AVML file may include one or more scripts. One use for a script is to maintain the state of an MPEG object. These MPEG objects can reside and be accessed at different locations and may be distributed. The graphical elements of the MPEG objects are stitched together by a stitcher 105 based upon the location information within the application file (AVML file) to form complete MPEG video frames. The video frames along with MPEG audio frames are multiplexed together in a multiplexor 106 within the stitcher to form an MPEG stream that is sent to the requesting client device. The MPEG stream may then be decoded and displayed on the client's device. The input receiver, virtual machine, and stitcher may be embodied as either computer code that can be executed/interpreted on the session processor or may embodied in hardware or a combination of hardware and software. In some embodiments, any of the software (i.e. input receiver, virtual machine, or stitcher) may be constructed in hardware that is separate from the session processor. Additionally, the stitcher, which may be a computer program application may incorporate the functionality of the input receiver, the virtual machine and may process and parse the application file (AVML).
In certain embodiments, the stitcher may stitch the graphical elements together based upon the type of device that has requested the application. Devices have different capabilities. For example MPEG decoders on certain devices may not be as robust and capable of implementing all aspects of the chosen MPEG standard. Additionally, the bandwidth of the transmission path between the multiplexor and the client device may vary. For example, in general, wireless devices may have less bandwidth than wireline devices. Thus, the stitcher may insert into the MPEG header parameters a load delay or no delay, allow skips or not allow skips, force all frames to be encoded as I-frames or use a repeated uniform quantization to reduce the number of bits required to represent the values.
An MPEG object is part of a programming paradigm that allows individual MPEG video elements to be stitched together to form a frame of a video stream that incorporates active elements wherein a client can interact with the active elements and more specifically change the video stream. The MPEG video elements associated with an MPEG object may be a plurality of encoded macroblocks or slices that form a graphical element. A client can use a client device to select a graphical element on a display screen and interact with that graphical element. An MPEG object 110 includes an association with MPEG video and/or audio data along with methods and properties for the object. The MPEG video or audio may reside internal to the MPEG object or may be externally accessed through remote function calls. The methods within an MPEG object are code that may receive data from outside of the object, process the received data and/or the MPEG video 1 15 and audio data 120 and output data from the object according to video and audio directives. Object data 160 may indicate the state of the object or other internal variables for the object. For example, parameters such as display priority may be used to determine the priority of stacked media. In addition, parental control parameters, such as a content rating, may be associated with the audio or video data or an audio or video source or address. A parental control may be a method internal to an MPEG object that provides for control over access to the content.
As shown in Fig. 1 a virtual machine is made active on a session processor 102. in response to a request for an interactive application (AVML file having a script) and accesses a first MPEG object 110 which is an atomic object. An atomic object is self-contained in that the object contains all of the encoded data and methods necessary to construct all of the visual states for the object. Once the object is retrieved by the virtual machine the object requires no additional communications with another source. An example of an atomic object is a button that is displayed within a frame. The button object would have an MPEG video file for all states of the button and would include methods for storing the state based upon a client's interaction. The atomic object includes both pre-encoded MPEG data (video and audio data) 115, 120 along with methods 130. In certain embodiments, the audio or video data may not initially be MPEG elements, but rather graphical or audio data in another format that is converted either by the virtual machine or the stitcher into MPEG elements. In addition to the pre-encoded MPEG data 1 15, 120, the atomic object can include object data 160, such as state information. The object interacts with external sources through an interface definition 170 along with a script 180 for directing data to and from the object. The interface 170 may be for interacting with C++ code, Java Script or binary machine code. For example, the interface may be embodied in a class definitions.
An event may be received from a client device into the input receiver 103 that passes the event to an event dispatcher 1 11. The event dispatcher 111 identifies an MPEG object within the AVML file that is capable of processing the event. The event dispatcher then communicates the event to that object.
In response, the MPEG object through the interface definition 170 accesses the MPEG video 115 and/or audio data 120. The MPEG object may implement a method 130 for handling the event. In other embodiments, the interface definitions may directly access the data (object data, audio data and video data) Each MPEG object may include multiple MPEG video files that relate to different states of the object wherein the state is stored as object data 160. For example, the method may include a pointer that points the stitcher to the current frame and that is updated each time the stitcher is provided with a video frame. Similarly, the MPEG audio data 120 may have associated methods within the MPEG object. For example, the audio methods 130 may synchronize the MPEG audio data 120 with the MPEG video data 115. In other embodiments, state information is contained within the AVML file 1 1.
The process flow for the MPEG object and system for implementing the MPEG object is shown in the flow chart of Fig. IA. In Fig. IA, all code for accessing and parsing of an application is contained within the stitcher. The stitcher may be a software module that operates within the virtual machine on the session processor.
After receiving the request for the application and retrieving the application the stitcher first loads any script that exists within the application. IOOA The stitcher accesses the layout for the video frame and loads this information into memory. 11 OA The layout will include the background, the overall size of the video frame, the aspect ratio, and position of any objects within the application. The stitcher then instantiates any MPEG objects that are present within the application. 120A Based upon a script within the application that keeps track of the state of an object, the graphical element associated with the state for each object is retrieved from a memory location. The graphical element may be in a format other than MPEG and may not initially be an MPEG element. The stitcher will determine the format of the graphical element. If the graphical element is in a non-MPEG element format, such as a TIFF format, GIF or RGB, for example, the stitcher will render the graphical element into a spatial representation. 130A The stitcher will then encode the spatial representation of the graphical element, so that it becomes an MPEG element. 135 A Thus, the MPEG element will have macroblock data formed into slices. If the graphical element associated with the MPEG object is already in an MPEG element format then neither rendering or encoding is necessary. The MPEG elements may include one or more macroblocks that have associated position information. The stitcher then converts the relative macroblock/slice information into global MPEG video frame locations based upon the position information from the layout and encodes each of the slices. The slices are then stored to memory so that they are cached for quick retrieval. 140A An MPEG video frame is then created. The MPEG elements for each object based upon the layout are placed into scan order by slice for an MPEG frame. The stitcher sequences the slices into the appropriate order to form an MPEG frame. 145 A The MPEG video frame is sent to the stitcher's multiplexor and the multiplexor multiplexes the video frame with any audio content. The MPEG video stream that includes the MPEG video frame and any audio content is directed through the interactive communication network to the client device of the user for display on a display device. 190A
Changes to the MPEG frames are event driven. A user through an input device sends a signal through a client device to the session processor that is provided to the stitcher. 160A The stitcher checks to see if the input that is received is input that is handled by the script of the application using the event dispatcher. 165 A If it is handled by the script, the script directives are executed/interpreted. 170A The stitcher determines if the object state has changed. 175 A The stitcher will retrieve the graphical element associated with the state of that object from a memory location. 180A The stitcher may retrieve the graphical element from a memory location associated with the MPEG object after the event has been processed, or the MPEG object may place the graphical element in a memory location associated with the stitcher during event processing. The stitcher will again determine the format of the graphical element. If the graphical element is in a non-MPEG element format and therefore is not structured according to macroblocks and slices, the stitcher will render and encode the element as an MPEG element and will cache the element into a buffer. 130A, 135A, 140A This new MPEG element representative of the change in state will be stitched into the MPEG frame at the same location as defined by the layout for the MPEG frame from the application. 145 A The stitcher will gather all of the MPEG elements and places the slices into scan order and format the frame according to the appropriate MPEG standard. The MPEG frame will then be sent to the client device for display. 190A The system will continue to output MPEG frames into an MPEG stream until the next event causes a change in state and therefore, a change to one or more MPEG elements within the frame layout.
A second MPEG object is a streaming MPEG object. The streaming MPEG object operates within the same environment as the atomic object, but the object is not self-contained and accesses an outside source for source data. For example, the object may be a media player that allows for selection between various sources of audio and video. Thus, the MPEG object is not self-contained for each of the audio and video sources, but the MPEG object accesses the sources based upon requests from the client device. As shown in Fig. 2, the MPEG object 200 and methods implemented according to interface definitions (input, output) 211 link the MPEG object 200 to the virtual machine 230, the stitcher 250, as well as an RPC (remote procedure call) receiver 212 at a stream source 220. Thus, the streaming MPEG object is in communication with the virtual machine/client 230, 240 a stitcher 250, a source entity, the stream source 220 and other sources. The interface definitions may also directly access the data (object, audio and video). In response to an event, an event dispatcher accesses the MPEG object capable of handling the event using the interface. The event dispatcher causes the MPEG object to access or request the video and audio content requested by the client. This request may be achieved directly by a method within the MPEG object that accesses the data source. In other embodiments, a script within the AVML file calls an RPC receiver 212 that accesses a server script 213. The server script 213 retrieves the requested content (event source 214, data source 215, video source 216, or audio source 217) or accesses an address for the content and either provides this information or content to the MPEG object or to the stitcher 250.
The server script 213 may render the requested content and encode the content as one or more MPEG slices. MPEG video content can be passed through the MPEG object to the stitcher 250 that stitches together the MPEG video content into an MPEG video frame. The MPEG object may also request or retrieve audio MPEG content that can be passed to the stitcher. Thus, audio MPEG content may be processed in a similar fashion to MPEG video content. The MPEG video data may be processed by a method within the MPEG object. For example, a method may synchronize all of the MPEG content prior to providing the MPEG content to the stitcher, or the method may confirm that all of the MPEG content has been received and is temporally aligned, so that the stitcher can stitch together a complete MPEG video frame from a plurality of MPEG object video and audio data for presentation to the client in a compliant MPEG stream. The script of the AVML file or the MPEG object may request updated content from the stream source through the server script 213 or directly from an addressable location. An event requesting updated content may originate from communication with the client. The content may originate from a data, audio, video, or event source 214-217.
Event data 214 includes but is not limited to trigger data. Triggers include data that can be inserted into the MPEG transport stream. In addition, triggers may be internal to an MPEG video or audio source. For example, triggers may be located in header information or within the data content itself. These triggers when triggered can cause different events, such as an overlay to be presented on the screen of the client or a pop-up advertisement. The data source 215 may include data that is not traditionally audio or video data. For example, a data from the data source may include an alert notification for the client script, data to be embedded within the MPEG video stream or stock data that is to be merged with a separate graphical element.
Each of the various sources that have been requested is provided to the stitcher directly or may pass through the MPEG object. The MPEG object using a method may combine the data sources into a single stream for transport to the session processor. The single stream is received by the session processor and the session processor Like the atomic object the streaming object may include audio and video methods 281, 282 that synchronize the audio and video data. The video method 282 provides the video content to the stitcher so that the stitcher can stitch each of the MPEG video elements together to form a series of MPEG frames. The audio method 281 provides the audio data to the multiplexor within the stitcher so that the audio data is multiplexed together with the video data into an MPEG transport stream. The MPEG object also includes methods 283, 284 for the event data and for the other data.
Steaming MPEG objects may be produced by stitching multiple streaming MPEG objects 201 A, 202A...203A together in a session processor 200A. Construction of a scene may occur by linking multiple session processors 21OA...220A wherein each session processor feeds the next session processor with the MPEG elements of an MPEG object as shown in Fig. 2A.
The MPEG object, either an atomic object or a streaming object may itself be an application with a hierarchy of internal objects. For example, there may be an application object that defines the type of application at the top level. Below the application object there may be a scene object that defines a user interface including the locations of MPEG elements that are to be stitched together along with reference to other MPEG objects that are necessary for the application. Below the scene object, the individual MPEG object could be located. Thus, an MPEG object may be a self contained application. In such an embodiment, in response to a request for an application, the client script would call the MPEG object that contains the application and the application would be instantiated.
An example of an atomic MPEG object's data structure 300 along with pseudo code 310 for the MPEG object is shown in Fig. 3. Each MPEG object includes an interface segment 315 that may provide such information as class definitions and/or the location of the object and related class definitions in a distributed system. MPEG objects also include either a resource segment 316 or a method for at least receiving one or more resources.
The data structure 300 of Fig. 3 shows the object container/package 320 that includes an interface segment 315 that provides the location of the button MPEG object. The object also includes an object data segment 317. As shown there may be multiple object data segments (i.e. Interface Data, Visible Data, Audible Data, Button Data etc.) The object data is data that is used to define parameters of the object. For example, the visible data 330 for the object defines the height and the width of the button. The button data 340 provides a name for the button along with the states of the button and an audio file that is played when the button is selected (ClickAudio:= ClickSound.ac3). The resource segment 316 of the MPEG button object includes one or more video and/or audio files. In the example that is shown, the various state data for the button are provided 350, 351 wherein the video content would be a collection of macroblocks that represent one or more frames of MPEG video data. Thus, for each state of the button there would be at least one group of MPEG video elements composed of a plurality of macroblocks. The MPEG video elements would be the size of the height and width of the button and may be smaller than a frame to be displayed on a client's display device.
Fig. 4 shows another example of a possible MPEG object including the data structure 400 and pseudo code 410. This example is of a progress bar object. Like the MPEG object of Fig. 3 the progress bar MPEG object includes an interface segment 415 that identifies the location of the object's classes. Sample class definitions are provided in both XML and JAVA 422, 423. In the class definition the class includes methods for clearing the variable percentage and for setting the MPEG graphic initially to Opercent.slc wherein sic represents an MPEG slice. In addition, the progress bar includes an Object Data Segment 417 that provides interface data (name of the progress bar), visible data (the size of the progress bar MPEG slices) and progress data (an internal variable that is updated as progress of the event being measured increases) 418. The progress bar MPEG object includes resource data 316 that includes MPEG slices that represent the various graphical states representing percentages of completion of the event being monitored. Thus, there may be ten different progress bar graphics each composed of MPEG slices 419. These MPEG slices can be combined with other MPEG slices to form a complete MPEG frame.
An authoring environment provides for the creation and manipulation of MPEG objects and allows for the creation of scenes for an interactive application. The authoring environment is preferably a graphical user interface authoring tool for creating MPEG objects and interactive applications by graphical selection of MPEG objects. The authoring environment includes two interfaces. The first interface is the authoring tool for creating MPEG objects and defining application scenes. The second interface is a script editor that allows a designer to add events and methods to MPEG object or to a scene. The output of the authoring environment may be self contained binary code for an MPEG object or a structured data file representing an application. The structured data file for an application includes information regarding the MPEG objects within a scene, the location of the MPEG graphical element of the MPEG object within a frame, properties for the MPEG object, the address/memory location of the MPEG object, and scripts for the application that access and use the MPEG objects. The self contained binary code for an MPEG object may be used by an application. The application may access an MPEG object by referencing the memory location wherein the self-contained binary code is located. Fig. 5 graphically shows the authoring environment 600. The graphical environment allows an application designer to add MPEG objects into a scene layout 610 though graphical selection of a representative icon 620 that is linked to the underlying object code. In addition, the authoring environment allows a user to create new MPEG objects.
A top level scene will be the first scene that is provided to a user's device when the application is loaded. The application designer can select and drag and drop an object from the object toolbar 620. For example, the designer can insert user interface objects such as: a media player object, a ticker object, a button object, a static image, a list box object, or text. The authoring environment includes other objects such as container objects, session objects and timer objects that are not graphical in nature, but are part of the MPEG object model.
The authoring environment includes an application tree 630 that indicates the level of the application. For example, an application may include a plurality of video scenes wherein a single scene is equivalent to a portion of a webpage. The video scene may allow a user of the interactive video to drill down to a second scene by selecting a link within the video scene. The second scene would be at a level that is lower than the first scene. The application tree 630 provides both a listing of the scene hierarchy as well as a listing of the objects within the scene in a hierarchical order.
Rather than the creation of an application, the designer may create an object or a hierarchical object that contains a plurality of objects. Thus, the output of the authoring environment may also be that of an MPEG object. The designer would provide graphical content, for example in the form of a JPEG image, and the authoring environment would render the JPEG image and encode the JPEG image as a sequence of slices. The authoring environment would also allow the designer to define scripts, methods and properties for the object.
For example, a designer may wish to create a new media player MPEG object to display viewable media streams. The designer may import a graphic that provides a skin for the media player that surrounds the media stream. The graphic would be rendered by the authoring environment and encoded as a plurality of MPEG slices. The designer could then add in properties for the media player object such as the name and location of the media stream, whether a chaser (highlighting of the media stream within the video frame) is present, or the type of highlighting (i.e. yellow ring around the object that has focus). In addition, the designer may include properties that indicate the objects that are located in each direction in case a user decides to move focus from the media player object to another object. For example, there may be a chaser up, down, left, and right properties and associated methods that indicate the object that will receive focus if the current media player object has focus and the user uses a remote control coupled to the user's device (i.e. set-top box) and presses one of the direction keys. The MPEG object designer may provide the media player object with events such as onLoad that is triggered every time a user views the scene that has the media player object. Other events may include onFocus that indicates that the object has received focus and onBlur that indicates the object has lost focus. An onKeyPress event may be included indicating that if the object is in focus and a key is pressed that this event will occur. The events and properties for the Media Player Object are provided for exemplary purposes to show the nature and scope of events and properties that can be associated with an MPEG object. Other MPEG objects can be created having similar event and properties as well as distinct events and properties as required by the application designer.
The authoring environment includes a properties 640 and event tab 650 for defining the properties of a predefined or new object. An example of the properties pane 660 is shown in Fig. 6 A. The properties for a predefined ticker object (a banner that appears to scroll across the video frame) includes the background color, the text color, the text font and the transparency of the ticker 665. It should be recognized that each object type will have different properties. The events tab allows the application designer to make associations between events (received signals from the user) and the object. For example, a button object may include a plurality of states (on and off). Associated with each state may be a separate MPEG video sequence. Thus, there is a video graphic for the "on" state that indicates the button has been activated and a video graphic for the "off state that indicates the button is inactive. The event tab allows the application designer to make the association between the signal received from the user, the state change of the object and the change in the video content that is part of the scene. Fig. 6B shows an example of the event tab when selected for a predefined media player object. The events include an onLoad, onFocus, onBlur, onKeyPress, and onClick events 670 for the media player. The authoring environment allows the designer to tab between scenes 680 and tab between the scene layout and the scripting page 690. As shown, the authoring environment includes a template tab. The template tab 695 allows for selection of previously saved scenes, so that a designer can use design information from previous scenes for the creation of new scenes. In addition, the designer may be provided with blank event panes and properties panes so that the designer can create a new MPEG object defining properties and events for the new object.
Scripts can be added to an application or to a newly created object by selecting the scripting tab. Fig. 6C shows the script editor 691. For example, the script may determine the function that is provided if a client attempts to select a button graphic 692. In this example, the script would be part of the application file. Similarly, the designer may designate that the script is to be used for creating a script internal to the MPEG object such as the client script within the MPEG streaming object shown in Fig. 2 or the script shown in the atomic object of Fig. 1.
MPEG objects may also be generated in real-time. In this paradigm, a request for an MPEG object is made to the session processor wherein the MPEG object has undefined video and/or audio content. A script at the session processor will cause a separate processor/server to obtain and render the video content for the object, encode the content as an MPEG element and return a complete MPEG object in real-time to the session processor. The server may construct either an atomic or streaming MPEG object. The server may also employee caching techniques to store the newly defined MPEG objects for subsequent MPEG object requests. This methodology is useful for distributed rendering of user specific or real-time generated content. For example, the server may act as a proxy that transcodes a client's photo album where the photos originate in a JPEG format and the server stores the photos as MPEG elements within an MPEG photo album object. The server may then pass the MPEG photo album object to the session processor for use with the requested application. Additionally, the MPEG photo album object would be saved for later retrieval when the client again requests the photo album.
Once the designer has completed the design of the application or the MPEG object, the system takes the received information and converts the information into either binary code if a new MPEG object is created or an AVML (active video mark-up language) file if the designer has created a new application. The AVML file is XML based in syntax, but contain specific structures relevant to the formation of an interactive video. For example, the AVML file can contain scripts that interact with MPEG objects. An explanation of the AVML language can be found in Appendix A attached to U.S. patent application entitled, entitled, "Interactive Encoded Content System including Object Models for Viewing on a Remote Device" filed concurrently herewith on January 11, 2008 and assigned to the same assignee, which is incorporated by reference in its entirety. All objects within an application scene have a hierarchy in a logical stack. The hierarchy is assigned based on the sequence of adding the object in the scene. The object first added to the scene is at the bottom of the stack. Objects may be moved up or down within the hierarchy prior to completion of the design and conversion of the graphical scene into the AVML file format. New MPEG objects that are in binary code may be incorporated into applications by referencing the storage location for the binary code.
The AVML file output from the authoring environment allows a stitcher module to be aware of the desired output slice configuration from the plurality of MPEG elements associated with the MPEG objects referenced within the AVML file. The AVML file indicates the size of the slices and the location of the slices within an MPEG frame. In addition, the AVML file describes the encapsulated self-describing object presentations or states of the MPEG objects. For example, if a button object is graphically placed into the authoring environment by a user, the authoring environment will determine the position of the button within an MPEG video frame based upon this dynamic placement. This position information will be translated into a frame location and will be associated with the MPEG button object. State information will also be placed within the AVML file. Thus, the AVML file will list the states for the MPEG button object (on and off) and will have a reference to the location of each MPEG graphical file (MPEG elements) for those two states.
After an application is defined by an application designer, a client can request the application by using the client's device 700 as shown in Fig. 7. The client's device 700 will request an interactive session and a session processor 701 will be assigned. The session processor 701 will retrieve the AVML file 702 from a memory location 703 for the requested application and will run a virtual machine 705. The virtual machine 705 will parse the AVML file and identify the MPEG objects that the session processor 701 needs to access for the application. The virtual machine 705 will determine the position of each graphical element 710 from the accessed MPEG objects 720 within a video frame based upon the position information from the AVML file 730 and the sizing information as defined within the MPEG objects 720. As shown, only one MPEG object is present in the Fig. although many MPEG objects may be used in conjunction with the AVML file. Additionally, the MPEG object that is shown stored in memory has two representative components, the MPEG element 710 and the MPEG method 775. As expressed above, the MPEG element may be internal to the MPEG object or may be external. The MPEG elements 710a,b, which are preferably MPEG slices from one or more MPEG objects are then passed to the stitcher 740 by the virtual machine 705 and the stitcher sequences the slices so that they form an MPEG video frame 750 according to the position information parsed by the virtual machine. The stitcher is presented with the MPEG elements associated with the objects for each state. For example, if an MPEG button object has MPEG elements of 64x64 pixels and has two states (on and off), the stitcher will buffer the pre-encoded 64x64 pixel MPEG elements for each state. The MPEG video frame 750 is encapsulated so that it forms a part of an MPEG video stream 760 that is then provided to the client device 700. The client device 700 can then decode the MPEG video stream. The client may then interact with MPEG objects by using an input device 770. The session processor 701 receives the signal form the input device 770 and based on the signal and the object selected methods 775 of the MPEG object 720 will be executed or interpreted by the virtual machine 705 and an MPEG video element 710a will be updated and the updated video element content 710c will be passed to the stitcher 740. Additionally, state information maintained by the session processor for the MPEG object that has been selected will be updated within the application (AVML file). The MPEG video element 710c may already be stored in a buffer within the stitcher. For example, the MPEG element 710c may be representative of a state. A request for change in state of a button may be received by the session processor and the stitcher can access the buffer that contains the MPEG slices of the MPEG element for the 'off-state' assuming the button was previously in the 'on-state.' The stitcher 740 can then replace the MPEG element slice 710a within the MPEG frame 750 and the updated MPEG frame 750a will be sent to the client device 700. Thus, the client interacts with the MPEG content even though the client device may only have an MPEG decoder and an upstream connection for sending signals/instructions to the assigned session processor 701.
Although the present invention has been described in terms of MPEG encoding, the invention may be employed with other block based encoding techniques for creating objects that are specific to those block based encoding techniques. The present invention may be embodied in many different forms, including, but in no way limited to, computer program logic for use with a processor (e.g., a microprocessor, microcontroller, digital signal processor, or general purpose computer), programmable logic for use with a programmable logic device (e.g., a Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) or other PLD), discrete components, integrated circuitry (e.g., an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC)), or any other means including any combination thereof. In an embodiment of the present invention, predominantly all of the reordering logic may be implemented as a set of computer program instructions that is converted into a computer executable form, stored as such in a computer readable medium, and executed by a microprocessor within the array under the control of an operating system.
Computer program logic implementing all or part of the functionality previously described herein may be embodied in various forms, including, but in no way limited to, a source code form, a computer executable form, and various intermediate forms (e.g., forms generated by an assembler, compiler, networker, or locator.) Source code may include a series of computer program instructions implemented in any of various programming languages (e.g., an object code, an assembly language, or a high-level language such as FORTRAN, C, C++, JAVA, or HTML) for use with various operating systems or operating environments. The source code may define and use various data structures and communication messages. The source code may be in a computer executable form (e.g., via an interpreter), or the source code may be converted (e.g., via a translator, assembler, or compiler) into a computer executable form.
The computer program may be fixed in any form (e.g., source code form, computer executable form, or an intermediate form) either permanently or transitorily in a tangible storage medium, such as a semiconductor memory device (e.g., a RAM, ROM, PROM, EEPROM, or Flash-Programmable RAM), a magnetic memory device (e.g., a diskette or fixed disk), an optical memory device (e.g., a CD-ROM), a PC card (e.g., PCMCIA card), or other memory device. The computer program may be fixed in any form in a signal that is transmittable to a computer using any of various communication technologies, including, but in no way limited to, analog technologies, digital technologies, optical technologies, wireless technologies, networking technologies, and internetworking technologies. The computer program may be distributed in any form as a removable storage medium with accompanying printed or electronic documentation (e.g., shrink wrapped software or a magnetic tape), preloaded with a computer system (e.g., on system ROM or fixed disk), or distributed from a server or electronic bulletin board over the communication system (e.g., the Internet or World Wide Web.)
Hardware logic (including programmable logic for use with a programmable logic device) implementing all or part of the functionality previously described herein may be designed using traditional manual methods, or may be designed, captured, simulated, or documented electronically using various tools, such as Computer Aided Design (CAD), a hardware description language (e.g., VHDL or AHDL), or a PLD programming language (e.g., PALASM, ABEL, or CUPL.)
While the invention has been particularly shown and described with reference to specific embodiments, it will be understood by those skilled in the art that various changes in form and detail may be made therein without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention as defined by the appended clauses. As will be apparent to those skilled in the art, techniques described above for panoramas may be applied to images that have been captured as non-panoramic images, and vice versa. Embodiments of the present invention may be described, without limitation, by the following clauses. While these embodiments have been described in the clauses by process steps, an apparatus comprising a computer with associated display capable of executing the process steps in the clauses below is also included in the present invention. Likewise, a computer program product including computer executable instructions for executing the process steps in the clauses below and stored on a computer readable medium is included within the present invention.
Interactive Encoded Content System including Object Models for Viewing on a Remote
Device
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
U.S. Patent Application entitled "MPEG Objects and Systems and Methods for Using MPEG Objects " and assigned to the same assignee filed contemporaneously herewith is related generally to the subject matter of the present application and is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
The present application claims priority from U.S. provisional applications serial no. 60/884,773, filed January 12, 2007, serial no 60/884,744, filed January 12, 2007, and serial no. 60/884,772, filed January 12, 2007, the full disclosures of which are hereby incorporated herein by reference.
Technical Field and Background Art
The present invention relates to systems and methods for providing interactive content to a remote device and more specifically to systems and methods wherein an object model is associated with pre-encoded video content.
In cable television systems, the cable head-end transmits content to one or more subscribers wherein the content is transmitted in an encoded form. Typically, the content is encoded as digital MPEG video and each subscriber has a set-top box or cable card that is capable of decoding the MPEG video stream. Beyond providing linear content, cable providers can now provide interactive content, such as web pages or walled-garden content. As the Internet has become more dynamic, including video content on web pages and requiring applications or scripts for decoding the video content, cable providers have adapted to allow subscribers the ability to view these dynamic web pages. In order to composite a dynamic web page for transmission to a requesting subscriber in encoded form, the cable head end retrieves the requested web page and renders the web page. Thus, the cable headend must first decode any encoded content that appears within the dynamic webpage. For example, if a video is to be played on the webpage, the headend must retrieve the encoded video and decode each frame of the video. The cable headend then renders each frame to form a sequence of bitmap images of the Internet web page. Thus, the web page can only be composited together if all of the content that forms the web page is first decoded. Once the composite frames are complete, the composited video is sent to an encoder, such as an MPEG encoder to be re-encoded. The compressed MPEG video frames are then sent in an MPEG video stream to the user's set-top box.
Creating such composite encoded video frames in a cable television network requires intensive CPU and memory processing, since all encoded content must first be decoded, then composited, rendered, and re-encoded. In particular, the cable headend must decode and re- encode all of the content in real-time. Thus, allowing users to operate in an interactive environment with dynamic web pages is quite costly to cable operators because of the required processing. Additionally, such systems have the additional drawback that the image quality is degraded due to re-encoding of the encoded video.
Summary of the Invention
Embodiments of the invention disclose a system for encoding at least one composite encoded video frame for display on a display device. The system includes a markup language-based graphical layout, the graphical layout including frame locations within the composite frame for at least the first encoded source and the second encoded source. Additionally, the system has a stitcher module for stitching together the first encoded source and the second encoded source according to the frame locations of the graphical layout. The stitcher forms an encoded frame without having to decode the block-based transform encoded data for at least the first source. The encoded video may be encoded using one of the MPEG standards, AVS, VC-I or another block-based encoding protocol.
In certain embodiments of the invention, the system allows a user to interact with graphical elements on a display device. The processor maintains state information about one or more graphical elements identified in the graphical layout. The graphical elements in the graphical layout are associated with one of the encoded sources. A user transmits a request to change state of one of the graphical elements through a client device in communication with the system. The request for the change in state causes the processor to register the change in state and to obtain a new encoded source. The processor causes the stitcher to stitch the new encoded source in place of the encoded source representing the graphic element. The processor may also execute or interpret computer code associated with the graphic element.
For example, the graphic element may be a button object that has a plurality of states, associated encoded content for each state, and methods associated which each of the states. The system may also include a transmitter for transmitting to the client device the composited video content. The client device can then decode the composited video content and cause the composited video content to be displayed on a display device. In certain embodiments each graphical element within the graphical layout is associated with one or more encoded MPEG video frames or portions of a video frame, such as one or more macroblocks or slices. The compositor may use a single graphical element repeatedly within the MPEG video stream. For example, the button may be only a single video frame in one state and a single video frame in another state and the button may be composited together with MPEG encoded video content wherein the encoded macroblocks representing the button are stitched into the MPEG encoded video content in each frame.
Other embodiments of the invention disclose a system for creating one or more composite MPEG video frames forming an MPEG video stream. The MPEG video stream is provided to a client device that includes an MPEG decoder. The client device decodes the MPEG video stream and outputs the video to a display device. The composite MPEG video frames are created by obtaining a graphical layout for a video frame. The graphical layout includes frame locations within the composite MPEG video frame for at least a first MPEG source and a second MPEG source. Based upon the graphical layout the first and second MPEG sources are obtained. The first and second MPEG sources are provided to a stitcher module. The stitcher module stitches together the first MPEG source and the second MPEG source according to the frame locations of the graphical layout to form an MPEG frame without having to decode the macroblock data of the MPEG sources. In certain embodiments, the MPEG sources are only decoded to the slice layer and a processor maintains the positions of the slices within the frame for the first and second MPEG sources. This process is repeated for each frame of MPEG data in order to form an MPEG video stream.
In certain embodiments, the system includes a groomer. The groomer grooms the MPEG sources so that each MPEG element of the MPEG source is converted to an MPEG P- frame format. The groomer module may also identify any macroblocks in the second MPEG source that include motion vectors that reference other macroblocks in a section of the first MPEG source and re-encodes those macroblocks as intracoded macroblocks.
The system may include an association between an MPEG source and a method for the MPEG source forming an MPEG object. In such a system, a processor would receive a request from a client device and in response to the request, a method of the MPEG object would be used. The method may change the state of the MPEG object and cause the selection of a different MPEG source. Thus, the stitcher may replace a first MPEG source with a third MPEG source and stitch together the third and second MPEG sources to form a video frame. The video frame would be streamed to the client device and the client device could decode the updated MPEG video frame and display the updated material on the client's display. For example, an MPEG button object may have an "on" state and an "off state and the MPEG button object may also include two MPEG graphics composed of a plurality of macroblocks forming slices. In response to a client requesting to change the state of the button from off to on, a method would update the state and cause the MPEG graphic representing an "on" button to be passed to the stitcher.
In certain embodiments, the video frame may be constructed from an unencoded graphic or a graphic that is not MPEG encoded and a groomed MPEG video source. The unencoded graphic may first be rendered. For example, a background may be rendered as a bit map. The background may then be encoded as a series of MPEG macroblocks divided up into slices. The stitcher can then stitch together the background and the groomed MPEG video content to form an MPEG video stream. The background may then be saved for later reuse. In such a configuration, the background would have cut-out regions wherein the slices in those regions would have no associated data, thus video content slices could be inserted into the cut-out. In other embodiments, real-time broadcasts may be received and groomed for creating MPEG video streams.
Brief Description of the Drawings
The foregoing features of the invention will be more readily understood by reference to the following detailed description, taken with reference to the accompanying drawings, in which:
Fig. 1 is a block diagram showing a communications environment for implementing one version of the present invention;
Fig. IA shows the regional processing offices and the video content distribution network;
Fig. IB is a sample composite stream presentation and interaction layout file;
Fig. 1C shows the construction of a frame within the authoring environment; Fig. ID shows breakdown of a frame by macroblocks into elements;
Fig. 2 is a diagram showing multiple sources composited onto a display;
Fig. 3 is a diagram of a system incorporating grooming;
Fig. 4 is a diagram showing a video frame prior to grooming, after grooming, and with a video overlay in the groomed section;
Fig. 5 is a diagram showing how grooming is done, for example, removal of B - frames;
Fig. 6 is a diagram showing an MPEG frame structure;
Fig. 7 is a flow chart showing the grooming process for I, B, and P frames;
Fig. 8 is a diagram depicting removal of region boundary motion vectors;
Fig. 9 is a diagram showing the reordering of the DCT coefficients;
Fig. 10 shows an alternative groomer;
Fig. 11 is an example of a video frame;
Fig. 12 is a diagram showing video frames starting in random positions relative to each other;
Fig. 13 is a diagram of a display with multiple MPEG elements composited within the picture;
Fig. 14 is a diagram showing the slice breakdown of a picture consisting of multiple elements;
Fig. 15 is a diagram showing slice based encoding in preparation for stitching;
Fig. 16 is a diagram detailing the compositing of a video element into a picture;
Fig. 17 is a diagram detailing compositing of a 16x16 sized macroblock element into a background comprised of 24x24 sized macroblocks;
Fig. 18 is a flow chart showing the steps involved in encoding and building a composited picture;
Fig. 19 is a diagram providing a simple example of grooming;
Fig. 20 is a diagram showing that the composited element does not need to be rectangular nor contiguous;
Fig. 21 shows a diagram of elements on a screen wherein a single element is noncontiguous;
Fig. 22 shows a groomer for grooming linear broadcast content for multicasting to a plurality of processing offices and/or session processors;
Fig. 23 shows an example of a customized mosaic when displayed on a display device; Fig. 24 is a diagram of an IP based network for providing interactive MPEG content;
FIG. 25 is a diagram of a cable based network for providing interactive MPEG content;
FIG. 26 is a flow-chart of the resource allocation process for a load balancer for use with a cable based network; and
FIG. 27 is a system diagram used to show communication between cable network elements for load balancing.
Detailed Description of Specific Embodiments
As used in the following detailed description and in the appended claims the term "region" shall mean a logical grouping of MPEG (Motion Picture Expert Group) slices that are either contiguous or non-contiguous. When the term MPEG is used it shall refer to all variants of the MPEG standard including MPEG-2 and MPEG-4. The present invention as described in the embodiments below provides an environment for interactive MPEG content and communications between a processing office and a client device having an associated display, such as a television,. Although the present invention specifically references the MPEG specification and encoding, principles of the invention may be employed with other encoding techniques that are based upon block-based transforms that result in a representation of the content in the frequency domain. As used in the following specification and appended claims, the terms encode, encoded, and encoding shall refer to the process of compressing a digital data signal and formatting the compressed digital data signal to a protocol or standard. Encoded video data can be in any state other than a spatial representation. For example, encoded video data may be transform coded, quantized, and entropy encoded or any combination thereof. Therefore, data that has been transform coded will be considered to be encoded.
Although the present application refers to the display device as a television, the display device may be a cell phone, a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA) or other device that includes a display. A client device including a decoding device, such as a set-top box that can decode MPEG content, is associated with the display device of the user. The decoder and the display device may be integrated. The interactive MPEG content is created in an authoring environment allowing an application designer to design the interactive MPEG content creating an application having one or more scenes from various elements including video content from content providers and linear broadcasters. An application file is formed in an Active Video Markup Language (AVML). The AVML file produced by the authoring environment is an XML-based file defining the video graphical elements (i.e. MPEG slices) within a single frame/page, the sizes of the video graphical elements, the layout of the video graphical elements within the page/frame for each scene, links to the video graphical elements, and any scripts for the scene. The AVML file may also be authored in a text editor in addition to being generated by the authoring environment. The video graphical elements may be static graphics, dynamic graphics, or video content. It should be recognized that each element within a scene is really a sequence of images and a static graphic is an image that is repeatedly displayed and does not change over time. Each of the elements may be an MPEG object that can include both MPEG data for graphics and operations associated with the graphics. The interactive MPEG content can include multiple interactive MPEG objects within a scene with which a user can interact. For example, the scene may include a button MPEG object that provides encoded MPEG data forming the video graphic for the object and also includes a procedure for keeping track of the button state. The MPEG objects may work in coordination with the scripts. For example, an MPEG button object may keep track of its state (on/off), but a script within the scene will determine what occurs when that button is pressed. The script may associate the button state with a video program so that the button will indicate whether the video content is playing or stopped. MPEG objects always have an associated action as part of the object. In certain embodiments, the MPEG objects, such as a button MPEG object, may perform actions beyond keeping track of the status of the button. In such, embodiments, the MPEG object may also include a call to an external program, wherein the MPEG object will access the program when the button graphic is engaged. Thus, for a play/pause MPEG object button, the MPEG object may include code that keeps track of the state of the button, provides a graphical overlay based upon a state change, and/or causes a video player object to play or pause the video content depending on the state of the button.
Once an application is created within the authoring environment, and an interactive session is requested by a requesting client device, the processing office assigns a processor for the interactive session.
The assigned processor operational at the processing office runs a virtual machine and accesses and runs the requested application. The processor prepares the graphical part of the scene for transmission in the MPEG format. Upon receipt of the MPEG transmission by the client device and display on the user's display, a user can interact with the displayed content by using an input device in communication with the client device. The client device sends input requests from the user through a communication network to the application running on the assigned processor at the processing office or other remote location. In response, the assigned processor updates the graphical layout based upon the request and the state of the MPEG objects hereinafter referred to in total as the application state. New elements may be added to the scene or replaced within the scene or a completely new scene may be created. The assigned processor collects the elements and the objects for the scene, and either the assigned processor or another processor processes the data and operations according to the object(s) and produces the revised graphical representation in an MPEG format that is transmitted to the transceiver for display on the user's television. Although the above passage indicates that the assigned processor is located at the processing office, the assigned processor may be located at a remote location and need only be in communication with the processing office through a network connection. Similarly, although the assigned processor is described as handling all transactions with the client device, other processors may also be involved with requests and assembly of the content (MPEG objects) of the graphical layout for the application.
Fig. l is a block diagram showing a communications environment 100 for implementing one version of the present invention. The communications environment 100 allows an applications programmer to create an application for two-way interactivity with an end user. The end user views the application on a client device 110, such as a television, and can interact with the content by sending commands upstream through an upstream network 120 wherein upstream and downstream may be part of the same network or a separate network providing the return path link to the processing office. The application programmer creates an application that includes one or more scenes. Each scene is the equivalent of an HTML webpage except that each element within the scene is a video sequence. The application programmer designs the graphical representation of the scene and incorporates links to elements, such as audio and video files and objects, such as buttons and controls for the scene. The application programmer uses a graphical authoring tool 130 to graphically select the objects and elements. The authoring environment 130 may include a graphical interface that allows an application programmer to associate methods with elements creating video objects. The graphics may be MPEG encoded video, groomed MPEG video, still images or video in another format. The application programmer can incorporate content from a number of sources including content providers 160 (news sources, movie studios, RSS feeds etc.) and linear broadcast sources (broadcast media and cable, on demand video sources and web-based video sources) 170 into an application. The application programmer creates the application as a file in AVML (active video mark-up language) and sends the application file to a proxy/cache 140 within a video content distribution network 150. The AVML file format is an XML format. For example see Fig. IB that shows a sample AVML file.
The content provider 160 may encode the video content as MPEG video/audio or the content may be in another graphical format (e.g. JPEG, BITMAP, H263, H264, VC-I etc.). The content may be subsequently groomed and/or scaled in a Groomer/Scaler 190 to place the content into a preferable encoded MPEG format that will allow for stitching. If the content is not placed into the preferable MPEG format, the processing office will groom the format when an application that requires the content is requested by a client device. Linear broadcast content 170 from broadcast media services, like content from the content providers, will be groomed. The linear broadcast content is preferably groomed and/or scaled in Groomer/Scaler 180 that encodes the content in the preferable MPEG format for stitching prior to passing the content to the processing office.
The video content from the content producers 160 along with the applications created by application programmers are distributed through a video content distribution network 150 and are stored at distribution points 140. These distribution points are represented as the proxy/cache within Fig. 1. Content providers place their content for use with the interactive processing office in the video content distribution network at a proxy/cache 140 location. Thus, content providers 160 can provide their content to the cache 140 of the video content distribution network 150 and one or more processing office that implements the present architecture may access the content through the video content distribution network 150 when needed for an application. The video content distribution network 150 may be a local network, a regional network or a global network. Thus, when a virtual machine at a processing office requests an application, the application can be retrieved from one of the distribution points and the content as defined within the application's AVML file can be retrieved from the same or a different distribution point.
An end user of the system can request an interactive session by sending a command through the client device 110, such as a set-top box, to a processing office 105. In Fig. 1, only a single processing office is shown. However, in real-world applications, there may be a plurality of processing offices located in different regions, wherein each of the processing offices is in communication with a video content distribution network as shown in Fig. IB. The processing office 105 assigns a processor for the end user for an interactive session. The processor maintains the session including all addressing and resource allocation. As used in the specification and the appended claims the term "virtual machine" 106 shall refer to the assigned processor, as well as, other processors at the processing office that perform functions, such as session management between the processing office and the client device as well as resource allocation (i.e. assignment of a processor for an interactive session).
The virtual machine 106 communicates its address to the client device 110 and an interactive session is established. The user can then request presentation of an interactive application (AVML) through the client device 110. The request is received by the virtual machine 106 and in response, the virtual machine 106 causes the AVML file to be retrieved from the proxy/cache 140 and installed into a memory cache 107 that is accessible by the virtual machine 106. It should be recognized that the virtual machine 106 may be in simultaneous communication with a plurality of client devices 110 and the client devices may be different device types. For example, a first device may be a cellular telephone, a second device may be a set-top box, and a third device may be a personal digital assistant wherein each device access the same or a different application.
In response to a request for an application, the virtual machine 106 processes the application and requests elements and MPEG objects that are part of the scene to be moved from the proxy/cache into memory 107 associated with the virtual machine 106. An MPEG object includes both a visual component and an actionable component. The visual component may be encoded as one or more MPEG slices or provided in another graphical format. The actionable component may be storing the state of the object, may include performing computations, accessing an associated program, or displaying overlay graphics to identify the graphical component as active. An overlay graphic may be produced by a signal being transmitted to a client device wherein the client device creates a graphic in the overlay plane on the display device. It should be recognized that a scene is not a static graphic, but rather includes a plurality of video frames wherein the content of the frames can change over time.
The virtual machine 106 determines based upon the scene information, including the application state, the size and location of the various elements and objects for a scene. Each graphical element may be formed from contiguous or non-contiguous MPEG slices. The virtual machine keeps track of the location of all of the slices for each graphical element. All of the slices that define a graphical element form a region. The virtual machine 106 keeps track of each region. Based on the display position information within the AVML file, the slice positions for the elements and background within a video frame are set. If the graphical elements are not already in a groomed format, the virtual machine passes that element to an element renderer. The renderer renders the graphical element as a bitmap and the renderer passes the bitmap to an MPEG element encoder 109. The MPEG element encoder encodes the bitmap as an MPEG video sequence. The MPEG encoder processes the bitmap so that it outputs a series of P-frames. An example of content that is not already pre-encoded and pre- groomed is personalized content. For example, if a user has stored music files at the processing office and the graphic element to be presented is a listing of the user's music files, this graphic would be created in real-time as a bitmap by the virtual machine. The virtual machine would pass the bitmap to the element renderer 108 which would render the bitmap and pass the bitmap to the MPEG element encoder 109 for grooming.
After the graphical elements are groomed by the MPEG element encoder, the MPEG element encoder 109 passes the graphical elements to memory 107 for later retrieval by the virtual machine 106 for other interactive sessions by other users. The MPEG encoder 109 also passes the MPEG encoded graphical elements to the stitcher 115. The rendering of an element and MPEG encoding of an element may be accomplished in the same or a separate processor from the virtual machine 106. The virtual machine 106 also determines if there are any scripts within the application that need to be interpreted. If there are scripts, the scripts are interpreted by the virtual machine 106.
Each scene in an application can include a plurality of elements including static graphics, object graphics that change based upon user interaction, and video content. For example, a scene may include a background (static graphic), along with a media player for playback of audio video and multimedia content (object graphic) having a plurality of buttons, and a video content window (video content) for displaying the streaming video content. Each button of the media player may itself be a separate object graphic that includes its own associated methods.
The virtual machine 106 acquires each of the graphical elements (background, media player graphic, and video frame) for a frame and determines the location of each element. Once all of the objects and elements (background, video content) are acquired, the elements and graphical objects are passed to the stitcher/compositor 115 along with positioning information for the elements and MPEG objects. The stitcher 115 stitches together each of the elements (video content, buttons, graphics, background) according to the mapping provided by the virtual machine 106. Each of the elements is placed on a macroblock boundary and when stitched together the elements form an MPEG video frame. On a periodic basis all of the elements of a scene frame are encoded to form a reference P-frame in order to refresh the sequence and avoid dropped macroblocks. The MPEG video stream is then transmitted to the address of client device through the down stream network. The process continues for each of the video frames. Although the specification refers to MPEG as the encoding process, other encoding processes may also be used with this system.
The virtual machine 106 or other processor or process at the processing office 105 maintains information about each of the elements and the location of the elements on the screen. The virtual machine 106 also has access to the methods for the objects associated with each of the elements. For example, a media player may have a media player object that includes a plurality of routines. The routines can include, play, stop, fast forward, rewind, and pause. Each of the routines includes code and upon a user sending a request to the processing office 105 for activation of one of the routines, the object is accessed and the routine is run. The routine may be a JAVA-based applet, a script to be interpreted, or a separate computer program capable of being run within the operating system associated with the virtual machine.
The processing office 105 may also create a linked data structure for determining the routine to execute or interpret based upon a signal received by the processor from the client device associated with the television. The linked data structure may be formed by an included mapping module. The data structure associates each resource and associated object relative to every other resource and object. For example, if a user has already engaged the play control, a media player object is activated and the video content is displayed. As the video content is playing in a media player window, the user can depress a directional key on the user's remote control. In this example, the depression of the directional key is indicative of pressing a stop button. The transceiver produces a directional signal and the assigned processor receives the directional signal. The virtual machine 106 or other processor at the processing office 105 accesses the linked data structure and locates the element in the direction of the directional key press. The database indicates that the element is a stop button that is part of a media player object and the processor implements the routine for stopping the video content. The routine will cause the requested content to stop. The last video content frame will be frozen and a depressed stop button graphic will be interwoven by the stitcher module into the frame. The routine may also include a focus graphic to provide focus around the stop button. For example, the virtual machine can cause the stitcher to enclose the graphic having focus with a boarder that is 1 macroblock wide. Thus, when the video frame is decoded and displayed, the user will be able to identify the graphic/object that the user can interact with. The frame will then be passed to a multiplexor and sent through the downstream network to the client device. The MPEG encoded video frame is decoded by the client device displayed on either the client device (cell phone, PDA) or on a separate display device (monitor, television). This process occurs in near real-time with a minimal delay. Thus, each scene from an application results in a plurality of video frames each representing a snapshot of the media player application state.
The virtual machine 106 will repeatedly receive commands from the client device and in response to the commands will either directly or indirectly access the objects and execute or interpret the routines of the objects in response to user interaction and application interaction model. In such a system, the video content material displayed on the television of the user is merely decoded MPEG content and all of the processing for the interactivity occurs at the processing office and is orchestrated by the assigned virtual machine. Thus, the client device only needs a decoder and need not cache or process any of the content.
It should be recognized that through user requests from a client device, the processing office could replace a video element with another video element. For example, a user may select from a list of movies to display and therefore a first video content element would be replaced by a second video content element if the user selects to switch between two movies. The virtual machine, which maintains a listing of the location of each element and region forming an element can easily replace elements within a scene creating a new MPEG video frame wherein the frame is stitched together including the new element in the stitcher 115.
Fig. IA shows the interoperation between the digital content distribution network 10OA, the content providers HOA and the processing offices 120A. In this example, the content providers 130A distribute content into the video content distribution network 10OA. Either the content providers 130A or processors associated with the video content distribution network convert the content to an MPEG format that is compatible with the processing office's 120A creation of interactive MPEG content. A content management server 140A of the digital content distribution network 100 A distributes the MPEG-encoded content among proxy/caches 150A- 154 A located in different regions if the content is of a global/national scope. If the content is of a regional/local scope, the content will reside in a regional/local proxy/cache. The content may be mirrored throughout the country or world at different locations in order to increase access times. When an end user, through their client device 160A, requests an application from a regional processing office, the regional processing office will access the requested application. The requested application may be located within the video content distribution network or the application may reside locally to the regional processing office or within the network of interconnected processing offices. Once the application is retrieved, the virtual machine assigned at the regional processing office will determine the video content that needs to be retrieved. The content management server 140 A assists the virtual machine in locating the content within the video content distribution network. The content management server 140A can determine if the content is located on a regional or local proxy/cache and also locate the nearest proxy/cache. For example, the application may include advertising and the content management server will direct the virtual machine to retrieve the advertising from a local proxy/cache. As shown in Fig IA., both the Midwestern and Southeastern regional processing offices 120A also have local proxy/caches 153 A, 154A. These proxy/caches may contain local news and local advertising. Thus, the scenes presented to an end user in the Southeast may appear different to an end user in the Midwest. Each end user may be presented with different local news stories or different advertising. Once the content and the application are retrieved, the virtual machine processes the content and creates an MPEG video stream. The MPEG video stream is then directed to the requesting client device. The end user may then interact with the content requesting an updated scene with new content and the virtual machine at the processing office will update the scene by requesting the new video content from the proxy/cache of the video content distribution network.
AUTHORING ENVIRONMENT
The authoring environment includes a graphical editor as shown in Fig. 1C for developing interactive applications. An application includes one or more scenes. As shown in Fig. IB the application window shows that the application is composed of three scenes (scene 1, scene 2 and scene 3). The graphical editor allows a developer to select elements to be placed into the scene forming a display that will eventually be shown on a display device associated with the user. In some embodiments, the elements are dragged-and-dropped into the application window. For example, a developer may want to include a media player object and media player button objects and will select these elements from a toolbar and drag and drop the elements in the window. Once a graphical element is in the window, the developer can select the element and a property window for the element is provided. The property window includes at least the location of the graphical element (address), and the size of the graphical element. If the graphical element is associated with an object, the property window will include a tab that allows the developer to switch to a bitmap event screen and alter the associated object parameters. For example, a user may change the functionality associated with a button or may define a program associated with the button.
As shown in Fig. ID, the stitcher of the system creates a series of MPEG frames for the scene based upon the AVML file that is the output of the authoring environment. Each element/graphical object within a scene is composed of different slices defining a region. A region defining an element/object may be contiguous or non-contiguous. The system snaps the slices forming the graphics on a macro-block boundary. Each element need not have contiguous slices. For example, the background has a number of non-contiguous slices each composed of a plurality of macroblocks. The background, if it is static, can be defined by intracoded macroblocks. Similarly, graphics for each of the buttons can be intracoded; however the buttons are associated with a state and have multiple possible graphics. For example, the button may have a first state "off and a second state "on" wherein the first graphic shows an image of a button in a non-depressed state and the second graphic shows the button in a depressed state. Fig. 1C also shows a third graphical element, which is the window for the movie. The movie slices are encoded with a mix of intracoded and intercoded macroblocks and dynamically changes based upon the content. Similarly if the background is dynamic, the background can be encoded with both intracoded and intercoded macroblocks, subject to the requirements below regarding grooming.
When a user selects an application through a client device, the processing office will stitch together the elements in accordance with the layout from the graphical editor of the authoring environment. The output of the authoring environment includes an Active Video Mark-up Language file (AVML) The AVML file provides state information about multi-state elements such as a button, the address of the associated graphic, and the size of the graphic. The AVML file indicates the locations within the MPEG frame for each element, indicates the objects that are associated with each element, and includes the scripts that define changes to the MPEG frame based upon user's actions. For example, a user may send an instruction signal to the processing office and the processing office will use the AVML file to construct a set of new MPEG frames based upon the received instruction signal. A user may want to switch between various video elements and may send an instruction signal to the processing office. The processing office will remove a video element within the layout for a frame and will select the second video element causing the second video element to be stitched into the MPEG frame at the location of the first video element. This process is described below.
AVML FILE
The application programming environment outputs an AVML file. The AVML file has an XML-based syntax. The AVML file syntax includes a root object <AVML>. Other top level tags include <initialscene> that specifies the first scene to be loaded when an application starts. The <script> tag identifies a script and a <scene> tag identifies a scene. There may also be lower level tags to each of the top level tags, so that there is a hierarchy for applying the data within the tag. For example, a top level stream tag may include <aspect ratio> for the video stream, <video format>, <bit rate>, <audio format> and <audio bit rate>. Similarly, a scene tag may include each of the elements within the scene. For example, <background> for the background, <button> for a button object, and <static image> for a still graphic. Other tags include <size> and <pos> for the size and position of an element and may be lower level tags for each element within a scene. An example of an AVML file is provided in Fig. IB. Further discussion of the AVML file syntax is provided in Appendix A attached hereto.
GROOMER
Fig. 2 is a diagram of a representative display that could be provided to a television of a requesting client device. The display 200 shows three separate video content elements appearing on the screen. Element #1 211 is the background in which element #2 215 and element #3 217 are inserted.
Fig. 3 shows a first embodiment of a system that can generate the display of Fig. 2. In this diagram, the three video content elements come in as encoded video: element #1 303, element #2 305, and element #3 307. The groomers 310 each receive an encoded video content element and the groomers process each element before the stitcher 340 combines the groomed video content elements into a single composited video 380. It should be understood by one of ordinary skill in the art that groomers 310 may be a single processor or multiple processors that operate in parallel. The groomers may be located either within the processing office, at content providers' facilities, or linear broadcast provider's facilities. The groomers may not be directly connected to the stitcher, as shown in Fig. 1 wherein the groomers 190 and 180 are not directly coupled to stitcher 115.
The process of stitching is described below and can be performed in a much more efficient manner if the elements have been groomed first.
Grooming removes some of the interdependencies present in compressed video. The groomer will convert I and B frames to P frames and will fix any stray motion vectors that reference a section of another frame of video that has been cropped or removed. Thus, a groomed video stream can be used in combination with other groomed video streams and encoded still images to form a composite MPEG video stream. Each groomed video stream includes a plurality of frames and the frames can be can be easily inserted into another groomed frame wherein the composite frames are grouped together to form an MPEG video stream. It should be noted that the groomed frames may be formed from one or more MPEG slices and may be smaller in size than an MPEG video frame in the MPEG video stream.
Fig. 4 is an example of a composite video frame that contains a plurality of elements 410, 420. This composite video frame is provided for illustrative purposes. The groomers as shown in Fig. 1 only receive a single element and groom the element (video sequence), so that the video sequence can be stitched together in the stitcher. The groomers do not receive a plurality of elements simultaneously. In this example, the background video frame 410 includes 1 row per slice (this is an example only; the row could be composed of any number of slices). As shown in Fig. 1, the layout of the video frame including the location of all of the elements within the scene are defined by the application programmer in the AVML file. For example, the application programmer may design the background element for a scene. Thus, the application programmer may have the background encoded as MPEG video and may groom the background prior to having the background placed into the proxy cache 140. Therefore, when an application is requested, each of the elements within the scene of the application may be groomed video and the groomed video can easily be stitched together. It should be noted that although two groomers are shown within Fig. 1 for the content provider and for the linear broadcasters, groomers may be present in other parts of the system.
As shown, video element 420 is inserted within the background video frame 410 (also for example only; this element could also consist of multiple slices per row). If a macroblock within the original video frame 410 references another macroblock in determining its value and the reference macroblock is removed from the frame because the video image 420 is inserted in its place, the macroblocks value needs to be recalculated. Similarly, if a macroblock references another macroblock in a subsequent frame and that macroblock is removed and other source material is inserted in its place, the macroblock values need to be recalculated. This is addressed by grooming the video 430. The video frame is processed so that the rows contain multiple slices some of which are specifically sized and located to match the substitute video content. After this process is complete, it is a simple task to replace some of the current slices with the overlay video resulting in a groomed video with overlay 440. The groomed video stream has been specifically defined to address that particular overlay. A different overlay would dictate different grooming parameters. Thus, this type of grooming addresses the process of segmenting a video frame into slices in preparation for stitching. It should be noted that there is never a need to add slices to the overlay element. Slices are only added to the receiving element, that is, the element into which the overlay will be placed. The groomed video stream can contain information about the stream's groomed characteristics. Characteristics that can be provided include: 1. the locations for the upper left and lower right corners of the groomed window. 2. The location of upper left corner only and then the size of the window. The size of the slice accurate to the pixel level.
There are also two ways to provide the characteristic information in the video stream. The first is to provide that information in the slice header. The second is to provide the information in the extended data slice structure. Either of these options can be used to successfully pass the necessary information to future processing stages, such as the virtual machine and stitcher.
Fig. 5 shows the video sequence for a video graphical element before and after grooming. The original incoming encoded stream 500 has a sequence of MPEG I-frames 510, B-frames 530 550, and P-frames 570 as are known to those of ordinary skill in the art. In this original stream, the I-frame is used as a reference 512 for all the other frames, both B and P. This is shown via the arrows from the I-frame to all the other frames. Also, the P- frame is used as a reference frame 572 for both B-frames. The groomer processes the stream and replaces all the frames with P-frames. First the original I-frame 510 is converted to an intracoded P-frame 520. Next the B-frames 530, 550 are converted 535 to P-frames 540 and 560 and modified to reference only the frame immediately prior. Also, the P-frames 570 are modified to move their reference 574 from the original I-frame 510 to the newly created P- frame 560 immediately in preceding themselves. The resulting P-frame 580 is shown in the output stream of groomed encoded frames 590.
Fig. 6 is a diagram of a standard MPEG-2 bitstream syntax. MPEG-2 is used as an example and the invention should not be viewed as limited to this example. The hierarchical structure of the bitstream starts at the sequence level. This contains the sequence header 600 followed by group of picture (GOP) data 605. The GOP data contains the GOP header 620 followed by picture data 625. The picture data 625 contains the picture header 640 followed by the slice data 645. The slice data 645 consists of some slice overhead 660 followed by macroblock data 665. Finally, the macroblock data 665 consists of some macroblock overhead 680 followed by block data 685 (the block data is broken down further but that is not required for purposes of this reference). Sequence headers act as normal in the groomer. However, there are no GOP headers output of the groomer since all frames are P-frames. The remainder of the headers may be modified to meet the output parameters required. Fig. 7 provides a flow for grooming the video sequence. First the frame type is determining 700: 1-frame 703 B-frame 705, or P-frame 707. I-frames 703 as do B-frames 705 need to be converted to P-frames. In addition, 1-frames need to match the picture information that the stitcher requires. For example, this information may indicate the encoding parameters set in the picture header. Therefore, the first step is to modify the picture header information 730 so that the information in the picture header is consistent for all groomed video sequences. The stitcher settings are system level settings that may be included in the application. These are the parameters that will be used for all levels of the bit stream. The items that require modification are provided in the table below:
Figure imgf000040_0001
Next, the slice overhead information 740 must be modified. The parameters to modify are given in the table below.
Table 2: Slice Overhead Information
U Name Value
Will change if there is a "scale type" change in the
A Quantizer Scale Code picture header.
Next, the macroblock overhead 750 information may require modification. The values to be modified are given in the table below.
Table 3: Macroblock Information
Figure imgf000040_0002
Finally, the block information 760 may require modification. The items to modify are given in the table below.
Figure imgf000041_0001
Once the block changes are complete, the process can start over with the next frame of video.
If the frame type is a B-frame 705, the same steps required for an I-frame are also required for the B-frame. However, in addition, the motion vectors 770 need to be modified. There are two scenarios: B-frame immediately following an I-frame or P-frame, or a B-frame following another B-frame. Should the B-frame follow either an I or P frame, the motion vector, using the I or P frame as a reference, can remain the same and only the residual would need to change. This may be as simple as converting the forward looking motion vector to be the residual.
For the B-frames that follow another B-frame, the motion vector and its residual will both need to be modified. The second B-frame must now reference the newly converted B to P frame immediately preceding it. First, the B-frame and its reference are decoded and the motion vector and the residual are recalculated. It must be noted that while the frame is decoded to update the motion vectors, there is no need to re-encode the DCT coefficients. These remain the same. Only the motion vector and residual are calculated and modified.
The last frame type is the P-frame. This frame type also follows the same path as an I-frame Fig. 8 diagrams the motion vector modification for macroblocks adjacent to a region boundary. It should be recognized that motion vectors on a region boundary are most relevant to background elements into which other video elements are being inserted. Therefore, grooming of the background elements may be accomplished by the application creator. Similarly, if a video element is cropped and is being inserted into a "hole" in the background element, the cropped element may include motion vectors that point to locations outside of the "hole". Grooming motion vectors for a cropped image may be done by the content creator if the content creator knows the size that the video element needs to be cropped, or the grooming may be accomplished by the virtual machine in combination with the element Tenderer and MPEG encoder if the video element to be inserted is larger than the size of the "hole" in the background.
Fig. 8 graphically shows the problems that occur with motion vectors that surround a region that is being removed from a background element. In the example of Fig.8, the scene includes two regions: #1 800 and #2 820. There are two examples of improper motion vector references. In the first instance, region #2 820 that is inserting into region #1 800 (background), uses region #1 800 (background) as a reference for motion 840. Thus, the motion vectors in region #2 need to be corrected. The second instance of improper motion vector references occurs where region #1 800 uses region #2 820 as a reference for motion 860. The groomer removes these improper motion vector references by either re-encoding them using a frame within the same region or converting the macroblocks to be intracoded blocks.
In addition to updating motion vectors and changing frame types, the groomer may also convert field based encoded macroblocks to frame based encoded macroblocks. Fig. 9 shows the conversion of a field based encoded macroblocks to frame based. For reference, a frame based set of blocks 900 is compressed. The compressed block set 910 contains the same information in the same blocks but now it is contained in compressed form. On the other hand, a field based macroblock 940 is also compressed. When this is done, all the even rows (0, 2, 4, 6) are placed in the upper blocks (0 & 1) while the odd rows (1, 3, 5, 7) are placed in the lower blocks (2&3). When the compressed field based macroblock 950 is converted to a frame based macroblock 970, the coefficients need to be moved from one block to another 980. That is, the rows must be reconstructed in numerical order rather than in even odd. Rows 1 & 3, which in the field based encoding were in blocks 2 & 3, are now moved back up to blocks 0 or 1 respectively. Correspondingly, rows 4 & 6 are moved from blocks 0 & 1 and placed down in blocks 2 & 3.
Fig. 10 shows a second embodiment of the grooming platform. All the components are the same as the first embodiment: groomers 111OA and stitcher 1130A. The inputs are also the same: input #1 1103A, input #2 1105A, and input #3 1107A as well as the composited output 1280. The difference in this system is that the stitcher 1140A provides feedback, both synchronization and frame type information, to each of the groomers 11 1OA. With the synchronization and frame type information, the stitcher 1240 can define a GOP structure that the groomers 111OA follow. With this feedback and the GOP structure, the output of the groomer is no longer P-frames only but can also include I-frames and B-frames. The limitation to an embodiment without feedback is that no groomer would know what type of frame the stitcher was building. In this second embodiment with the feedback from the stitcher 1140A, the groomers 111OA will know what picture type the stitcher is building and so the groomers will provide a matching frame type. This improves the picture quality assuming the same data rate and may decrease the data rate assuming that the quality level is kept constant due to more reference frames and less modification of existing frames while, at the same time, reducing the bit rate since B-frames are allowed.
STITCHER
Fig. 11 shows an environment for implementing a stitcher module, such as the stitcher shown in Fig. 1. The stitcher 1200 receives video elements from different sources. Uncompressed content 1210 is encoded in an encoder 1215, such as the MPEG element encoder shown in Fig. 1 prior to its arrival at the stitcher 1200. Compressed or encoded video 1220 does not need to be encoded. There is, however, the need to separate the audio 1217 1227 from the video 1219 1229 in both cases. The audio is fed into an audio selector 1230 to be included in the stream. The video is fed into a frame synchronization block 1240 before it is put into a buffer 1250. The frame constructor 1270 pulls data from the buffers 1250 based on input from the controller 1275. The video out of the frame constructor 1270 is fed into a multiplexer 1280 along with the audio after the audio has been delayed 1260 to align with the video. The multiplexer 1280 combines the audio and video streams and outputs the composited, encoded output streams 1290 that can be played on any standard decoder. Multiplexing a data stream into a program or transport stream is well known to those familiar in the art. The encoded video sources can be real-time, from a stored location, or a combination of both. There is no requirement that all of the sources arrive in real-time.
Fig. 12 shows an example of three video content elements that are temporally out of sync. In order to synchronize the three elements, element #1 1300 is used as an "anchor" or "reference" frame. That is, it is used as the master frame and all other frames will be aligned to it (this is for example only; the system could have its own master frame reference separate from any of the incoming video sources). The output frame timing 1370 1380 is set to match the frame timing of element #1 1300. Elements #2 & 3 1320 and 1340 do not align with element #1 1300. Therefore, their frame start is located and they are stored in a buffer. For example, element #2 1320 will be delayed one frame so an entire frame is available before it is composited along with the reference frame. Element #3 is much slower than the reference frame. Element #3 is collected over two frames and presented over two frames. That is, each frame of element #3 1340 is displayed for two consecutive frames in order to match the frame rate of the reference frame. Conversely if a frame, not shown, was running at twice the rate of the reference frame, then every other frame would be dropped (not shown). More than likely all elements are running at almost the same speed so only infrequently would a frame need to be repeated or dropped in order to maintain synchronization.
Fig. 13 shows an example composited video frame 1400. In this example, the frame is made up of 40 macroblocks per row 1410 with 30 rows per picture 1420. The size is used as an example and it not intended to restrict the scope of the invention. The frame includes a background 1430 that has elements 1440 composited in various locations. These elements 1440 can be video elements, static elements, etc. That is, the frame is constructed of a full background, which then has particular areas replaced with different elements. This particular example shows four elements composited on a background.
Fig. 14 shows a more detailed version of the screen illustrating the slices within the picture. The diagram depicts a picture consisting of 40 macroblocks per row and 30 rows per picture (non-restrictive, for illustration purposes only). However, it also shows the picture divided up into slices. The size of the slice can be a full row 1590 (shown as shaded) or a few macroblocks within a row 1580 (shown as rectangle with diagonal lines inside element #4 1528). The background 1530 has been broken into multiple regions with the slice size matching the width of each region. This can be better seen by looking at element #1 1522. Element #1 1522 has been defined to be twelve macroblocks wide. The slice size for this region for both the background 1530 and element #1 1522 is then defined to be that exact number of macroblocks. Element #1 1522 is then comprised of six slices, each slice containing 12 macroblocks. In a similar fashion, element #2 1524 consists of four slices of eight macroblocks per slice; element #3 1526 is eighteen slices of 23 macroblocks per slice; and element #4 1528 is seventeen slices of five macroblocks per slice. It is evident that the background 1530 and the elements can be defined to be composed of any number of slices which, in turn, can be any number of macroblocks. This gives full flexibility to arrange the picture and the elements in any fashion desired. The process of determining the slice content for each element along with the positioning of the elements within the video frame are determined by the virtual machine of Fig.1 using the AVML file.
Fig. 15 shows the preparation of the background 1600 by the virtual machine in order for stitching to occur in the stitcher. The virtual machine gathers an uncompressed background based upon the AVML file and forwards the background to the element encoder. The virtual machine forwards the locations within the background where elements will be placed in the frame. As shown the background 1620 has been broken into a particular slice configuration by the virtual machine with a hole(s) that exactly aligns with where the element(s) will (are to) be placed prior to passing the background to the element encoder. The encoder compresses the background leaving a "hole" or "holes" where the element(s) will be placed. The encoder passes the compressed background to memory. The virtual machine then access the memory and retrieves each element for a scene and passes the encoded elements to the stitcher along with a list of the locations for each slice for each of the elements. The stitcher takes each of the slices and places the slices into the proper position.
This particular type of encoding is called "slice based encoding". A slice based encoder/virtual machine is one that is aware of the desired slice structure of the output frame and performs its encoding appropriately. That is, the encoder knows the size of the slices and where they belong. It knows where to leave holes if that is required. By being aware of the desired output slice configuration, the virtual machine provides an output that is easily stitched.
Fig. 16 shows the compositing process after the background element has been compressed. The background element 1700 has been compressed into seven slices with a hole where the element 1740 is to be placed. The composite image 1780 shows the result of the combination of the background element 1700 and element 1740. The composite video frame 1780 shows the slices that have been inserted in grey. Although this diagram depicts a single element composited onto a background, it is possible to composite any number of elements that will fit onto a user's display. Furthermore, the number of slices per row for the background or the element can be greater than what is shown. The slice start and slice end points of the background and elements must align.
Fig. 17 is a diagram showing different macroblock sizes between the background element 1800 (24 pixels by 24 pixels) and the added video content element 1840 (16 pixels by 16 pixels). The composited video frame 1880 shows two cases. Horizontally, the pixels align as there are 24 pixels/block x 4 blocks = 96 pixels wide in the background 800 and 16 pixels/block * 6 blocks = 96 pixels wide for the video content element 1840. However, vertically, there is a difference. The background 1800 is 24 pixels/block * 3 blocks = 72 pixels tall. The element 1840 is 16 pixels / block * 4 blocks = 64 pixels tall. This leaves a vertical gap of 8 pixels 1860. The stitcher is aware of such differences and can extrapolate either the element or the background to fill the gap. It is also possible to leave a gap so that there is a dark or light border region. Any combination of macroblock sizes is acceptable even though this example uses macroblock sizes of 24x24 and 16x16. DCT based compression formats may rely on macroblocks of sizes other than 16x16 without deviating from the intended scope of the invention. Similarly, a DCT based compression format may also rely on variable sized macroblocks for temporal prediction without deviating from the intended scope of the invention Finally, frequency domain representations of content may also be achieved using other Fourier related transforms without deviating from the intended scope of the invention.
It is also possible for there to be an overlap in the composited video frame. Referring back to Fig. 17, the element 1840 consisted of four slices. Should this element actually be five slices, it would overlap with the background element 1800 in the composited video frame 1880. There are multiple ways to resolve this conflict with the easiest being to composite only four slices of the element and drop the fifth. It is also possible to composite the fifth slice into the background row, break the conflicting background row into slices and remove the background slice that conflicts with the fifth element slice (then possibly add a sixth element slice to fill any gap).
The possibility of different slice sizes requires the compositing function to perform a check of the incoming background and video elements to confirm they are proper. That is, make sure each one is complete (e.g., a full frame), there are no sizing conflicts, etc.
Fig. 18 is a diagram depicting elements of a frame. A simple composited picture 1900 is composed of an element 1910 and a background element 1920. To control the building of the video frame for the requested scene, the stitcher builds a data structure 1940 based upon the position information for each element as provided by the virtual machine. The data structure 1940 contains a linked list describing how many macroblocks and where the macroblocks are located. For example, the data row 1 1943 shows that the stitcher should take 40 macroblocks from buffer B, which is the buffer for the background. Data row 2 1945 should take 12 macroblocks from buffer B, then 8 macroblocks from buffer E (the buffer for element 1910), and then another 20 macroblocks from buffer B. This continues down to the last row 1947 wherein the stitcher uses the data structure to take 40 macroblocks from buffer B. The buffer structure 1970 has separate areas for each background or element. The B buffer 1973 contains all the information for stitching in B macroblocks. The E buffer 1975 has the information for stitching in E macroblocks.
Fig. 19 is a flow chart depicting the process for building a picture from multiple encoded elements. The sequence 2000 begins by starting the video frame composition 2010. First the frames are synchronized 2015 and then each row 2020 is built up by grabbing the appropriate slice 2030. The slice is then inserted 2040 and the system checks to see if it is the end of the row 2050. If not, the process goes back to "fetch next slice" block 2030 until the end of row 2050 is reached. Once the row is complete, the system checks to see if it is the end of frame 2080. If not, the process goes back to the "for each row" 2020 block. Once the frame is complete, the system checks if it is the end of the sequence 2090 for the scene. If not, it goes back to the "compose frame" 2010 step. If it is, the frame or sequence of video frames for the scene is complete 2090. If not, it repeats the frame building process. If the end of sequence 2090 has been reached, the scene is complete and the process ends or it can start the construction of another frame.
The performance of the stitcher can be improved (build frames faster with less processor power) by providing the stitcher advance information on the frame format. For example, the virtual machine may provide the stitcher with the start location and size of the areas in the frame to be inserted. Alternatively, the information could be the start location for each slice and the stitcher could then figure out the size (the difference between the two start locations). This information could be provided externally by the virtual machine or the virtual machine could incorporate the information into each element. For instance, part of the slice header could be used to carry this information. The stitcher can use this foreknowledge of the frame structure to begin compositing the elements together well before they are required.
Fig. 20 shows a further improvement on the system. As explained above in the groomer section, the graphical video elements can be groomed thereby providing stitchable elements that are already compressed and do not need to be decoded in order to be stitched together. In Fig. 20, a frame has a number of encoded slices 2100. Each slice is a full row (this is used as an example only; the rows could consist of multiple slices prior to grooming). The virtual machine in combination with the AVML file determines that there should be an element 2140 of a particular size placed in a particular location within the composited video frame. The groomer processes the incoming background 2100 and converts the full-row encoded slices to smaller slices that match the areas around and in the desired element 2140 location. The resulting groomed video frame 2180 has a slice configuration that matches the desired element 2140. The stitcher then constructs the stream by selecting all the slices except #3 and #6 from the groomed frame 2180. Instead of those slices, the stitcher grabs the element 2140 slices and uses those in its place. In this manner, the background never leaves the compressed domain and the system is still able to composite the element 2140 into the frame. Fig. 21 shows the flexibility available to define the element to be composited. Elements can be of different shapes and sizes. The elements need not reside contiguously and in fact a single element can be formed from multiple images separated by the background. This figure shows a background element 2230 (areas colored grey) that has had a single element 2210 (areas colored white) composited on it. In this diagram, the composited element 2210 has areas that are shifted, are different sizes, and even where there are multiple parts of the element on a single row. The stitcher can perform this stitching just as if there were multiple elements used to create the display. The slices for the frame are labeled contiguously Sl - S45. These include the slice locations where the element will be placed. The element also has its slice numbering from ESl - ES 14. The element slices can be placed in the background where desired even though they are pulled from a single element file.
The source for the element slices can be any one of a number of options. It can come from a real-time encoded source. It can be a complex slice that is built from separate slices, one having a background and the other having text. It can be a pre-encoded element that is fetched from a cache. These examples are for illustrative purposes only and are not intended to limit the options for element sources.
Fig. 22 shows an embodiment using a groomer 2340 for grooming linear broadcast content. The content is received by the groomer 2340 in real-time. Each channel is groomed by the groomer 2340 so that the content can be easily stitched together. The groomer 2340 of Fig. 22 may include a plurality of groomer modules for grooming all of the linear broadcast channels. The groomed channels may then be multicast to one or more processing offices 2310, 2320, 2330 and one or more virtual machines within each of the processing offices for use in applications. As shown, client devices request an application for receipt of a mosaic 2350 of linear broadcast sources and/or other groomed content that are selected by the client. A mosaic 2350 is a scene that includes a background frame 2360 that allows for viewing of a plurality of sources 2371-2376 simultaneously as shown in Fig. 23. For example, if there are multiple sporting events that a user wishes to watch, the user can request each of the channels carrying the sporting events for simultaneous viewing within the mosaic. The user can even select an MPEG object (edit) 2380 and then edit the desired content sources to be displayed. For example, the groomed content can be selected from linear/live broadcasts and also from other video content (i.e. movies, pre-recorded content etc.). A mosaic may even include both user selected material and material provided by the processing office/session processor, such as, advertisements. As shown in Fig. 22, client devices 2301-2305 each request a mosaic that includes channel 1. Thus, the multicast groomed content for channel 1 is used by different virtual machines and different processing offices in the construction of personalized mosaics.
When a client device sends a request for a mosaic application, the processing office associated with the client device assigns a processor/virtual machine for the client device for the requested mosaic application. The assigned virtual machine constructs the personalized mosaic by compositing the groomed content from the desired channels using a stitcher. The virtual machine sends the client device an MPEG stream that has a mosaic of the channels that the client has requested. Thus, by grooming the content first so that the content can be stitched together, the virtual machines that create the mosaics do not need to first decode the desired channels, render the channels within the background as a bitmap and then encode the bitmap.
An application, such as a mosaic, can be requested either directly through a client device or indirectly through another device, such as a PC, for display of the application on a display associated with the client device. The user could log into a website associated with the processing office by providing information about the user's account. The server associated with the processing office would provide the user with a selection screen for selecting an application. If the user selected a mosaic application, the server would allow the user to select the content that the user wishes to view within the mosaic. In response to the selected content for the mosaic and using the user's account information, the processing office server would direct the request to a session processor and establish an interactive session with the client device of the user. The session processor would then be informed by the processing office server of the desired application. The session processor would retrieve the desired application, the mosaic application in this example, and would obtain the required MPEG objects. The processing office server would then inform the session processor of the requested video content and the session processor would operate in conjunction with the stitcher to construct the mosaic and provide the mosaic as an MPEG video stream to the client device. Thus, the processing office server may include scripts or application for performing the functions of the client device in setting up the interactive session, requesting the application, and selecting content for display. While the mosaic elements may be predetermined by the application, they may also be user configurable resulting in a personalized mosaic.
Fig. 24 is a diagram of an IP based content delivery system. In this system, content may come from a broadcast source 2400, a proxy cache 2415 fed by a content provider 2410, Network Attached Storage (NAS) 2425 containing configuration and management files 2420, or other sources not shown. For example, the NAS may include asset metadata that provides information about the location of content. This content could be available through a load balancing switch 2460. BladeSession processors/virtual machines 2460 can perform different processing functions on the content to prepare it for delivery. Content is requested by the user via a client device such as a set top box 2490. This request is processed by the controller 2430 which then configures the resources and path to provide this content. The client device 2490 receives the content and presents it on the user's display 2495.
Fig. 25 provides a diagram of a cable based content delivery system. Many of the components are the same: a controller 2530, broadcast source 2500, a content provider 2510 providing their content via a proxy cache 2515, configuration and management files 2520 via a file server NAS 2525, session processors 2560, load balancing switch 2550, a client device, such as a set top box 2590, and a display 2595. However, there are also a number of additional pieces of equipment required due to the different physical medium. In this case the added resources include: QAM modulators 2575, a return path receiver 2570, a combiner and diplexer 2580, and a Session and Resource Manager (SRM) 2540. QAM upconverter 2575 are required to transmit data (content) downstream to the user. These modulators convert the data into a form that can be carried across the coax that goes to the user. Correspondingly, the return path receiver 2570 also is used to demodulate the data that comes up the cable from the set top 2590. The combiner and diplexer 2580 is a passive device that combines the downstream QAM channels and splits out the upstream return channel. The SRM is the entity that controls how the QAM modulators are configured and assigned and how the streams are routed to the client device.
These additional resources add cost to the system. As a result, the desire is to minimize the number of additional resources that are required to deliver a level of performance to the user that mimics a non-blocking system such as an IP network. Since there is not a one-to-one correspondence between the cable network resources and the users on the network, the resources must be shared. Shared resources must be managed so they can be assigned when a user requires a resource and then freed when the user is finished utilizing that resource. Proper management of these resources is critical to the operator because without it, the resources could be unavailable when needed most. Should this occur, the user either receives a "please wait" message or, in the worst case, a "service unavailable" message.
Fig. 26 is a diagram showing the steps required to configure a new interactive session based on input from a user. This diagram depicts only those items that must be allocated or managed or used to do the allocation or management. A typical request would follow the steps listed below:
(1) The Set Top 2609 requests content 2610 from the Controller 2607
(2) The Controller 2607 requests QAM bandwidth 2620 from the SRM 2603
(3) The SRM 2603 checks QAM availability 2625
(4) The SRM 2603 allocates the QAM modulator 2630
(5) The QAM modulator returns confirmation 2635
(6) The SRM 2603 confirms QAM allocation success 2640 to the Controller
(7) The Controller 407 allocates the Session processor 2650
(8) The Session processor confirms allocation success 2653
(9) The Controller 2607 allocates the content 2655
(10) The Controller 2607 configures 2660 the Set Top 2609. This includes: a. Frequency to tune b. Programs to acquire or alternatively PIDs to decode c. IP port to connect to the Session processor for keystroke capture
(11) The Set Top 2609 tunes to the channel 2663
(12) The Set Top 2609 confirms success 2665 to the Controller 2607
The Controller 2607 allocates the resources based on a request for service from a set top box 2609. It frees these resources when the set top or server sends an "end of session". While the controller 2607 can react quickly with minimal delay, the SRM 2603 can only allocate a set number of QAM sessions per second i.e. 200. Demand that exceeds this rate results in unacceptable delays for the user. For example, if 500 requests come in at the same time, the last user would have to wait 5 seconds before their request was granted. It is also possible that rather than the request being granted, an error message could be displayed such as "service unavailable".
While the example above describes the request and response sequence for an AVDN session over a cable TV network, the example below describes a similar sequence over an IPTV network. Note that the sequence in itself is not a claim, but rather illustrates how AVDN would work over an IPTV network.
(1) Client device requests content from the Controller via a Session Manager (i.e. controller proxy).
(2) Session Manager forwards request to Controller. (3) Controller responds with the requested content via Session Manager (i.e. client proxy).
(4) Session Manager opens a unicast session and forwards Controller response to client over unicast IP session.
(5) Client device acquires Controller response sent over unicast IP session.
(6) Session manager may simultaneously narrowcast response over multicast IP session to share with other clients on node group that request same content simultaneously as a bandwidth usage optimization technique.
Fig. 27 is a simplified system diagram used to break out each area for performance improvement. This diagram focuses only on the data and equipment that will be managed and removes all other non-managed items. Therefore, the switch, return path, combiner, etc. are removed for the sake of clarity. This diagram will be used to step through each item, working from the end user back to the content origination.
A first issue is the assignment of QAMs 2770 and QAM channels 2775 by the SRM 2720. In particular, the resources must be managed to prevent SRM overload, that is, eliminating the delay the user would see when requests to the SRM 2720 exceed its sessions per second rate.
To prevent SRM "overload", "time based modeling" may be used. For time based modeling, the Controller 2700 monitors the history of past transactions, in particular, high load periods. By using this previous history, the Controller 2700 can predict when a high load period may occur, for example, at the top of an hour. The Controller 2700 uses this knowledge to pre-allocate resources before the period comes. That is, it uses predictive algorithms to determine future resource requirements. As an example, if the Controller 2700 thinks 475 users are going to join at a particular time, it can start allocating those resources 5 seconds early so that when the load hits, the resources have already been allocated and no user sees a delay.
Secondly, the resources could be pre-allocated based on input from an operator. Should the operator know a major event is coming, e.g., a pay per view sporting event, he may want to pre-allocate resources in anticipation. In both cases, the SRM 2720 releases unused QAM 2770 resources when not in use and after the event.
Thirdly, QAMs 2770 can be allocated based on a "rate of change" which is independent of previous history. For example, if the controller 2700 recognizes a sudden spike in traffic, it can then request more QAM bandwidth than needed in order to avoid the QAM allocation step when adding additional sessions. An example of a sudden, unexpected spike might be a button as part of the program that indicates a prize could be won if the user selects this button.
Currently, there is one request to the SRM 2720 for each session to be added. Instead the controller 2700 could request the whole QAM 2770 or a large part of a single QAM' s bandwidth and allow this invention to handle the data within that QAM channel 2775. Since one aspect of this system is the ability to create a channel that is only 1, 2, or 3 Mb/sec, this could reduce the number of requests to the SRM 2720 by replacing up to 27 requests with a single request.
The user will also experience a delay when they request different content even if they are already in an active session. Currently, if a set top 2790 is in an active session and requests a new set of content 2730, the Controller 2700 has to tell the SRM 2720 to deallocate the QAM 2770, then the Controller 2700 must de-allocate the session processor 2750 and the content 2730, and then request another QAM 2770 from the SRM 2720 and then allocate a different session processor 2750 and content 2730. Instead, the controller 2700 can change the video stream 2755 feeding the QAM modulator 2770 thereby leaving the previously established path intact. There are a couple of ways to accomplish the change. First, since the QAM Modulators 2770 are on a network so the controller 2700 can merely change the session processor 2750 driving the QAM 2770. Second, the controller 2700 can leave the session processor 2750 to set top 2790 connection intact but change the content 2730 feeding the session processor 2750, e.g., "CNN Headline News" to "CNN World Now". Both of these methods eliminate the QAM initialization and Set Top tuning delays.
Thus, resources are intelligently managed to minimize the amount of equipment required to provide these interactive services. In particular, the Controller can manipulate the video streams 2755 feeding the QAM 2770. By profiling these streams 2755, the Controller 2700 can maximize the channel usage within a QAM 2770. That is, it can maximize the number of programs in each QAM channel 2775 reducing wasted bandwidth and the required number of QAMs 2770. There are three primary means to profile streams: formulaic, prc- profiling, and live feedback.
The first profiling method, formulaic, consists of adding up the bit rates of the various video streams used to fill a QAM channel 2775. In particular, there may be many video elements that are used to create a single video stream 2755. The maximum bit rate of each element can be added together to obtain an aggregate bit rate for the video stream 2755. By monitoring the bit rates of all video streams 2755, the Controller 2700 can create a combination of video streams 2755 that most efficiently uses a QAM channel 2775. For example, if there were four video streams 2755: two that were 16 Mb/sec and two that were 20 Mb/sec then the controller could best fill a 38.8 Mb/sec QAM channel 2775 by allocating one of each bit rate per channel. This would then require two QAM channels 2775 to deliver the video. However, without the formulaic profiling, the result could end up as 3 QAM channels 2775 as perhaps the two 16 Mb/sec video streams 2755 are combined into a single 38.8 Mb/sec QAM channel 2775 and then each 20 Mb/sec video stream 2755 must have its own 38.8 Mb/sec QAM channel 2775.
A second method is pre-profiling. In this method, a profile for the content 2730 is either received or generated internally. The profile information can be provided in metadata with the stream or in a separate file. The profiling information can be generated from the entire video or from a representative sample. The controller 2700 is then aware of the bit rate at various times in the stream and can use this information to effectively combine video streams 2755 together. For example, if two video streams 2755 both had a peak rate of 20 Mb/sec, they would need to be allocated to different 38.8 Mb/sec QAM channels 2775 if they were allocated bandwidth based on their peaks. However, if the controller knew that the nominal bit rate was 14 Mb/sec and knew their respective profiles so there were no simultaneous peaks, the controller 2700 could then combine the streams 2755 into a single 38.8 Mb/sec QAM channel 2775. The particular QAM bit rate is used for the above examples only and should not be construed as a limitation.
A third method for profiling is via feedback provided by the system. The system can inform the controller 2700 of the current bit rate for all video elements used to build streams and the aggregate bit rate of the stream after it has been built. Furthermore, it can inform the controller 2700 of bit rates of stored elements prior to their use. Using this information, the controller 2700 can combine video streams 2755 in the most efficient manner to fill a QAM channel 2775.
It should be noted that it is also acceptable to use any or all of the three profiling methods in combination. That is, there is no restriction that they must be used independently.
The system can also address the usage of the resources themselves. For example, if a session processor 2750 can support 100 users and currently there are 350 users that are active, it requires four session processors. However, when the demand goes down to say 80 users, it would make sense to reallocate those resources to a single session processor 2750, thereby conserving the remaining resources of three session processors. This is also useful in failure situations. Should a resource fail, the invention can reassign sessions to other resources that are available. In this way, disruption to the user is minimized. The system can also repurpose functions depending on the expected usage. The session processors 2750 can implement a number of different functions, for example, process video, process audio, etc. Since the controller 2700 has a history of usage, it can adjust the functions on the session processors 2700 to meet expected demand. For example, if in the early afternoons there is typically a high demand for music, the controller 2700 can reassign additional session processors 2750 to process music in anticipation of the demand. Correspondingly, if in the early evening there is a high demand for news, the controller 2700 anticipates the demand and reassigns the session processors 2750 accordingly. The flexibility and anticipation of the system allows it to provide the optimum user experience with the minimum amount of equipment. That is, no equipment is idle because it only has a single purpose and that purpose is not required.
The present invention may be embodied in many different forms, including, but in no way limited to, computer program logic for use with a processor (e.g., a microprocessor, microcontroller, digital signal processor, or general purpose computer), programmable logic for use with a programmable logic device (e.g., a Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) or other PLD), discrete components, integrated circuitry (e.g., an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC)), or any other means including any combination thereof. In an embodiment of the present invention, predominantly all of the reordering logic may be implemented as a set of computer program instructions that is converted into a computer executable form, stored as such in a computer readable medium, and executed by a microprocessor within the array under the control of an operating system.
Computer program logic implementing all or part of the functionality previously described herein may be embodied in various forms, including, but in no way limited to, a source code form, a computer executable form, and various intermediate forms (e.g., forms generated by an assembler, compiler, networker, or locator.) Source code may include a series of computer program instructions implemented in any of various programming languages (e.g., an object code, an assembly language, or a high-level language such as Fortran, C, C++, JAVA, or HTML) for use with various operating systems or operating environments. The source code may define and use various data structures and communication messages. The source code may be in a computer executable form (e.g., via an interpreter), or the source code may be converted (e.g., via a translator, assembler, or compiler) into a computer executable form.
The computer program may be fixed in any form (e.g., source code form, computer executable form, or an intermediate form) either permanently or transitorily in a tangible storage medium, such as a semiconductor memory device (e.g., a RAM, ROM, PROM, EEPROM, or Flash-Programmable RAM), a magnetic memory device (e.g., a diskette or fixed disk), an optical memory device (e.g., a CD-ROM), a PC card (e.g., PCMCIA card), or other memory device. The computer program may be fixed in any form in a signal that is transmittable to a computer using any of various communication technologies, including, but in no way limited to, analog technologies, digital technologies, optical technologies, wireless technologies, networking technologies, and internetworking technologies. The computer program may be distributed in any form as a removable storage medium with accompanying printed or electronic documentation (e.g., shrink wrapped software or a magnetic tape), preloaded with a computer system (e.g., on system ROM or fixed disk), or distributed from a server or electronic bulletin board over the communication system (e.g., the Internet or World Wide Web.)
Hardware logic (including programmable logic for use with a programmable logic device) implementing all or part of the functionality previously described herein may be designed using traditional manual methods, or may be designed, captured, simulated, or documented electronically using various tools, such as Computer Aided Design (CAD), a hardware description language (e.g., VHDL or AHDL), or a PLD programming language (e.g., PALASM, ABEL, or CUPL.)
While the invention has been particularly shown and described with reference to specific embodiments, it will be understood by those skilled in the art that various changes in form and detail may be made therein without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention as defined by the appended clauses. As will be apparent to those skilled in the art, techniques described above for panoramas may be applied to images that have been captured as non-panoramic images, and vice versa.
Embodiments of the present invention may be described, without limitation, by the following clauses. While these embodiments have been described in the clauses by process steps, an apparatus comprising a computer with associated display capable of executing the process steps in the clauses below is also included in the present invention. Likewise, a computer program product including computer executable instructions for executing the process steps in the clauses below and stored on a computer readable medium is included within the present invention. 1/30
Figure imgf000057_0001
F
Figure imgf000058_0001
Figure imgf000059_0001
4/30
Figure imgf000060_0001
Figure imgf000061_0001
Figure imgf000062_0001
Figure imgf000063_0001
Figure imgf000064_0001
Figure imgf000065_0001
Figure imgf000065_0002
Figure imgf000066_0001
Figure imgf000067_0001
.4
Figure imgf000068_0001
Figure imgf000069_0001
Figure imgf000070_0001
Figure imgf000071_0001
Figure imgf000072_0001
Figure imgf000073_0001
Figure imgf000074_0001
Figure imgf000075_0001
Figure imgf000076_0001
Figure imgf000077_0001
Figure imgf000078_0001
Figure imgf000079_0001
Figure imgf000080_0001
Figure imgf000081_0001
Cha
Figure imgf000083_0001
Figure imgf000084_0001
Figure imgf000085_0001
Figure imgf000086_0001
1 Introduction
This appendix describes MPEG Objects, their configurable attributes, methods and events (including arguments). It also provides examples of how to use MPEG Objects and Script (AVScript) to write programs that in turn control sessions which ultimately provide interactive television subscribers the capability to set-up their own personal viewing experiences by using only their regular TV channel selectors, in conjunction with any Set-top Box (IP or Cable). In addition, other devices that use MPEG and its variants, AVS, VC-I or other block-based decoders, and are capable of two way communication may also benefit from these Objects and the AVScript. For example, wireless devices such as cell phones could receive MPEG content and provide control instructions to a processing office that would maintain the AVScript and the state of the MPEG Objects/ A VObjects wherein the user of the cell phone would control the interactive content.
The AVScript language controls MPEG Objects, or AVObjects. This language is similar to JavaScript (based on the ECMA-262 standard). A programming development environment, is provided and allows for the development of layouts of Graphical User Interface objects and other, non-graphical objects that control sound and external communications or, in other words, for the development of layouts of TV User/Service Subscriber Interfaces or, in still more succinct parlance, for the development of "Scenes" and their controlling AVScripts.
A group of AVObjects may be combined to form a Scene. The code for the objects that comprise a Scene and all of the Scene's controlling AVScript are saved in a single AVML file. AVML files are XML-like files that contain the names of objects and their attributes, plus other resource information that is necessary for a program to run on the Audio Video Distribution Network (AVDN) platform. The AVDN platform provides the control interface between the commands received from interactive television subscribers and the Program that implements their individually specified commands.
Figure 1 shows the hierarchy of all of AVObject Properties. A root Element Area object, containing a top-level Scene, is always created by default. The Scene could in turn contain multiple Element Areas that contain various Scenes which arc themselves comprised of various instances of individually specifiable AVObjects, ultimately make-up a subscriber's selectable viewing experience.
Figure imgf000088_0001
2 Scripting Details
As stated earlier, all AV Objects described in this document are controlled by AVScripts. For each Scene in an AVProgram, an AVML file is created that contains the code that instantiates each specified AVComponent of that Scene and its associated AVScript that controls the use of each object thus created. The AVScript can specify the inclusion of additional script files by using the # include directive followed by a quoted string that specifies the location of the file to be included. For example:
#include "http: //www. ictv. com/AVDN/include/myscript . avs"
Please note that this is an absolute path to the AVScript file myscript.avs, but there are other ways to reference or specify the pathname of any file.
Note: The .avs extension is recommended for AVScript files.
2.1 #include files
If a script interpreter cannot find the file to include or if there is a script compile error, the interpreter stops and returns an error message without processing any additional script.
An AVScript file that is included through the use of a # include directive may itself contain additional # include directives. The script interpreter currently limits the recursive depth of # include directives to 50 levels. If the depth limit is exceeded, the interpreter stops processing script and reports an error. This limit is arbitrary and may be set to any level or disabled.
It is possible that multiple script files might # include the same file; the script should work normally without causing a compile error. However, if a function name or a variable name is defined in global space by more than one include file, the last definition compiled is the one that the script uses and, again, there is no compile error.
If a # include directive is incorrectly formatted and either one or both quotes around the path/filename are missing, the interpreter tries to find the file based on the entire string and that could be the entire content of the file if the file does not happen to contain any quotes. The # include directive must be in the following form:
#include "[path] f ilename . avs"
Note: Do not place a semicolon (;) at the end of any line that contains a # include directive.
A file can list multiple files to be included; however, each # include directive must appear on a separate line.
The [path] component of the form of the # include directive is optional and a developer can specify no path, a relative path or an absolute path to an HTTP site for a file to be included.
The file that contains the # include directive is considered to be the "parent" file. If a path is not specified, then the file to be included must be in the same directory as the file that contains the # include directive.
A relative path is based on the location of a parent file. A Program's AVML file is the top-most parent file and its location/path is the URL of the AVML file. Include files stored locally (i.e., on the computer hosting an AVProgram) must be referred to by a relative path that specifies the directory below the directory where the AVML file of the AVProgram is located.
To specify a relative path for an AVScript file use a single dot (.) to specify the current directory, two dots (..) to specify a parent directory and forward slashes / to specify subdirectories. It is possible to go up multiple levels by using a series of "../" commands. For example "../" refers up one directory level, while "../../" refers up two levels, etc.
# Include Examples:
// Note: Not one of the following # include directives ends with a semicolon (;).
// Here, the file f unc_script . avs must reside in the same directory as the file that
// contains the # include directive: ttinclude "f unc_script . avs" // In the following example, the current directory must contain a subdirectory called // subdir and that subdirectory must contain the file proc . avs :
#include "subdir/proc . avs"
// Notice that in the previous example we could just as well have used: #include " . / subdir/proc . avs"
// In the following example we refer to one directory level up to the parent of the script
// file that contains the # include directive:
#include " . . /lvls . avs"
// In the following we refer up one directory level to the parent of the script file that // contains the #include directive, then down to directory level b:
#include " . . /level_b/newScript . avs"
Accessing script files using http://
AVScript files can also be accessed using the http web protocol. To specify an absolute path for an AVScript file by this method, use the URL for the file, preceded by "http : //". For example:
#include "http : //www . aaa . com/myf iles/script . avs"
Note: Use forward slashes (/), not back slashes (\).
2.2 URLs
The images of many objects are specified by their URLs which point to the location of information about them on the Internet. Images and media that can be played might be located on a server and the URL path for information about them begins with "http://."
Image and media information is stored as part of the Audio Video Distribution Network (AVDN) Program. Their URLs are considered to be "local content" and are packaged with the AVML file as part of the AVDN Program. These files are installed on the computer that hosts the AVDN Program when it runs. The URL path for local content must point to a subdirectory of the directory that contains the AVML file. For example: if a developer is working in directory
Ci/MyName/NewContent/CellPhone/ and if his AVML file is also located there, then local resources must be in directories below the CellPhone directory; e.g., in C:/MyName/NewContent/CellPhone/Images/ or in
C:/MyName/NewContent/CellPhone/Bitmaps/. When referring to local content in script, the path relative to the directory of the AVML file must be provided.
For example, to replace a Static image bitmap with an image found at C:/MyName/NewContent/CellPhone/Bitmaps/StaticImage/newsHeadline.bmp, the relative path would be: /Bitmaps/StaticImage/newsHeadline.bmp.this.loadImage("/Bit maps/StaticImage/newsHeadline.bmp").
Note: Use forward slashes (/), not back slashes (\) for all URL notations.
2.3 Focus, Chaser and Navigation Flow Focus
When an object has focus, the object gets notified about events (programmatic, keyboard or mouse events) or is affected by them. Only one object on a Scene can have focus at any given time.
Chaser
A "chaser" is a graphical method of showing that an object has focus. A chaser typically appears as a special colored polygon (usually a rectangle or a square) that surrounds an object to indicate that that object has focus. Another approach is to have the object appear in a different color when it has focus.
A chaser can be made to appear by the use of either of these two different methods:
Method 1 - An object that can receive focus is an object that can appear as a Clicked or a Focused image that shows the chaser around it or that changes to a different color. Buttons often use this method.
Method 2 - A media player, a Static Image or an Input Box could have a chaser attribute similar to a picture frame. The chaser appears on the outside of the object but the object is visible within the chaser. The same image for a chaser attribute can appear only around objects that are the same size. To put chasers around objects that are of different sizes, multiple chaser images are required.
Chaser navigation
A subscriber can use the arrow keys of a remote control unit to move input focus from object to object. Each object that can receive focus has specified for each direction (up, down, left or right) either some other Scene object or a chaser keyword. If some other Scene object is specified, then that object receives focus when the arrow key of the remote control for that direction is activated.
There are two chaser keywords, "None" and "Exit." When the chaser keyword "None" is specified for an arrow direction, focus remains on the current object when that arrow key is activated. The "Exit" keyword applies only when an object is in an ElementArea within another Scene and it causes keyboard focus to move to the external Scene.
Focus Flow Diagram
With an introduction of the Element Area in AVML, it is possible to create a hierarchy of nested Scenes with a default or run-time defined focus flow. Thus, the Element Area of each Scene could be defined as focusable (with or without other Chaser attributes defined) and each nested Scene might contain focusable Scene elements.
Default navigation logic allows focus to be passed transparently in the general case of nested navigation. If required, the programmer can override default behavior using focus-related attributes and methods.
Focus Flow and Use Cases
The diagrams on the next couple of pages illustrate the comprehensive flowchart of focus flow (Figure 2) and a couple of typical focus flows (Figures 3 and 4).
Figure imgf000094_0001
Figure imgf000095_0001
Figure imgf000096_0001
2.4 Audio / Sound
Four audio priority levels are maintained which, from highest to lowest, are named: "transient," "high," "medium" and "background." Any asset associated with a higher priority plays regardless of any audio asset set at lower priority. Specific audio players are available through the session object to play assets at transient and background audio priorities. MediaPlayer focus traversal uses the medium audio priority. The high priority level is used when audio focus is explicitly set using the MediaPlayer setAudioFocus method. 2.5 Button and ListBox images
Buttons and items within a ListBox are depicted with different images to represent their different states. The term "Clicked," which comes from the act of clicking a computer mouse button when the cursor is over an item, is used when an item is being selected. Figure 5 shows the normal states for a Button or a ListBox, which are:
Focused - an item has keyboard focus but has not yet been Clicked
Clicked - an item has keyboard focus and has been Clicked by the subscriber
Selected - a subscriber has Selected an item but keyboard focus is no longer on it
Default - an item has not been selected and does not have keyboard focus
Disabled - an item is not selected and cannot receive keyboard focus
Figure imgf000097_0001
NOTE: In addition to a transition to the normal state, a Button can be disabled or hidden or a ListBox can be disabled. If a Button is hidden and a script calls the enable() function, the Button appears in its default state. When a Button is hidden, a subscriber cannot see anything on the TV to indicate that there is a button present, even though the Scene background can be seen.
Any time a script disables or hides a Button or disables a ListBox, the object displays the disabled or hidden image, no matter what state was displayed before the command. If focus was on an object when that object was disabled or hidden, it moves to another object on the Scene. See the disable() and the hide() function commands 0 or 0 for information on how the new chaser position is set.
A script cannot set focus on a disabled or hidden object while it is disabled or hidden. If an object is not disabled and the enable command is called, the object remains in its current state. Making changes to the text, text color or background color of a Button or a ListBox does not change its state. If the state of a disabled object is changed, a new image appears for it.
Figure imgf000099_0001
2.6 Keyboard Input
Typically a cable box remote control provides the keyboard input to an AVDN session. The remote control might have buttons on it that are not normally found on a computer keyboard; for example, there might be a "play" or a "rewind" button. A script receives a key value that relates to the remote control button that was pressed. The key values are neither ASCII character values nor Unicode character values, but Table 1 lists their key values and their corresponding keys.
Figure imgf000100_0001
Figure imgf000101_0002
2.7 Events and Event Order
The majority of script commands are written to handle a subscriber event. For example, a subscriber might start to navigate to an AVML file or press a key on the remote. When these external events occur, event handlers like onLoad() or onKeyPress() notify an script. The following subsections describe the events (and specify their order) that assist in creating an script.
onLoadO and onlnitiall)pdate()
A Scene and all Scene elements support an onLoad() event. A Scene also has an onlnitialUpdate() event that occurs only when a Scene loads for the first time in a session. Tables 2 and 3 list and comment on these and other Scene-related event functions.
Figure imgf000101_0001
Figure imgf000102_0001
onUnloadO
When a subscriber leaves a Scene, the onUnload() event occurs. Like the onLoad() event, scene and GUI objects support an onUnload() event. As can be seen from Table 3, first all Scene elements are unloaded, then all Scenes are unloaded and, lastly, the session is ended.
Table-3. Order of Terminating Scene-Related Event Functions
Figure imgf000102_0002
onEndSession()
This event function gets called for each Scene that has been loaded during this session, when the session ends.
onFocusO and onBlur()
The Textlnput, Button, ListBox, MultiMedia and Staticlmage objects support onFocus() and onBlur() events. The onFocus() and onBlur() events occur as input focus moves from object to object. Input focus can be controlled either by script code using the Scene command setFocus() or by subscriber input, using the arrow keys on the remote control. Events occur in an expected order. If focus is moved by the subscriber hitting an arrow key, the onKeyPress() is the first event, then the onBlur() for the object that currently has focus and finally the onFocus() for the object that receives focus. When the setFocus() command is used, the first event is onBlur() then the onFocus().
Note: The default event handler for the onBlur() changes the appearance of an object to unfocused and the onFocus() default handler changes the appearance of an object to focused. If the script overrides a default handler by returning true for an event, then the script must be responsible for changing the appearances of objects.
onKeyPress(), onKeyUp(), onClick() and onSelectltem()
Staticlmage, MultiMedia and Button all support onKeyPress(), onKeyUp() and onClick() events. Textlnput and ListBox support only onKeyPress() and onKeyUp() events. Also the scene has onKeyPress and onKeyUp() events that allow one to override default key handling. The onTopOfList(), onBottomOfList() and onSelectItem() are special events that apply to only the ListBox object. The onTopOfList() and onBottomOfList() allow a developer to control keyboard focus. If focus is on one of the end elements and a keyboard input in the ListBox orientation would move focus off of the ListBox, the onTopOfList() or onBottomOfList() event occurs and, if overridden, it prevents the default handler from moving focus away from the ListBox. onClick() for button and onSelectItem() for ListBox have a default handler that changes the item to show it in the "Clicked" state. Table 4 shows the event order for these functions.
Figure imgf000104_0001
Note: The default handling of "page up" to the "next" Scene only occurs if the subscriber has moved "back" from another Scene. If the subscriber has not moved "back," the default handler cannot select the "next" Scene.
2.8 Subscriber Inactivity Timer
A subscriber inactivity timer (a Global Object property), terminates sessions that a subscriber has abandoned and thereby frees resources for other subscribers to use. Default timeout values are assigned to all AVPrograms, but developers can change the timeout values (up to a maximum amount of time) by using script. There are two timeout values that a developer can change by using script commands: Warning Timeout and Logout Timeout. The Warning Timeout is the amount of time (in seconds) without subscriber input until the session onInactivityTimerExpired() event (see section 10.1) is called for the script (the developer can display a message to subscribers to caution them that their session is about to terminate unless they hit a key). If there is not any subscriber activity for the Logout Time after the onInactivityTimerExpired() event, then the session ends. The script commands are part of the session attributes (see Section 10), which are: session. warningTimeout and session.logoutTimeout. 3 User Interface Objects
3.1 Button
Description
A button appears on the TV and allows a subscriber to interact with the GUI by selecting and clicking on it. A button can have any one of the following five states: Clicked, Focused, Selected, Default or Disabled (see Button and ListBox images).
Button Attributes
None
Button Events void onLoad() Description
This event occurs for an object each time a subscriber views a Scene that contains that object.
Arguments None.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000105_0001
void onUnloadO Description
This event occurs for an object each time a subscriber navigates away from a Scene that contains that object.
Arguments None.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000106_0001
bool onFocus(String previous) Description
An event that indicates this item has received focus. When the button gets focus, "Previous" is the object name of object that had focus. The Default event handler sets the chaser on this object. If this event returns a true, then the default handler does not execute.
Arguments previous The name of the object in the Scene that had focus before focus was put on this button.
Returns true This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates this object handled this event. false This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates another object should handle this event.
Example
Figure imgf000107_0001
bool onBlur(String next) Description
An event that indicates this item no longer has focus. When the button loses focus, "Next" is the name of the object that gets focus next. The default event handler removes the chaser from this object. If this event returns a "true," then the default handler does not execute.
Arguments
Next The name of an object on the Scene that receives focus next.
Returns true This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that this object handled this event. false This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that another object should handle this event.
Example
Figure imgf000109_0001
boolean onKeyPress(int keyCode) Description
If the button is in focus and a key on the keyboard is pressed, this event is fired. The default event handler updates the chaser position (keyboard focus), if needed, and fires the onClick event if the "OKAY" key was pressed If a Boolean true is returned, the default handler does not execute.
Arguments keyCode The keyCode is an integer for the key that was pressed. For additional information on keyCodes, see section 0.
Returns true This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that this object handled this event. false This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that another object should handle this event.
Example
Figure imgf000110_0001
boolean onKeyUp(int keyCode) Description
If this button is in focus and a key on the keyboard is released, this event occurs. Arguments keyCode The key value as an integer for the key that was released. For addition information on key values see section 0 .
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000110_0002
void onClick() Description
This is a special case of the onKeyPress() event. This event occurs when an object has focus and the Enter key on a keyboard or the "OKAY" key on a remote control is pressed. Also if a mouse is supported, then a mouse click can trigger this event. The default handler for the onClick() event is to place the object in the "Clicked" state.
Arguments None.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000111_0001
Button Methods void setText(String text) Description
This sets the specified text on the button.
Arguments text The text that is to appear on the button.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000112_0001
String getText() Description
This makes the specified text that appears on the button.
Arguments None.
Returns The text that is currently displayed on the button.
Example
Figure imgf000112_0002
void enable() Description
Shows a button in its unselected state. If the button has focus, the Focused image appears. If a button does not have focus, the Default image appears The button appears similar to the setNotSelected() command appearance. Use setSelected()/setNotSelected () to control button selection and enable()/disable() to enable or disable a button.
Example
Figure imgf000112_0003
Figure imgf000113_0001
void disable() Description
Shows the button in its Disabled state; the Disabled image appears. This indicates that the button cannot be selected and it cannot receive keyboard focus.
Example
Figure imgf000114_0001
void setSelectedO Description
This shows a button in its Selected state.
Note: Selected and Focused are different states and they can have different appearances. If the button has focus then the Clicked image appears; however, if the button does not have focus, then the Selected image appears.
Example
Figure imgf000114_0002
void setNotSelectedO Description
Shows a button in its unselected state. The button looks similar to the way it looks in response to the enable() command. Use setSelected()/setNotSelected() to control button selection and enable()/disable() to enable or disable it.
Note: Selected and Focused are different states and can have different appearances. If the button has focus the Focused image appears; however, if the button does not have focus, the Default image appears.
Example
Figure imgf000114_0003
void hide() Description In the hidden state, the background image of the Scene appears in place of the button. This indicates that the button cannot be selected, nor can it receive focus. A subscriber cannot see a button in the hidden state. A button may be unhidden using one of the other view button commands like enable(), disable(), setSelected () or setNotSelected(); although typically, enable() would be used.
Example
Figure imgf000116_0002
void setTextColor (String RGBvalue, String buttonState) Description
This sets the color of the text for a specified button state. Arguments
RGBvalue This specifies the RGB color value, which must be a string of three two-digit hexadecimal values. Each hexadecimal value represents an amount of a certain color. The format is RRGGBB where RR is the hexadecimal value for Red, GG is for Green and BB is for blue. The string "FFOOOO" would be completely red and "00FF00" would be green. White is "FFFFFF " and black is -'OOOOOO:'
NOTE: If an invalid string (i.e., any string that does not meet the RRGGBB format) is passed as a parameter, the color is set to black. buttonState This string is the button state that should display the text with that specified color. Possible button states are: Focused, Clicked, Selected, Default and Disabled.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000116_0001
Figure imgf000117_0001
void setBackgroundColor(String RGBvalue, String buttonState ) Description
This sets the background color for a specified button state.
Arguments
RGBvalue This specifies the RGB color value, which must be a string of three two-digit hexadecimal values. Each hexadecimal value represents an amount of that color. The format is RRGGBB where RR is the hexadecimal value for Red, GG is for Green and BB is for blue. The string "FFOOOO" is completely red, while "00FF00" is green. White is "FFFFFF" and black is "000000.."
NOTE: If an invalid string (i.e., any string that does not meet the RRGGBB format) is passed as a parameter, the color is set to black. buttonState A string that is the button state that should display the background with this color. Possible button states are: Focused, Clicked, Selected, Default and Disabled.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000118_0001
String getCurrentState() Description
This gets the name of the current state of the button. Arguments None. Returns The name of the state that the button is currently in; that is:
Disabled, Default, Selected, Focused or Clicked.
Example
Figure imgf000119_0001
String getTextColor(String buttonState) Description
Returns the RGB color value of the button text as a text string. Arguments buttonState A string that is the buttonState displays the background with this color. Possible button states are: Focused, Clicked, Selected, Default and Disabled.
Returns Returns the RGB color value of the button text as a text string.
The format is RRGGBB where RR is the hexadecimal value for Red, GG is for Green and BB is for blue.
NOTE: If an invalid string (i.e., any string that does not meet the RRGGBB format) is passed as a parameter, the color is set to black.
Example
Figure imgf000119_0002
String getBackgroundColor(String buttonState) Description
Returns the RGB color value of the button background for the given button State.
Arguments buttonState A string that is the button state that should display the background with this color. Possible button states are- Focused, Clicked, Selected, Default, Disabled.
Returns Returns the RGB color value of the button background as a text string. The format is RRGGBB where RR is the hexadecimal value for Red, GG is for Green and BB is for blue.
NOTE: If an invalid string (i.e., any string that does not meet the RRGGBB format) is passed as a parameter, the color is set to black.
Example
Figure imgf000120_0001
String toStringO
Arguments None.
Returns Returns the name of the button as a string.
Note: If the button object is used with the + operator to concatenate a string, the name of the button is still returned. Example
Figure imgf000120_0002
3.2 Caption
Description
A caption is a static text region that is encoded onto a background at runtime and can be updated at that time. A caption can also be configured to be a clock. The AV Editor (AVE) lets the developer define the text to be displayed in the Caption area. If the caption text is "Clock:" followed by the escape characters for time or date, then that information is displayed. (See Appendix A.I : Caption Clock Format 11). For example: "Clock:%a %b %d %I:%M %p" displays the abbreviated weekday, abbreviated month, the Day of the month as a decimal, the hour in 12-hour format, the minutes as a decimal and either AM or PM. The clock is updated automatically, so the developer does not need to write any script code for that.
Caption Attributes
Caption Events void onLoadO Description
This event occurs for an object each time the Scene that contains that object is viewed by a subscriber.
Arguments None.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000121_0001
void onUnload() Description
This event occurs for an object each time a subscriber navigates away from a Scene that contains that object.
Arguments None.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000121_0002
Figure imgf000122_0001
Caption Methods void setText(String text) Description
This method changes the text that appears in the caption area. If the Caption has been configured to be a clock, then the setText() command is ignored.
Arguments
Text The text to display in the caption.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000122_0002
String getText() Description
This method returns the text displayed in the caption area. Arguments None.
Returns getText() returns the string value of the text being displayed by the caption.
Example
Figure imgf000122_0003
void setTextColor(String RGBvalue) Description
This method changes the color of the text displayed in the caption area. Arguments RGBvalue This specifies the RGB color value and consists of a string of three two-digit hexadecimal values. Each hexadecimal value represents the amount of a particular color. The format is RRGGBB where RR is the hexadecimal value for Red, GG is for Green and BB is for blue. The string "FFOOOO" is completely red, while "00FF00" is green. White is "FFFFFF" and black is "000000." If the Caption has been configured to be a clock, then the setTextColor() command is ignored.
NOTE: If an invalid string (i.e., any string that does not meet the RRGGBB format) is passed as a parameter, the color is set to black.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000123_0001
void setBackgroundColor(String RGBvalue) Description
This method changes the color of the background displayed in the caption area. Arguments
RGBvalue This specifies the RGB color value and must be a string of three two-digit hexadecimal values. Each hexadecimal value represents the amount of a particular color. The form is RRGGBB where RR is the hexadecimal value for Red, GG is for Green and BB is for blue. The string "FF0000" is completely red and "00FF00" is green. White is "FFFFFF" and black is "000000." If the Caption has been configured to be a clock then, the setBackgroundColor() command is ignored.
NOTE: If an invalid string (i.e., any string that does not meet the RRGGBB format) is passed as a parameter, the color is set to black. Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000125_0001
String getTextColorO Description
Returns the RGB color value of the caption text. Arguments None.
Returns Returns the RGB color value of the caption text as a text string.
The form is RRGGBB where RR is the hexadecimal value for Red, GG is for Green and BB is for blue.
NOTE: If an invalid string (i.e., any string that does not meet the RRGGBB format) is passed as a parameter, the color is set to black.
Example
Figure imgf000125_0002
String getBackgroundColor() Description
Returns the RGB color value of the caption background. Arguments None.
Returns Returns the RGB color value of the caption background as a text string. The format is RRGGBB where RR is the hexadecimal value for Red, GG is for Green and BB is for blue.
NOTE: If an invalid string (i.e., any string that does not meet the RRGGBB format) is passed as a parameter, the color is set to black. Example
Figure imgf000126_0001
String toStringO Description
Returns the name of the caption as a string.
Arguments None.
Returns Returns the name of the caption as a string.
Note: If a caption object is used with the + operator to concatenate a string, the name of the caption object is still returned.
Example
Figure imgf000127_0001
3.3 Input Box
An Input Box is a component that is used to get text input from a subscriber.
Input Box Attributes void onLoad() Description
This event occurs for an object each time the Scene that contains that object is viewed by a subscriber.
Arguments None.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000127_0002
void onUnload() Description This event occurs for an object each time a subscriber navigates away from a Scene that contains the object.
Arguments None.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000129_0001
bool onKeyPressfint keyCode, int cursorPosition) Description
This event indicates that a key has been pressed while keyboard focus was on the InputBox.
Arguments keyCode keyCode value is an integer for the key that was pressed. For additional information on key values, please see Section 0. cursorPosition This is the integer value indicating the current position of the cursor within the InputBox text string.
Returns true This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that this object handled this event.
false This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that another object should handle this event.
Example
Figure imgf000129_0002
void onKeyUp(int keyCode, int cursorPosition)
Description
This event indicates that a key has been released while keyboard focus was on the InputBox. Arguments keyCode The key value as an integer for the key that was released. For addition information on key values see Section 0 . cursorPosition This is the integer value indicating the current position of the cursor within the InputBox text string.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000130_0001
void onFocus(String previous)
Description
An event that indicates that this item has received focus. When an item gets focus, "Previous" is the name of the object that had focus. The default event handler sets the chaser on this object. If this event returns a true, then the default handler does not execute.
Arguments previous The name of the object in the Scene that had focus before focus was put on this Input Box.
Returns true This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that this object handled this event. false This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that another object should handle this event.
Example
Figure imgf000130_0002
Figure imgf000131_0002
Figure imgf000131_0001
boot onBlur(String next) Description
This is an event that indicates that this item no longer has focus. It occurs when an item loses focus. "Next" is the name of the object that gets focus next. The default event handler removes the chaser from this object. If this event returns a true, then the default handler does not execute.
Arguments next The name of an object on the Scene that receives focus next.
Returns true This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that this object handled this event. false This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that another object should handle this event.
Example
Figure imgf000132_0001
InputBox Methods String getText 0 Description
This method retrieves the text that had been entered into the InputBox. Arguments None.
Returns Returns the string that is in the InputBox.
Example
Figure imgf000132_0002
void setText(String text)
Description
This method sets the text in the InputBox. Text in the input box is replaced with the specified text string.
Arguments text The text to display in the InputBox.
Returns Void. (THIS PAGE WAS BLANK UPON EXAMINATION - RO/US)
Example
Figure imgf000134_0001
int getCursorPosition() Description
Gets the current position of the input cursor for the InputBox.
Arguments None.
Returns Returns an integer value that is the position of the input cursor.
Example
Figure imgf000134_0002
void setCursorPosition(int cursorPosition) Description
Places the input cursor at a specified position in the InputBox. Arguments cursorPosition This is an integer value that indicates where the input cursor should appear in the InputBox. Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000135_0001
void setTextColor(String RGBvalue) Description
This method changes the color of the text in the input display area. Arguments
RGBvalue This specifies the RGB color value, a string of three two-digit hexadecimal values. Each hexadecimal value represents the amount of a particular color. The RRGGBB format uses RR to specify the hexadecimal value for Red, GG to specify the value for Green and BB for blue. The string "FFOOOO" is completely red, while "00FF00" is green. White is "FFFFFF" and black is "000000."
NOTE: If an invalid string (i.e., any string that does not meet the RRGGBB format) is passed as a parameter, the color is set to black.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000135_0002
void setSetColor(String RGBvalue) Description
This method changes the color of the cursor in the input display area. Arguments
RGBvalue This specifies the RGB color value, a string of three two-digit hexadecimal values. Each hexadecimal value represents the amount of a particular color. The RRGGBB format uses RR to specify the hexadecimal value for Red, GG to specify the value for Green and BB for blue. The string "FFOOOO" is completely red, while "00FF00" is green. White is "FFFFFF" and black is "000000."
NOTE: If an invalid string (i.e., any string that does not meet the RRGGBB format) is passed as a parameter, the color is set to black.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000136_0001
void setBackgroundColor(String RGBvalue) Description
This method changes the color of the background of the InputBox area. Arguments
RGBvalue This specifies the RGB color value, a string of three two-digit hexadecimal values in an RRGGBB format. Each hexadecimal value represents the amount of a particular color. The RRGGBB format uses RR to specify the hexadecimal value for Red, GG to specify the value for Green and BB for blue. The string "FFOOOO" is completely red, while "OOFFOO" is green. White is "FFFFFF" and black is "000000."
NOTE: If an invalid string (i.e., any string that does not meet the RRGGBB format) is passed as a parameter, the color is set to black.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000138_0001
String getTextColorO Description
Returns the RGB color value of the InputBox text. Arguments None.
Returns Returns the RGB color value of the caption text as a text string.
The form is RRGGBB where RR is the hexadecimal value for Red. GG is for Green and BB is for blue.
NOTE: If an invalid string (i.e., any string that does not meet the RRGGBB format) is passed as a parameter, the color is set to black.
Example
Figure imgf000138_0002
String getCursorColor() Description
Returns the RGB color value of the InputBox cursor. Arguments None.
Returns Returns the RGB color value of the cursor as a text string. The form is RRGGBB where RR is the hexadecimal value for Red. GG is for Green and BB is for blue.
NOTE: If an invalid string (i.e., any string that does not meet the RRGGBB format) is passed as a parameter, the color is set to black. Example
Figure imgf000139_0001
String getBackgroundColor() Description
Returns the RGB color value of the InputBox background. Arguments None.
Returns Returns the RGB color value of the InputBox background as a text string. The format is RRGGBB where RR is the hexadecimal value for Red, GG is for Green and BB is for blue.
NOTE: If an invalid string (i.e., any string that does not meet the RRGGBB format) is passed as a parameter, the color is set to black.
Example
Figure imgf000139_0002
String toStringO
Description
Returns the name of the InputBox as a string. Note also that if an InputBox object is used with the + operator to concatenate a string the name of the InputBox object is still returned.
Arguments None.
Returns The name of the InputBox as a string.
Example
Figure imgf000140_0001
void insertText(String text) Description
This method inserts the "text" argument string into the InputBox at the location of the cursor.
Arguments
Text The text string that is inserted into the InputBox at the current cursor position.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000140_0002
void eraseChar(string rightLeft) Description
This method erases one InputBox character either to the right or the left of the current cursor position.
Arguments rightLeft This is a case insensitive string (either "left" or "right") identifying whether to erase the character to the left or the character to the right of the current cursor position.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000142_0001
void showCursor (boolean enable) Description
This method controls the display of the text cursor. Arguments enable This boolean argument is used to enable or disable display of the text cursor.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000142_0002
3.4 ListBox
Description
A ListBox is a group of one or more items containing text or images or both. The group of items/elements is displayed either vertically or horizontally. Any item/element within a ListBox can receive keyboard focus. Each item/element has an associated data element that can be used by a script. A data element is an integer value that has been assigned by the developer. While the text displayed in each box and the data element associated with it can be updated at runtime, the size of the viewable area of a ListBox cannot be changed at that time and therefore the number of items/elements that can be viewed on a TV screen at any one time can be more or less than the number of viewable boxes that are in the entire ListBox array. If the number of items/elements are more than what can be viewed at one time on a TV screen, the TV display can be scrolled to bring the hidden ListBox items/elements into its viewable area.
Note: ListBox transparency can be configured with the AVE development tool. The percent of transparency of a ListBox determines how much of a Scene background can be viewed. If 100% transparent, the ListBox text can be viewed on the Scene background; however, when transparency is used, the Scene background in the area of each list box element must be the same. If the area of a Scene behind a listbox is a solid color there is no problem, but if a pattern appears behind a ListBox when transparency is used, then the image behind each ListBox element must be the same image.
Inserting Items/Elements in a ListBox
A ListBox item can be text with a background color or text with an image. Like a button, a ListBox item has five possible states; namely, Clicked, Selected, Over, Default and Disabled. When using images, the developer must provide an image to be displayed for each ListBox state. Use the insertltem() function to add an item to a ListBox. If the new item uses images, those images must be added by using the changeltemlmage() function, which must be called for each ListBox Item state that is to be displayed. If an image is not provided for a particular state, then the ListBox Item Background color is displayed for that state. ListBox navigation
The focus scrolls to each of the visible items/elements. When the focus is at the visible edge (top, bottom, left or right), the next hidden item/element is scrolled into view and this continues until the last item/element is visible, at which time focus moves off the ListBox.
A developer can add optional navigation buttons to the top and bottom or to the right and left sides, depending on the orientation of the ListBox. These navigation buttons can be used to scroll through the list items/elements. When focus is on the navigation button, it is used to scroll the items/elements within the ListBox to move hidden items/elements into the viewable area. Scripts can be used to customize the performance of these navigation buttons.
ListBox Attributes
ListBox Events
The following events are supported by a ListBox. void onLoad()
Description
This event occurs for an object each time the Scene that contains that object is viewed by a subscriber.
Arguments None.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000144_0001
void oήUnload() Description
This event occurs for an object each time a subscriber navigates away from a Scene that contains the object.
Arguments None. Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000145_0001
boot onFocus (String previous, int newlndex, int oldlndex) Description
An event that indicates that the ListBox has received focus. When the ListBox gets focus, "Previous" is the name of an object on the Scene that had focus, newlndex and oldlndex indicate which items within a ListBox have received or lost focus.
Arguments previous The name of the object in the Scene that had focus before focus was put on this ListBox. newlndex This is the index value of the item/element in the ListBox that now has focus. oldlndex This is the index value of the item/element in the ListBox that used to have focus. When focus is first put on a ListBox this value is -1 to indicate that no ListBox item/element previously had focus.
Returns true This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that this item/element handled this event. false This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that another object should handle this event. Example
Figure imgf000146_0001
bool onBlur(String next, int oldlndex) Description
An event that indicates the ListBox no longer has focus. "Next" is the name of an object on the Scene that gets focus The default event handler removes the chaser from this object. If this event returns a true, then the default handler does not execute.
Arguments next The name of an object on the Scene that receives focus next. oldlndex This is the index value of the item/element in the ListBox that used to have focus. Pleas note that the old index is -1 when the list box itself loses focus.
Returns true This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that this item/element handled this event. false This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that another object should handle this event.
Example
Figure imgf000146_0002
boot onKeyPress(int keyCode, int index) Description
If this box is in focus and a key on the keyboard is pressed, then this event occurs The default event handler updates the chaser position (keyboard focus) if needed and fires the onSelectltem() event if the "OKAY" key was pressed. If a Boolean true is returned the default handler does not execute. Arguments keyCode The key value as an integer for the key that was pressed. For additional information on key values see Section 0 . index The index value of the ListBox item/element that currently has focus.
Returns true This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates this item/element handled this event. false This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates another object should handle this event.
Example
Figure imgf000148_0001
boot onKeyUp(int keyCode, int index) Description
If this box is in focus and a key on the keyboard is released then this event occurs. Arguments keyCode The key value as an integer for the key that was released. For additional information on key values see Section 0. index The index value of the ListBox item/element that currently has focus.
Returns true This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that this box handled this event. false This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that another object should handle this event.
Example
Figure imgf000148_0002
boot onSelectltemβnt index, int userData) Description
This is a special case of the onKeyPress() event that occurs when an object has focus and the Enter key on a keyboard or the "OKAY" key on a remote is pressed. If a mouse is supported, then a mouse click also triggers this event.
Arguments index This is the index value of the item/element in the ListBox that is Selected. userData Data associated with the box. This is an integer value associated with a ListBox item. This can be used to index into an array where specific information for each ListBox item is stored
Returns true This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that this item/element handled this event. false This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that another object should handle this event.
Example
Figure imgf000150_0001
boot onTopOJList() Description
An event when focus is moved from the element that is on the top (first item/element) of a list to another object on the Scene. The default handler moves focus to a different item on the Scene. The developer can override this and handle keyboard focus in script.
Arguments None.
Returns true This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that this item/element handled this event. false This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that another object should handle this event.
Example
Figure imgf000151_0001
bool onBottomOfList() Description
An event when focus is moved from the element that is on the bottom (last item/element) of a list to another Scene object. The default handler moves focus to a different item on the Scene. The developer can override this and handle keyboard focus in script.
Arguments None.
Returns true This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that this item/element handled this event. false This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that another object should handle this event.
Example
Figure imgf000151_0002
ListBox Methods
Boolean insertltem(int index, String text, int value) Description
This command inserts a new item to the ListBox list at the location specified by index. The new items appearance is defined by the Default font, font size, font color, background color and font weight that were specified at development time.
Arguments index The index specifies the location where the new item/element is to be inserted. text This is the text that is displayed when the item/element is in view. value Data associated with the box. This is an integer value associated with a ListBox item and can be used to index into an array where specific information for each ListBox item is stored.
Returns Boolean true on success, false on failure.
Example
Figure imgf000152_0001
Boolean changeltem(int index, String text, int value) Description
This command modifies the text or the data value of the ListBox item at the location specified by the index.
Arguments index The index specifies the location of the item/element that changes. text The text that appears when the item/element is in view. value This is an integer value, data, that is associated with a ListBox item. It can be used to index into an array where specific information for each ListBox item is stored.
Returns Boolean true on success, false on failure.
Example
Figure imgf000153_0001
Boolean changeltemlmage(int index, String stateName, String imageURL) Description
This command changes the Image associated with the stateName of the ListBox item at the location specified by index.
NOTE: If the URL cannot be found, a black box appears in place of the specified image.
Arguments index The index specifies the location where the new item/element is to be inserted stateName The name of the Item state that should display the image URL.
The state names are: Clicked, Focused, Selected, Default and Disabled. imageURL The URL location for the image to display on the ListBox Item when the stateName is displayed.
Returns Boolean true on success, false on failure.
Example
Figure imgf000154_0001
String getImageUrl(int index, String stateName) Description
This command returns the name of the Image associated with the stateName of the ListBox item at the location specified by index.
Arguments index The index specifies the item of the ListBox whose image URL is to be returned stateName The name of the Item state whose image URL should be returned. The state names are: Clicked, Focused, Selected, Default and Disabled.
Returns The URL for the Image for the state name at the specified index of the ListBox. Example scene .Buttonl. onclick = function ()
{
//prints the url for the default image of item 0 var ImageUrl = scene . ListBoxl .getlmageUrl (0 , "Default"); print (" Image is " + ImageUrl),
String getItemCurrentState(int index) Description
This command returns the current state of the ListBox item at the location specified by index.
Arguments index The index specifies the item of the ListBox.
Returns The current state name of the specified ListBox. The state names are: Clicked, Focused, Selected, Default and Disabled.
Example scene. Buttonl. onclick = function ()
{
//Gets the current state of item 0 and prints it var CurrentState = scene . ListBoxl . getltemCurrentState (0) print ("Current state is " + CurrentState);
} boot removeltem(int index); Description This command removes the item specified by the index. If the item removed has focus at the time and the script does not place focus on another focusable item, then new focus is determined according to one of the following:
1. A focusable ListBox item to the right (for a horizontal ListBox) or below (for a vertical ListBox).
2. A focusable ListBox item to the left (for a horizontal ListBox) or above (for a vertical ListBox).
3. Any focusable object on the Scene.
Arguments index The index specifies the location of the item/element that is to be removed.
Returns bool true on success, false on failure.
Example
Figure imgf000157_0001
void clear();
Description
This command removes all the items of a ListBox
Arguments None.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000157_0002
String getText(int index) Description
This command returns the text that is displayed in a box within a ListBox. Arguments index The index specifies the location of the item/element whose text is to be retrieved
Returns The text displayed in the box.
Example
Figure imgf000157_0003
Figure imgf000158_0001
int getValue( int index) Description
This command returns the data that is associated with the selected box within a ListBox. This value is specified by insertltem() and by changeltem(). ListBoxes that are created by AVE and not created by these script commands have a default value of 0. A -1 is returned if the index does not exist.
Arguments
Index The index specifies the location of the item/element whose value is to be retrieved
Returns The Data item/element associated with that box.
Example
Figure imgf000159_0001
int getltemCount() Description
Gets the number of item/elements within a ListBox.
Arguments None.
Returns The number of boxes in the ListBox
Example
Figure imgf000159_0002
void setItemFocus(int index) Description This command sets focus on an item within the ListBox. If the item specified by index is not currently in the visible area of the ListBox, the ListBox items are scrolled until the index item is in the visible area.
Arguments
Index The index specifies the location of the Item/element that should receive focus
Returns A Boolean true if focus is put on selected box, otherwise a
Boolean false.
Example
Figure imgf000161_0001
int getFocusedltem() Description
This method returns the index position of the item/element that currently has focus.
Arguments None
Returns The index position of the item/element that currently has focus
Example
Figure imgf000161_0002
void setItemSelected(int index) Description
This command selects an item/element within the ListBox and displays its Selected or Clicked state. If the item is not visible it does not scroll into view. The AV script is responsible for setting items in the Selected or the NotSelected state. Unlike keyboard focus only, the AV script controls Selecting items. Multiple items within a ListBox can be selected at the same time, but the AV script code must keep track of what items are selected.
Arguments index The index specifies the location of the Item/element that should be selected.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000161_0003
Figure imgf000162_0001
void setItemNotSelected(int index) Description
This command unselects an item/element within the ListBox and displays its Default or Focused state.
Arguments index The index specifies the location of the Item/element that should be shown in its not selected state.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000163_0001
void enable(int index) Description
Show the item in its unselected state. If the item has focus, the Focused image is displayed. If the item does not have focus, the Default image is displayed. The item appears similar to the setItemNotSelected() command appearance. Use setltemSelected()/setltemNotSelected () to control item selection. Use enable()/disable() to enable and disable a item.
Arguments index The index specifies the location of the Item/element that should be shown in its enabled state.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000163_0002
void disable(int index) Description
Shows the item in its Disabled state. The Disabled image is displayed which indicates that the item cannot be selected and that it cannot receive keyboard focus. If the item has keyboard focus when the disable function is called and the script code does not move focus to a focusable item, then focus is put on the next focusable item (right for horizontal; down for vertical) of the ListBox. If the ListBox does not have a next item to receive focus, then focus is put on some other Scene object.
Arguments index The index specifies the location of the Item/element that should be shown in its Disabled state.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000165_0001
boot ishemSelected(int index) Description
Tells if the item/element specified by the index is selected or not.
Arguments
Index The position within the ListBox for a specific item/element.
Returns Returns a Boolean true if the item/element specified by the index is currently selected (in Selected state); false if it is not selected.
Example
Figure imgf000165_0002
bool isVisible(int index) Description
Tells if the item/element specified by the index is being displayed or not.
Arguments
Index The position within the ListBox for a specific item/element.
Returns Returns a Boolean true if the item/element specified by the index is being displayed, false if it is not displayed
Example
intfindNextltemWithValueβnt value, int startindex) Description
Returns the index of the next item/element in a list with the specified value if successful or returns a -1 if the item/element cannot be found.
Arguments value This is an integer value associated with a ListBox item. This can be used to index into an array where specific information for each ListBox item is stored startindex The position to start looking for the item/element within the
ListBox. By updating the index all items/elements in the ListBox can be found.
Returns Returns the numeric value that is the index of the item/element specified by value if successful, but returns a -1 if the item/element cannot be found.
Example
Figure imgf000166_0002
int βndNexthemWithText(Stnng text, int startindex) Description
Returns the index of the next item/element in the list with the specified text if successful; returns a -1 if the item/element cannot be found. Arguments
Text The text that is displayed when the box is in view.
Startindex The position to start looking for the item/element within the
ListBox. By updating the index, all items/elements in the ListBox can be found.
Returns Returns the numeric value that is the index of the item/element specified by text if successful; otherwise, returns a -1 if the item/element cannot be found.
Example
Figure imgf000167_0001
String toStringO Description
If a ListBox object is used with the + operator to concatenate a string, the name of the ListBox object is still returned.
Arguments None.
Return Returns the name of the ListBox as a string.
Example
Figure imgf000167_0002
3.5 Media Player
This is an object where media streams can be played. After a MediaPlayer object is created, it is controllable by scripts; however, script cannot create a viewable Media player. If the media is viewable then the developer must place a Media Player on the Scene. Media Player Attributes
Attributes looping Boolean (true or false) - controls whether or not the media player loops and repeats playing the current media (default = "true").
Media Player Events void onLoad() Description
This event occurs for an object each time the Scene that contains the object is viewed by a subscriber.
Arguments None.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000168_0001
void onUnload() Description
This event occurs for an object each time a subscriber navigates away from a Scene that contains that object.
Arguments None.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000169_0001
bool onFocus(String previous) Description
An event that indicates this item has received focus. When an item gets focus, "Previous" is the name of object that had focus. The default event handler sets the chaser on this object. If this event returns a true, then the default handler does not execute.
Arguments previous The name of the object in the Scene that had focus before the focus was put on this button.
Returns true This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that this object handled this event. false This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that another object should handle this event
Example
Figure imgf000169_0002
boot onBlut (String next)
Description
An event that indicates this item no longer has focus. When an item loses focus, "Next" is the name of the object that then gets focus. The default event handler removes the chaser from this object. If this event returns a true, then the default handler does not execute.
Arguments next The name of an object on the Scene that receives focus.
Returns true This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that this object handled this event. false This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that another object should handle this event.
Example
Figure imgf000170_0001
boot onKeyPress(int keyCode) Description
If this button is in focus and a key on the keyboard is pressed, this event occurs. The default event handler updates the chaser position (keyboard focus) if needed and fires the onClick event if the "OKAY" key was pressed. If a Boolean true is returned, the default handler does not execute.
Arguments keyCode The key value as an integer for the key that was pressed. For additional information on key values see Section 0.
Returns true This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that this button handled this event. false This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that another object should handle this event.
Example
Figure imgf000171_0001
boot onKeyUp(int key Code) Description
If this button is in focus and a key on the keyboard is released, this event occurs. Arguments keyCode The key value as an integer for the key that was released. For additional information on key values see Section 0.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000172_0001
void onClick() Description
This is a special case of the onKeyPress() event. This event occurs when an object has focus and the Enter key on a keyboard or the "OKAY" key on a remote is pressed. If a mouse is supported, then a mouse click can also trigger this event.
Arguments None.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000172_0002
boolean onEndOfMedia() Description
This event is fired under the following conditions:
1. A cached stream has reached the end of playback.
2. A playFromPosition() command is issued with a position beyond what is currently in the cache.
Note: If the onEndOfMedia event is not handled by script, playback behavior is determined by the MediaPlayer looping property. If looping is set to true, the asset starts playing from the beginning; otherwise, asset playback stops.
Arguments None.
Returns true Return true indicates that the event was handled and prevents the default handler from running. false Return false indicates that the default handler should run. The default handler loops the asset if the looping property is set to true; otherwise it discontinues play.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000174_0001
Media Player Methods void setΛudioFocus() Description
This method locks audio focus on the media player. The priority of the audio, in this case, is elevated above the Scene element focus traversal and below transient audio.
Arguments None.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000174_0002
void killΛudioFocus() Description
This method unlocks audio focus on the media player. Audio playback switches to whichever asset is at the top of the audio playback stack.
Arguments None.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000174_0003
void loadMedia(String URL)
Description This method attaches the media player to an asset found at the specified location.
Arguments
URL This parameter specifies the location from which to obtain the media player asset.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000176_0001
void play 0 Description
This method starts playback of the current media player asset from the beginning. Use the loadMedia method to set the player asset.
Arguments None
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000176_0002
void playFromPosition (int startPosition) Description
Plays the media, starting at the startPosition value. A loadMedia() command may be required before a playFromPosition() command can work. This command is ignored for live streams
Arguments startPosition This argument is the temporal position, in milliseconds, from the beginning of an asset to the time the media starts to play. Often this is based on the value returned from a getPosition() command.
Returns Void
Example
Figure imgf000177_0001
int getPositionO Description
This function returns the current temporal position from the beginning of the asset in milliseconds.
Arguments None.
Returns An integer value that is the absolute asset position from the start of the asset in milliseconds. This command is ignored for live streams.
Example
Figure imgf000177_0002
voidpauseO Description
Stops the media player at the point when the pause() method was called. When playing a file or using an HTTP connection, use the getPosition() and playFromPosition() to start the Media Player from the paused point. This command is ignored for live streams.
Arguments None.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000178_0001
vo stop Description
Stop the media. After a stop() command, another loadMedia() command must be issued before a play() or playFromPosition() command can work.
Arguments None.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000178_0002
String getUrlO Description
This command returns the URL that is playing for the Media Player. Arguments None.
Returns The URL that the Media Player is playing as a string.
Example
Figure imgf000179_0001
boolean isΛudioPlaying() Description
This command returns a Boolean value true to indicate that the audio for the Media Player has audio focus. When the Media Player has audio focus a subscriber can hear the audio.
Arguments None.
Returns A Boolean string (true or false) is returned if the Audio of the
Media Player currently has Audio focus.
Example
String toStringO Description
If a MediaPlayer object is used with the + operator to concatenate a string, the name of the MediaPlayer object is still returned.
Arguments None.
Returns Returns the name of the MediaPlayer as a string. Example
Figure imgf000180_0001
voidfastForward() Description
The fastForward() method can only be used for Real Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP) connections, where it fast forwards the media; however, this command is ignored for live streams.
Arguments None.
Returns Void.
Example
void rewind() Description
The rewind() method rewinds the media. It can be used only for Real Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP) connections; however, it is ignored for live streams.
Arguments None.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000180_0003
void setReference(String imageUrl) Description
A"reference" image can be displayed in a MediaPlayer when no asset has been loaded or when an asset is being loading. The setReference() method allows the "reference" image to be changed programmatically.
Arguments imageUrl This parameter specifies the location from which to obtain the image to display in the media player area when the media player is not playing.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000181_0001
3.6 Static Image
Static images typically are rectangular objects whose size falls on macro block boundaries; however, static images could be things like company logos. A static image can have focus and focus is shown using a chaser. The background of a Scene is a static image and, despite its name, the image that appears in a Static Image can be changed by using the loadlmage() method. The new image must be the same size as the original image. A static image could be a non-rectangular image such as a company logo where the area around the logo is transparent so that it shows the background image.
Static Image Attributes None. Static Image Events void onLoadO Description
This event occurs for an object each time the Scene that contains the object is viewed by a subscriber.
Arguments None.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000183_0001
void onUnload() Description
This event occurs for an object each time a subscriber navigates away from a Scene that contains the object.
Arguments None.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000183_0002
boolean onFocusfString previous) Description
When an object receives focus, this event is fired. When the Static Image gets focus, "Previous" is the name of object that had focus. The default event handler sets the chaser on this object. If this event returns a true, then the default handler does not execute.
Arguments previous The name of the object in the Scene that had focus before focus was put on this button.
Returns true This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that this object handled this event. false This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that another object should handle this event. Example
Figure imgf000184_0001
boolean onBlur(String next) Description
An event that indicates that this item no longer has focus. When the Static Image loses focus, "Next" is the name for the object that gets focus next. The default event handler removes the chaser from this object. If this event returns a true, then the default handler does not execute.
Arguments next The name of an object on the Scene that receives focus next.
Returns true This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that this object handled this event. false This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that another object should handle this event.
Example
Figure imgf000184_0002
boolean onKeyPress(int keyCode) Description
If this Static Image is in focus and a key on the keyboard is pressed, this event occurs. The default event handler updates the chaser position (keyboard focus) if needed and fires the onClick event if the "OKAY" key was pressed. If a Boolean true is returned the default handler does not execute.
Arguments keyCode This is the key value, as an integer, for the key that was pressed. Please see Section 0 for additional information on the key values.
Returns true This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that this object handled this event. false This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that another object should handle this event.
Example
Figure imgf000185_0001
boolean onKeyUp(int keyCode) Description
If this Static Image is in focus and a key on the keyboard is released, then this event occurs.
Arguments
keyCode The key value as an integer for the key that was released. For additional information on key values see Section 0.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000186_0001
void onCUck() Description
This is a special case of the onKeyPress() event. This event occurs when an object has focus and the Enter key on a keyboard or the "OKAY" key on a remote is pressed. If a mouse is supported, then a mouse click also triggers this event.
Arguments None.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000186_0002
Static Image Methods boot loadImage(String imageURL)
Description
This is the path where the bitmap can be found. Arguments imageURL Can be a URL, a pathname or part of the Programming data.
Returns Boolean true on success, false on failure.
Example
Figure imgf000188_0001
String getUrlO Description
This command returns the URL that is displayed by the Static Image.
Arguments None.
Returns The URL that the Static Image displays as a string.
Example
Figure imgf000188_0002
String toStringO Description
If a Static Image object is used with the + operator to concatenate a string, the name of the Static Image object is still returned.
Arguments None.
Returns Returns the name of the Static Image as a string.
Example
Figure imgf000188_0003
void setAlignmentfString xAlign, String y Align, boolean update) Description This command positions an image within the static image Scene element.
Note: The option to setAlignment() is dependent on how the image was scaled. Alignment can be changed only if the image was "cropped. "
Arguments xAlign A string that specifies the x-dimension alignment. Options are
"Left," "Center" and "Right." Default is "Center." yAlign A string that specifies the y-dimension alignment. Options are
"Upper," "Center" and "Lower." Default is "Center." update A Boolean value (true/false) - set to false if rendering should be deferred; such as when additional settings are to be employed.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000189_0001
void setScaleType(String scaleType, boolean update) Description
This allows setting the scaling of an image or delaying its setting. Arguments scaleType This is a string that specifies the type of scaling to be applied. The following four types are available:
1. "Crop" - crop any part of the image that extends beyond the borders of the Scene element. Resizing is not performed. The alignment parameters determine where the image is placed and which portions of it are cropped.
2. "StretchFit" - scales the image in both dimensions such that it fills the Scene element. Aspect ratio is not preserved. 3. "BestFit" - scales the image such that aspect ratio is preserved and one or more dimensions of the image fill the Scene element. The image is always centered.
4. "AutoScale" - use the BestFit algorithm if the image is larger than the Scene element; otherwise, use the cropping algorithm. The image is always centered.
Update This is a Boolean value (true/false) that should be set to false if rendering is to be deferred; such as when additional settings are to be employed.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000190_0001
void setUseBgFHl(boolean useBgFHl, boolean update) Description
Fills the area outside an image area when that area is smaller than the allocated image area.
Arguments useBgFill This is a Boolean value - when true and the actual image is smaller than the allocated static image area, then the Scene background fills the area outside the actual image area. When false, the static image background (currently black) is displayed around the actual image. update This is a Boolean value (true/false) - set it to false to defer rendering; such as when additional settings are to be employed.
Returns Void. Example
Figure imgf000191_0001
void fadeToColor (String color, int alphaBlend, int duration) Description
Fade from the current image to an alphablended combination of the current image and the specified color.
Arguments color color to fade to in rrggbb format. alphaBlend alphablending weight between source and destination color.
Range 0 - 255, 0 is source. duration The time to complete the effect in units of frame intervals.
Returns Void. void fadeToImage (String image, int duration)
Description
Fade from the current image to the specified image
Arguments image URL of the image to fade to. duration The time to complete the effect in units of frame intervals.
Returns Void. void pan (String image, String direction, int duration)
Description
Fade from the current image to the specified image
Arguments image The URL of the image to pan. direction The direction of the pan (up, right, left, and down), duration The time to complete the effect in units of frame intervals.
Returns Void.
3.7 Ticker
A ticker window has scrolling text that is encoded at runtime.
Ticker Attributes
None.
Ticker Events void onLoad() Description
This event occurs for an object each time the Scene that contains that object is viewed by a subscriber.
Arguments None.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000192_0001
void onUnloadO Description
This event occurs for an object each time a subscriber navigates away from a Scene that contains that object. Use Ticker clear() method in this event to free Ticker resources.
Arguments None. Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000193_0001
Ticker Methods void clear() Description
Clears the text area of the ticker. Arguments None.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000193_0002
int insertText(String string) Description
Inserts the specified string into the Ticker. When new text is inserted the Ticker image goes blank, then restarts and includes the added text.
Arguments None.
Returns insertText() returns an Identifier (textld) that can by used by removeText() to remove the inserted text.
Example
Figure imgf000193_0003
Figure imgf000194_0001
void removeText(int textld) Description
Removes a string that is identified by textld Arguments textld This is an identifier returned from insertText(); it specifies the text to be removed.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000194_0002
void setTextColor(String RGB) Description
Sets the color of the text to be displayed in the ticker. The new color settings apply only to new text inserted into the Ticker. Text already in the Ticker retains its original color.
Arguments RGB These are the Red, Green and Blue color values for the text, in the RRGGBB format. The RRGGBB format uses RR to specify the hexadecimal value for Red, GG to specify the value for Green and BB for blue.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000195_0001
void setBackgroundColor(String RGB) Description
Sets the color of the background to be displayed in the ticker. Arguments
RGB This sets the color for the ticker background. The Red, Green and Blue color values in the RRGGBB format. The RRGGBB format uses RR to specify the hexadecimal value for Red, GG to specify the value for Green and BB for blue.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000195_0002
String getText () Description
Returns the current Ticker text as a string. Arguments None.
Returns Returns the string that is currently being displayed by the
Ticker.
Example
Figure imgf000196_0001
String getldText (int textld) Description
Returns the text for the specified textld . Arguments textld An identifier returned from insertText() that specifies the text to be returned.
Returns The string for the specified textld.
Example
Figure imgf000196_0002
String getTextColorO Description
Returns the RGB color value of the Ticker text. Arguments None.
Returns Returns the RGB color value of the caption text as a text string.
The RRGGBB format uses RR to specify the hexadecimal value for Red, GG to specify the value for Green and BB for blue.
Example
Figure imgf000197_0001
String getBackgroundColor()
Description Returns the RGB color value of the Ticker background.
Arguments None.
Returns Returns the RGB color value of the Ticker background as a text string. The RRGGBB format uses RR to specify the hexadecimal value for Red, GG to specify the value for Green and BB for blue.
Example
Figure imgf000197_0002
String toStringO Description
If a Ticker object is used with the + operator to concatenate a string, the name of the Ticker object is still returned. Arguments None.
Returns Returns the name of the Ticker as a string.
Example
Figure imgf000198_0001
4 Communication Objects
4.1 Billing System Object
An object that allows access to a billing system. This object can be created by Scripts and a developer can use the socket object to make a connection to the billing system of his or her own company.
Billing System Methods
Purchase(itemld) Description
Charge the subscribers account for an item. Arguments itemld An identifier for the item to be billed to the subscriber's account; an example might be a VOD movie.
Returns Success if the account was billed correctly.
Failure if there was a problem. IsSubscribed( itemld) Description
Checks the status of a subscriber's account. Arguments itemld An identifier for the item to be billed to a subscriber's account.
Returns Returns a status for a subscriber.
Subscribe(itemld) Description
Based on the current billing commands. Arguments itemld An identifier for the item to be billed to a subscriber's account.
Returns Returns a status for a subscriber. IsPurch ased(itemld) Description
Based on the current billing commands. Arguments itemld An identifier for the item to be billed to the subscriber's account.
Returns Returns true if the item has already been purchased. This is used, for example, so that a VOD movie can be viewed for a 24-hour period. getΛccountld() Description
Based on the current billing commands, this can be used for households with more than one set-top box or other display device. Using this, a VOD movie can be purchased on one display device, then viewed on another in the same household. It can also be used for keeping track of high game scores across multiple display devices within a household. This Identifier can also be used when going out to a third party system.
Arguments None.
Returns Returns the account Id for a subscriber.
5 Debugging Script
Description
While creating script, a developer might want to get feedback about the values of certain variables or where the script is executing at a particular time - the print() command provides the required support. The print() function displays messages to an output window in the AVE.
Debugging Methods void print(String text) Description
Prints out the text to the AVE output window. Arguments
Text Message to be logged. This can be any combination of quoted strings, numbers or text variables. The text parameter is evaluated similar to JavaScript.
Returns Void.
Debugging Example Script
In the following code a message is displayed in the AVE output window if there is a problem loading the Scene.
Example
Figure imgf000201_0001
The example code above would print:
ScriptTrace : "Tickerl onLoad event " 6 XML
6.1 XMLAtthbute
An Attribute Node object contains an attribute value that is associated with a node. The example output in the XMLAttribute section is based on this XML string:
<TileIds>
<Id attr2="val 2" attr3="value number 3" type="public">76</Id>
<Id attr2="value2" type="custom">86</Id> </TileIds>
XMLAttribute Attributes
The following attributes are supported: nodeName Returns the qualified name for the attribute (Read-only). nodeType Specifies the XML Document Object Model (DOM) node type, which determines valid values and whether or not the node can have child nodes (Read-only). node Value Contains the node value expressed in its defined data type
(Read-only). text Represents the text content of the attribute. This value can be read or a new value can be assigned to it.
Example
The follow example extracts attribute information from an XML string.
Figure imgf000202_0001
Figure imgf000203_0001
Figure imgf000204_0001
XMLAttribute Events
No events are supported.
XMLAttribute Methods
No methods are supported.
6.2 XMLDocument
Represents the top level of the XML source and includes members for retrieving all other XML objects.
XMLDocument Attributes
The following attributes described here are supported:
• Async Specifies if the document loads synchronously or asynchronously. If asynchronous, then the onLoad() event fires when the document is loaded. Default is false.
• DocumentElement Contains the root element of the document or null if the root element does not exist.
• Preserve Whitespace Specifies how white space is handled. Default is false.
• Validate '"validate" is a Boolean property that tells the XML parser whether or not to validate the XML against a schema. If this property is false, the parser never validates the XML. If this property is true and a schema exists, then the parser uses the schema to validate the xml. The default value is "false."
Example
Figure imgf000204_0002
Figure imgf000205_0001
XMLDocument Events
Only the following event is supported. void onLoad(int status) Description
This event indicates that an XML Document load operation is complete. This is especially useful for asynchronous document loading, but the event also occurs even when the completed XML document load is synchronous.
Arguments
Status A zero value indicates a successful load; a non-zero value, indicates a failure.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000205_0002
Figure imgf000206_0001
XMLDocument Methods
The following methods are supported boolean load(String URL)
Description
Loads an XML document from the specified.
Arguments
URL A that string specifies the URL of the XML document to load.
Returns
True This Boolean keyword indicates that the load succeeded.
False This Boolean keyword indicates that the load failed.
Example
Figure imgf000207_0001
boolean loadString(String xml) Description
Loads a string containing XML text. Arguments xml A string that contains the XML text to load.
Returns true This Boolean keyword indicates that the load succeeded. false This Boolean keyword indicates that the load failed.
Example
Figure imgf000207_0002
Figure imgf000208_0001
6.3 XMLNamedNodeMap
Adds support for namespaces and iteration through the collection of attribute nodes. An XMLNamedNodeMap is returned by the XMLNode. attributes property. The example output for this section is based on the XML string.
<TileIds>
<Id attr2="val 2" attr3="value number 3" type="public">76</Id>
<Id attr2="value2" type="custom">8δ</Id> </TileIds>
XMLNamedNodeMap Attributes
The following attributes are supported. length Indicates the number of items in the collection (Read-only).
Example
Figure imgf000208_0002
XMLNamedNodeMap Events
No events are supported.
XMLNamedNodeMap Methods
The following methods are supported getNαmedItem(String name) Description
Retrieves the attribute with the specified name. Arguments name A string specifying the name of the attribute. Returns
An object. Returns an XMLAttribute object for the object specified.
null If the node object is not in the collection, a null is returned.
Example
Figure imgf000210_0001
Description
Allows random access to individual nodes within a collection. Arguments index An integer that specifies the index of the item within the collection. The first item is number zero.
Returns
An object. Returns XMLNode, if found. null If the index is out of range.
Example
Figure imgf000210_0002
Figure imgf000211_0001
6.4 XMLNode
Adds support for namespaces and iteration through the collection of attribute nodes.
The output results for the examples in this section are based on the following XML string:
<TileIds>
<Id attr2="val 2" attr3="value number 3" type="public">76</Id>
<Id attr2="value2" type="custom" >86</Id> </TileIds>
XMLNode Attributes
The following attributes are supported. attributes Contains the list of attributes for this node. This returns an XMLNamedNodeList (see section 6.3) (Read-only).
Example
Figure imgf000211_0002
Figure imgf000212_0001
childNodes Contains a node list containing the children nodes
Read-only
Example
Figure imgf000212_0002
fϊrstChild Contains the first child of this node, null if there are no children nodes (Read-only).
Example
Figure imgf000213_0001
lastChild Returns the last child node, null if there are no children nodes (Read-only)
Example
Figure imgf000213_0002
nextSibling Contains the next sibling of the node in the parent's child list, null if there is not a next sibling. Read-only.
Example
Figure imgf000213_0003
Figure imgf000214_0001
nodeName Returns the qualified name for attribute, document type, element, entity, or notation nodes. Returns a fixed string for all other node types (Read-only)
Example
Figure imgf000215_0001
nodeType Specifies the XML Document Object Model (DOM) node type, which determines valid values and whether the node can have child nodes (Read-only).
Example
Figure imgf000215_0002
node Value Contains the text associated with the node (Read-only).
Example
Figure imgf000215_0003
Figure imgf000216_0001
parentNode Contains the parent node, null if parent does not exist
(Read-only). Example
Figure imgf000216_0002
previousSibling Contains the previous sibling of the node in the parent's child list; however, if the previous Sibling does not exist, it is null (Read-only).
Example
Figure imgf000216_0003
Figure imgf000217_0001
text Represents the text content of the node or the concatenated text representing the node and its descendants. This value can be read or a new value can be assigned to it. Use caution since descendant nodes get overwritten.
Example
Figure imgf000217_0002
XMLNode Events
No events are supported.
XMLNode Methods
The following methods are supported.
String getAttribute (String name)
Description Gets the value of the attribute.
Arguments name A string specifying the name of the attribute.
Returns
A String Returns the value as a string if the attribute value is a nonempty string null Returns null if the named attribute does not have a specified value,or an implied default value, such as one taken from a DTD or schema..
Example
Figure imgf000218_0001
getElementsByTagName (String tagName)
Description Returns a list of all descendant elements that match the supplied name.
Arguments tagName A string specifying the name of the clement to find The tagName value "*" matches all descendant elements of this element.
Returns
An object Returns an XMLNodeList object containing all elements that match the supplied name. Example
Figure imgf000219_0001
boolean hasChildNodes () Description
Provides a fast way to determine whether a node has children.
Arguments None.
Returns
Boolean Returns true if this node has children.
Example
Figure imgf000219_0002
String toStήng () Description
Serializes an XML node to a string. An XML document could be modified, then written to a file using XmlDocument.documentElement,toString().
Arguments None.
Returns
A String Returns the entire node including all attributes and children as a string. Since the XmlDocument.documentElement is the root node, using toString allows the XML document to be serialized.
Example
Figure imgf000220_0001
6.5 XMLNodeList
Supports indexed access to a collection.
XMLNodeList Attributes
The following attributes are supported. length Indicates the number of items in the collection (Read-only).
Example
Figure imgf000220_0002
Figure imgf000221_0001
XMLNodeList Events
No events are supported.
XMLNodeList Methods
The following methods are supported. item(int index)
Description Allows random access to individual nodes within the collection
Arguments
Index An integer specifying the index of the item within the collection. The first item is number zero.
Returns
An object. Returns XMLNode if found. Null If the index is out of range.
Example
Figure imgf000222_0001
6.6 XMLHttp
The XMLHttp object is patterned after the XMLHttpRequest concept that was implemented in IE, Mozilla, Safari (Apple) and Opera. The AVDN system supports HTTP messages and messages across a Secure Socket Layer (SSL) using HTTPS.
Description
Creates a XML socket object for communication with an HTTP server.
XMLHttp Attributes
The following attributes are supported. checkCertificate is a Boolean property which is used to enable or disable certificate checking during secure HTTP operations. This property can be read or assigned. The default value is "true."
Example
Figure imgf000222_0002
redirectPolicy Used to set the redirect policy to one of the following values:
0 = Never redirect.
1 = Disallow HTTPS to HTTP redirects.
2 = Always redirect.
The default is 1 (Disallow HTTPS to HTTP redirects).
Example
Figure imgf000224_0001
readyState Returns the state of the object as follows:
0 = uninitialized
1 = open
2 = sent
3 = receiving
4 = loaded. Read-only.
Example
Figure imgf000224_0002
responseText Returns the response as a string.
Read-only Example
Figure imgf000224_0003
Figure imgf000225_0001
responseXML To examine and parse the XML document, create a new XMLDocument object and pass the responseText as an argument to the XMLDocument' s loadString method. status Returns the status as a number (e.g. 404 for "Not Found" and 200 for "OK"). For some security errors may return a 0 (zero). In some cases the statusText attribute may provide additional information about the error. Read-only.
Example
Figure imgf000225_0002
statusText Returns the status as a string (e.g. "Not Found" or "OK").
Some security errors may return a status value of 0 (zero). In some cases the statusText attribute may provide additional information about the error. Readonly.
Example
Figure imgf000225_0003
useragent Sets and gets the user agent in the HTTP requests.
The useragent can only be set before the open command. It can be read at any time.
Example
Figure imgf000226_0001
XMLHttp Events void onReadyStateChange(int state) Description
An event handler for an event that fires at every state change Occurs only when the file is opened asynchronously (see parameters for open() method below)
Arguments state The state to which the object is changing.
Returns Void
Example
Figure imgf000226_0002
Figure imgf000227_0001
XMLHttp Methods
The following methods are supported. void abort()
Description
Cancels the current request.
Arguments None.
Returns Void.
Example:
Figure imgf000227_0002
getAllResponseHeaders ()
Description
Returns the complete set of HTTP headers as a string.
Arguments None.
Returns
A string The complete set of HTTP headers Example
Figure imgf000228_0001
String getResponseHeader (String headerName) Description
Returns the value of the specified HTTP header as a string.
Arguments headerName Name of the HTTP header to retrieve.
Returns
A string. Returns the header entry if found. Returns an empty string if not found.
Example
Figure imgf000228_0002
Figure imgf000229_0001
open (method, URL) void open (String method, String URL, boolean async) open (method, URL, async, username) open (method, URL, async, username, password)
Description
Specifies the method, URL and other optional attributes of a request. The AVDN system supports HTTP messages and also messages across a Secure Socket Layer (SSL) using HTTPS.
Arguments method The method parameter can have a value of "GET," "POST" or
"PUT" (Use "GET" to request data and use "POST" to send data; especially if the length of the data is greater than 512 bytes).
URL The URL parameter can be either a relative or complete URL.
Async Specifies whether or not the request should be handled asynchronously - "true" means that script processing carries on after the send() method, without waiting for a response, while "false" means that the script waits for a response before continuing to process more script (Default: true1). username The name of the user for authentication.
Default: empty string password The name of the user for authentication.
Default: empty string
Example
The value for this field is always set to "true."
Figure imgf000230_0001
Note: See onReadyStateChange ( ) event above for an asynchronous open example. void send (String content) Description
Sends an HTTP request to the server.
Arguments
Content The body of the message being sent with the request.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000230_0002
Figure imgf000231_0001
void setRequestHeader (String label, String value) Description
Adds a label/value pair to the HTTP header to be sent. Arguments
Label A string containing the header name to set, for example,
"depth " This parameter should not contain a colon and should be the actual text of the HTTP header.
Value A string containing the value of the header.
Returns Void
Example
Figure imgf000231_0002
Figure imgf000232_0001
(THIS PAGES WAS BLANK UPON EXAMINATION - RO/US)
7 Container Objects
7.1 ElementArea
An element area is a Scene element that contains a single Scene. There are methods that allow the Scene that is contained by an element area to be switched. Since an element area is a Scene element, a Scene can contain any number of element areas. This means the programmer has the ability to define what portion of the screen a Scene consumes. The programmer can dynamically change the functionality of this area simply by changing the element area Scene. This provides the programmer with the ability to create hierarchical, flexible and dynamic designs.
A top-level element area is created by default. A top-level Scene, defined at session launch, is automatically loaded and is contained by the top-level element area. The top-level element area assumes the resolution defined by the session.
ElementArea Methods
boot preloαdScene (String url) Description
This method preloads a Scene in the element area cache. Returns Boolean true on success, false on failure.
Example
Figure imgf000234_0001
void previousScene ()
Description This method navigates to the previous Scene that was loaded in the ElementArea.
Example
Figure imgf000234_0002
Figure imgf000235_0001
bool setScene (String url)
Description This method replaces the current Scene contained by the element area with the Scene found at the specified location. The Scene is also placed in the element area cache if it is not yet in there.
Returns Boolean true on success, false on failure.
Example
Figure imgf000235_0002
void nextScene () Description
This method navigates to the next Scene in the ElementArea history. This method only works if previousScene () has been called successfully at least once.
Example
Figure imgf000235_0003
void setChaserElement(String direction, string elementName) Description
This method allows script to define what element receives input focus when the user navigates away from the element area. The direction is a string either "up," "down," "left" or "right.'" The elementName is the name of the element that receives the input focus on the Scene. Arguments
Direction This is the direction that is navigating away from an Element Area. For example, if input focus is on the element area and the user hits the 'up arrow' key on the remote control, then the direction is up. The four possible directions are "up," "down," "left" and "right."
elementName This is the name of the element on the Scene that receives the input focus.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000236_0001
String toStringO
Returns Returns the name of the ElementArea as a string. Note also that if an ElementArea object is used with the + operator to concatenate a string, the name of the ElementArea object is still returned.
Example
Figure imgf000236_0002
7.2 Scene Object
The "scene" object holds other objects to be displayed on the subscribers TV or other display device. Scenes can contain buttons, captions, input boxes, list boxes, media players, static images and tickers.
Scene Attributes parent The containing element area. Example
Figure imgf000237_0001
scene A reference to the Scene.
Example
Figure imgf000237_0002
Scene Events void onLoadO
Description
This event fires when the Scene is displayed.
Example
Figure imgf000237_0003
void onUnloadO Description
This event fires when the subscriber is being moved to another Scene. Example
Figure imgf000237_0004
void onlnitialUpdate() Description This event occurs only when the Scene is displayed for the first time. The event occurs only on the first time a Scene is displayed in a session; it allows for a one time initialization of the objects of the Scene.
Example
Figure imgf000238_0001
vo on ess on n Description
This event occurs for each Scene loaded during a session when the session ends. Example
Figure imgf000238_0002
bool onKeyPress(int kβyCode) Description
If this Scene is in focus and a key on the keyboard is pressed this event occurs, lhe default event handler updates the chaser position (keyboard focus), if needed, and fires the onClick event if the "OKAY" key was pressed. If a Boolean true is returned, the default handler does not execute.
Arguments keyCode The key value as an integer for the key that was pressed. For additional information on key values, please see section 0.
Returns
True This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that this button handled this event.
False This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that another object should handle this event. Example
Figure imgf000239_0001
boot onKeyϋp(int keyCode) Description
If this Scene is in focus and a key on the keyboard is released, this event occurs. Arguments keyCode The key value as an integer for the key that was released. For additional information on key values, please see section 0.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000239_0002
Scene Methods void setFocus(String objectName) Description
Sets the focus on the focusable object specified
Arguments objectName The name of the object that should have focus.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000239_0003
String getCurrentFocus() Description
Gets the name of the object that currently has focus.
Arguments None.
Returns The name of the object that currently has focus.
Example
Figure imgf000241_0001
void setBackground(String backgroundUrl) Description
This command changes the Scene background to the image specified by the backgroundUrl parameter.
Arguments backgroundUrl A string that is the URL location for the background image.
The URL can be relative to the AV Program directory or it can be an http path.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000241_0002
String getBackgroundUrlO Description
Gets the URL for the Scene background image. Arguments None.
Returns The URL for the background image of the Scene. Empty string if background is not an image.
Example
Figure imgf000241_0003
Figure imgf000242_0001
String toStringO
Returns Returns the name of the Scene as a string. Note also that if a
Scene object is used with the + operator to concatenate a string, the name of the Scene object is still returned.
Example
Figure imgf000243_0001
String getParameter (String parameterName) Description
Returns the value from the URL of the Program for parameterName specified. Arguments paramterName This specifies an argument contained either in the launch URL of the Scene or in the Package file for the scene.
Returns The value assigned to the parameterName specified. This return value is encoded to support all computer and network transmission standards. The decodeURIComponent() command should be used on each value returned by getParameter().
Example
Figure imgf000243_0002
8 Other Objects
8.1 Timers
The timer functionality is available globally and is not a function or property of another object. A developer does not need to create a timer object to use a timer, just write the command setlnterval(function, interval) or setTimeout(function, delay). For example, the following code executes the function UpdateTime() every 2 seconds (2000 milliseconds): setInterval(UpdateTime, 2000); setlnterval() function repeatedly executes Script at a specified interval, while setTimeout() function executes Script only once after a specified timeout interval.
Each time setlnterval() or setTimeout() is called, an identifier is returned which can be used to stop the timer by calling either clearlnterval(identifier) or clearTimeout(identifier).
A developer can use the setlnterval() if he wants to check for some kind of data update at specific time intervals. For example, he might want to check for updates to data coming from an RSS feed: var intervalld = setInterval(CheckRSSFeed, 180000)
So, every 3 minutes the RSS feed is checked until clearlnterval(intervalld) is called.
With setTimeout(), the function passed-in, executes only one time after the timeout interval expires. setTimeout() can be used if the developer wants to display a message to the subscriber when the subscriber has not performed a specific action within a certain time. For example, if the subscriber needs to enter a password and does so before the Timeout period, then the clear Timeout() stops the timer and the message is never displayed: var PWId = setTimeout(RequestPassword, 60000); while (!(PasswordEntered())) { clearTimeout(PWId); } Timer Attributes
None.
Timer Events
Timer events are not predefined. When the specified time elapses, the function specified by either the setlnterval() or the setTimeout()executes.
Timer Methods int setInterval(String func, int interval)
Description setlnterval() The specified function is executed after the interval specified. setlnterval() returns a value that can later be passed to clearlnterval() to stop the func from being repeatedly executed.
Arguments func A Script function to be periodically executed. This is the function name, not a string (do not include the parentheses). Upon executing setInterval(MyFunc(), 10000); the MyFunc function executes immediately, but only once. The correct form is: setInterval(MyFunc, 10000);
A function must have global scope to be referenced by setlnterval(). interval A positive integer between 1 and 1,073,741,823 that specifies the interval in milliseconds, between invocations of func .
Returns A identifier value that can be passed to clearlnterval() to cancel the periodic execution of func . The identifier can be any positive number, including zero, up to 4,294,967,295. If the return value is negative 1 (-1), then the setlnterval() function failed.
Example
Figure imgf000246_0001
Figure imgf000247_0001
void clearlnterval(int intervalld) Description
The clearlnterval() command stops the repeated execution of the function func that was started by setlnterval().
Arguments intervalld The value returned by the corresponding call to setlnterval().
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000248_0001
int setTimeout(Stringfunc, int delay) Description
The setTimeout() command causes the specified Script function/wm: to be executed after the delay period, given in milliseconds. setTimeout() returns an identifier value that can later be passed to the clearTimeout() to stop func from being executed.
Arguments func A Script function executed after the delay time. This is the function name not a string. Also do not include the parentheses. Upon executing setTimeout(MyFunc(), 10000); the MyFunc function executes immediately. The correct form would be: setTimeout(MyFunc, 10000);
The function must have global scope to be referenced by setTimeout(). delay A positive integer between 1 and 1,073,741,823 that specifies the delay in millisecond, before the func is executed.
Returns A timeoutld identifier value that can be passed to the clearTimeout() to cancel the execution of the function ^wnc, that is provided in the setTimeout(). The Identifier can be any positive number, including zero, up to 4,294,967,295. If the return value is negative 1 (-1), then the setTimeout() function failed.
Example
Figure imgf000249_0001
Figure imgf000250_0001
void clear Timeoutβnt timeoutld) Description
The clearTimeout() command stops the execution of the function/wnc that was specified by the setTimeout().
Arguments timeoutld The value returned by the corresponding call to setTimeout().
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000250_0002
9 Session Object
The session object provides miscellaneous functionality and utility through various objects and methods. The session object is accessed through a global object property named session. The session object provides access to the background and transient audio players, the Inactivity Timer and various session launch parameters.
9.1 Session Object Properties
AudioPlayer Object
Session Object always creates two instances of AudioPlayer Object and makes them available to the programmers via two session properties:
sessionώackgroundAudio This property provides access to the backgroundAudio AudioPlayer. Audio assets used with this player play at "background" priority.
session:transientAudio This property provides access to the transientAudio AudioPlayer. Audio assets used with this player play at "transient" priority.
A udioPlayer A ttributes
looping Boolean (true or false) - controls whether or not the audio loops at the end of the stream (default = true)
Figure imgf000251_0001
AudioPlayer Events boolean onEndOfMedia() Description
This event indicates that the background Audio player has reached the end of what it was playing. Typically this event is used to start a new audio clip after a previous one has finished.
Arguments None.
Returns
True This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that this button handled this event.
False This is the keyword for the Boolean that indicates that another object should handle this event. The default behavior is that the media (audio) that was playing loops (i.e., plays again), unless looping has been disabled, in which case it stops.
Example
Figure imgf000252_0001
AudioPlayer Methods void play (String UrI) Description
Load and play the audio media from the location specified by the URL. The URL must point to a single program transport stream (SPTS) or program stream formatted streams. The stream may contain video, but the video gets discarded. The backgroundAudio object is the lowest priority audio object.
Arguments UrI The location to find the audio media to play.
Example
Figure imgf000253_0001
void stop () Description
Stop playing the audio. Example
Figure imgf000253_0002
String getUrl () Description
Returns the URL that is the current background Audio.
Returns The URL that is currently being played as background Audio.
Example
Figure imgf000253_0003
boolean isPlaying () Description
Returns a Boolean that indicates if the background audio currently has audio focus.
Returns A Boolean string (true or false) indicates if the audio currently has audio focus and is being heard by the subscriber. Example .
Figure imgf000254_0001
String toStringO Returns Returns the name of the AudioPlayer as a string. Note also that if an AudioPlayer object is used with the + operator to concatenate a string the name of the AudioPlayer object is still returned.
Example
Figure imgf000254_0002
deviceid
String: deviceid A unique identifier for the device that is hosting the session. The device identifier is constructed using the MAC Address of the display device, the timestamp from the first time the display device accessed the AVDN system, and an obfuscation algorithm.
This method identifies a display device uniquely, enabling the applications to save personalized information without it being transferred to the next customer if the owner of the display device is changed.
Example
Figure imgf000255_0001
devicetype
String.'devicetype The device type of the hosting client device, for example
"Motorola" or "Scientific_Atlanta".
Example
Figure imgf000255_0002
ExternalScene
A special, pre-allocated Scene is available for controlling external streamers or encoders. It is accessed through the global object property named ExternalScene. The output stream of the external session bypasses Stitcher and is sent to the same target address and port that is used by the initiating AVDN session. The RTSP is used to control the external session.
The bandwidth of the external encoder must not exceed that of the initiating AVDN session bandwidth set by the Launch Method.
ExternalScene Events boolean onLoad() Description
This event indicates that the Scene is active. Arguments None.
Returns Return False or nothing to activate the default onLoad handler which, in this case, issues the ExternalScene play method. Return True to deactivate the default handler.
Example
Figure imgf000256_0001
boolean onUnload() Description
This event indicates that the Scene is inactive. Arguments None.
Returns Return False or nothing to active the default onUnload handler which, this case, issues the External Scene stop method. Return True to deactivate the default handler.
Example
Figure imgf000256_0002
boolean onKeyPress(int key) Description
Called for each user key down.
Arguments key keycode value
Returns No default handler exists.
Example
Figure imgf000256_0003
Figure imgf000257_0001
boolean onKeyUpftnt key) Description
Called for each user key up.
Arguments key keycode value
Returns No default handler exists.
Example
Figure imgf000257_0002
Figure imgf000258_0001
boolean onResponsefint code, String message) Description
This event notifies script of command status. Please note that in case of failure, typically two events are fired: one for failure and one for termination.
Arguments code 0 = Success, 1 = Failure, 2 = Terminated. message This argument is set to the empty string for the Success and
Terminated response codes. Message contains a string in one of the following formats when code is set to Failure:
"RTSP connection failed: %s", url "RTSP Describe timed out"
"RTSP Describe failure: %d %s", rfc2326 status code, rfc2326 status text
"RTSP Setup timed out"
"RTSP Setup failure: %d %s", rfc2326 status code, rfc2326 status text
"RTSP timeout"
"RTSP response: %d %s", rfc2326 status code, rfc2326 status text
Returns Return False or nothing to activate the default handler. The default handler issues the External Scene stop method if a failure code is encountered and switches to the Scene specified by the returnScene property (previous Scene by default) if the terminated code is encountered. Return True to deactivate the default handler.
Example
Figure imgf000258_0002
Figure imgf000259_0001
ExternalScenβ Methods void start (String url) Description
This method opens a connection with the external session server, creates a session, and, depending on the onLoad () event handler, potentially starts session playback.
Arguments url RTSP url of a streaming server.
Returns Void
Example
Figure imgf000259_0002
void stopO Description
This method stops playback, ends the session, closes the connection with the session server and, depending on the onResponse event handler, potentially switches Scenes.
Arguments None.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000259_0003
void play () Description
This method starts playback of RTSP stream defined by ExternalScene. start method.
Arguments None.
Example:
Figure imgf000260_0001
voidfastForward() Description
This method initiates fast playback of RTSP stream defined by ExternalScene. start method (if supported).
Arguments None.
Example:
Figure imgf000260_0002
void rewindO Description
This method initiates reverse playback of RTSP stream defined by ExternalScene. start method (if supported).
Arguments None.
Example:
Figure imgf000260_0003
void pause () Description
This method suspends playback of RTSP stream defined by ExternalScene. start method (if supported).
Arguments None.
Example:
Figure imgf000261_0001
void setParameter (String paramString) Description
This method issues a RTSP SetParameter command. The body of the command is specified by the paramString argument. May be used to forward the keystrokes to the RTSP server.
Arguments paramString This argument specifies the RTSP SetParameter message body.
This could be used, for example, to indicate the type of key event:
" KeyEvent : Up\r\nKeyCode : 104"
Example:
Figure imgf000261_0002
void setReturnScene (String SceneUrl) Description
Sets the URL of the Scene to return to when the session ends (default is previous Scene). Arguments
SceneUrl The url of the Scene to return to.
Example:
Figure imgf000262_0001
String toStringO Returns
Returns the name of the ExternalScene as a string. Note also that if an ExternalScene object is used with the + operator to concatenate a string the name of the ExternalScene object is still returned.
Example
Figure imgf000262_0002
Complete ExteernalScene Example
Figure imgf000263_0001
logoutTimeout
int: logoutTimeout Read/Write property used to set/get the value of the logoutTimeout InactivityTimer time. Value is in seconds. Example
Figure imgf000263_0002
Figure imgf000264_0001
sessionid
String:sessionid An identifier for the session that is generated by the host system. Example
Figure imgf000264_0002
warningTimeout
inUwarningTimeout Read/Write property used to set/get the value of the warningTimeout InactivityTimer time. Value is in seconds.
Example
Figure imgf000264_0003
9.2 Session Object Events void onlnactivityTimerExpired() Description
See Section 2.8 for a description of the subscriber inactivity timer. This event occurs if there has not been subscriber input activity for a time that can be specified by the session. warningTimeout property. This is to allow a developer to provide a warning to a subscriber that the session is going to terminate due to subscriber inactivity. If there is not any subscriber activity for the time specified by the session.logoutTimeout property, then the session is terminated.
Example
Figure imgf000265_0001
void onCacheFUledfint id) Description
This event occurs when the cache of an asset (e.g., a video stream) has been filled to the value that was specified by the Program method preLoadAsset() . The id parameter identifies the asset that was preloaded since the method prβLoadAsset() can be used to load multiple assets.
Arguments id The id is the identifier used to specify which preLoadAsset() call has filled its cache.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000265_0002
9.3 Session Object Methods void launchApplication(Stήng appURL) Description Change to a new Program, specified by the appURL. The AVDN system supports three types of sessions; namely, web browser-based, VOD (Video on Demand) and AVDN programming.
Arguments appURL The URL of the next Programming to load.
AV Application to AV Application
The appURL is identified as AV Application by http request for *.avml or *.avpkg extension. The appURL can be set to the absolute or relative application path. To obtain absolute path of production URL use getLaunchURL library function.
Example
Figure imgf000266_0001
AV Application to Web Application
If appURL points to web extension (* html, * htm, etc ), a new WebBrowser session is instantiated.
To mask transition visual effects, it is recommended to construct a special transition Scene with a dark or black background and appropriate text, for instance "Loading...."
Example
Figure imgf000266_0002
AV Application to VOD Application
The appURL should point to existing offering and have the following generic format: vod //moviename'assetid=<of fering id>&playtype=CONTINUE&bookmark=<bookmark value in ms> [&<V0D-vendor specific narameter set>] When the VOD streaming is ended (under error condition, by user or normally), the AV application is re-launched and the status parameters from VOD session are appended to AV application URL. This allows an AV application to retrieve the status of VOD session and process it according to application logic
Programming Context
AV Platform does not retain session context in transitions when the launchApplication method is used. Saving/retrieving the application state or the application context should be performed by application code. WebBrowser-based applications can use standard IE cookies for that purpose, while AVML -based applications can use an XMLHttp object to save/retrieve any application information representing the application state. Both application types can use similar onLoad methods in Web or AVML objects to process the information.
void tune(Sting tuneType, String tuneld) Description
Forces AV session to quit and instructs the display device to tune to a specific channel. For example, if the Mosaic application shows the tiles for broadcast channels, then by selecting some tile and pressing "Ok" button on the remote the user can tune to the channel represented by that tile. Channel numbers, channel descriptors and source identifiers will be specific to each MSO.
Arguments tuneType Legacy types "BROADCAST-CHANNEL" and "URL" could be used, however all tuning types are converted internally to "URL". tuneld String that identifies the channel or the URL to which the settop should tune.
Examples of supported tuning strings:
"tv://123", where 123 is the channel number
"tv://ESPN2", where ESPN2 is the short descriptor for the channel
"si://23057", where 23057 is the source id for the channel
"last", forces the session to exit and Settop to do a default tuning to the channel from which that session was launched
Concatenation of tuning strings
Tuning Strings can be concatenated together with a '#' separator to support multiple tuning types from a single command. For example
"tv://123#si://23057" will tune to channel 123 or source id
23057
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000268_0001
Figure imgf000269_0001
String getParameter (String parameterName) Description
Gets the parameters that were passed-in via the package or command line of the initial Scene (AVML file) of the session, which makes it easy to pass and access global parameters over multiple Scenes for the same session. This command is different from the scene. getParameter, which gets the parameters that have been passed-in via the package or the command line for this particular Scene (AVML file).
Arguments paramterName This specifies an argument contained either in the
Programming launch URL or the Package file for the Program.
Returns The value assigned to the parameterName specified. This return value is encoded to support all computer and network transmission standards. The decodeURIComponent() command should be used on each value returned by the getParameter().
Example
Figure imgf000269_0002
void preloadAsset (String assetUrl, intfillTime, int id) Description
This method is used to pre-cache the asset before playing it. The onCacheFilled event is called when an asset can be played from cache for fillTime milliseconds. Using this method can help to avoid possible lag incurred by download jitter when playing an asset for the first time.
Arguments assetUrl The url (string) of the asset to preload. fillTime An integer value equal to the length of stream content, in milliseconds, that must be in the cache before the onCacheFilled event is fired.
Id An integer id used to indicate which asset has reached the specified fill level.
Returns Void.
Example
Figure imgf000270_0001
String toStringO
Description Returns the name of the session as a string. If a session object is used with the + operator to concatenate a string, the name of the session object is still returned.
Arguments None.
Example
Figure imgf000270_0002
10 AVML Syntax
The AVML file is an XML-based file format. This section specifies the XML syntax of the AVML file format. One AVML file describes one Scene and the script associated with it.
10.1 Root Tag: <AVML>
Example
Figure imgf000271_0001
Attributes
Version: The AVML file format version.
10.2 Size and Position Settings
<Size>
Example
Figure imgf000271_0002
The size setting contains the width and height information in pixel. <Pos> Example
Figure imgf000272_0001
The position setting contains the x (left) and y (top) information in pixel.
10.3 Top level Tags
<lnitialScene>
<InitialScene> specifies the first Scene to be loaded when the Programming starts. Example
Figure imgf000272_0002
<Script>
<Script> tag contains the JavaScript-like AV script that gets executed at runtime. Example
Figure imgf000272_0003
<lnitialFocus>
<InitialFocus> indicates the first item to receive focus when the Scene is loaded. Example
Figure imgf000272_0004
<Background>
<Background> defines the Background Object for a specific Scene. Example
Figure imgf000272_0005
Figure imgf000273_0001
<Caption>
<Caption> tag defines the Caption Object in a specific Scene. Example
Figure imgf000273_0002
<Ticker>
<Ticker> tag defines the Ticker Object in a specific Scene. A ticker is similar to a Caption; however, while the ticker object is for dynamic text, the caption object is for statically bound text.
Example
Figure imgf000273_0003
Figure imgf000274_0001
<Staticlmage>
<StaticImage> tag defines the Static Image object in a specific Scene. Example
Figure imgf000274_0002
<Mediaplayer>
<Mediaplayer> tag defines a media player to play video clips. Example
Figure imgf000275_0001
<Focusable> defines if a UI object can have focus set or not, while <ChaserUp>/<ChaserDown>/<ChaserLeft>/<ChaserRight> defines when an arrow key is pressed and the next UI object to have focus set (i.e., chaser).
<Button>
<Button> tag defines a button control. The button can be either text-based or image- based. If no URL is given, the BackgroundColor color is painted on the button.
Example
Figure imgf000275_0002
Figure imgf000276_0001
Figure imgf000277_0001
Figure imgf000278_0001
<lnputBox>
<InputBox> tag defines the Input Text Edit Object in a specific Scene. Example
Figure imgf000278_0002
Figure imgf000279_0001
<ElementArea>
<ElementArea> tag defines a place holder where Scenes can be inserted on a Scene. Example
Figure imgf000279_0002
<ListBox>
<ListBox> tag defines the ListBox Object in a specific Scene. A ListBox object contains a number of list items. If a URL is not given for a ListBoxItem state, the BackgroundColor for that state is displayed. A typical ListBox UI Object is specified as shown here:
Example
Figure imgf000279_0003
Figure imgf000280_0001
Figure imgf000281_0001
Figure imgf000283_0001
10.4 Sample AVML file
A sample XML format AVML file is shown here in this next example: Example
Figure imgf000283_0002
Figure imgf000284_0001
Figure imgf000285_0001
Figure imgf000286_0001
Figure imgf000287_0001
Figure imgf000288_0001
Figure imgf000289_0001
Figure imgf000290_0001
Figure imgf000291_0001
Figure imgf000292_0001
Figure imgf000293_0001
11 Appendix A.1 Caption Clock format
%a Abbreviated weekday name
%A Full weekday name
%b Abbreviated month name
%B Full month name
%c Date and time representation appropriate for locale
%d Day of month as decimal number (01 - 31)
%H Hour in 24-hour format (00 - 23)
%I Hour in 12-hour format (01 - 12)
%j Day of year as decimal number (001 - 366)
%m Month as decimal number (01 - 12)
%M Minute as decimal number (00 - 59)
%p Current locale's A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-hour clock
%S Second as decimal number (00 - 59)
%U Week of year as decimal number, with Sunday as first day of week (00 - 53)
%w Weekday as decimal number (0 - 6; Sunday is 0)
%W Week of year as decimal number, with Monday as first day of week (00 - 53)
%x Date representation for current locale
%X Time representation for current locale
%y Year without century, as decimal number (00 - 99) %Y Year with century, as decimal number
%z, %Z Either the time-zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry settings; no characters if time zone is unknown
%% Percent sign
12 Appendix A.2 XML HTTP Status List
XMLHttp Status List
Figure imgf000296_0001
Figure imgf000297_0001
Figure imgf000298_0001
Figure imgf000299_0001

Claims

What is claimed is:
1. A tool for creating interactive MPEG content, the tool comprising: an editor having a scene window allowing a user to create a scene based upon placement of MPEG objects within the scene window; an object tool bar allowing a user to add an MPEG object having at least one associated MPEG element and a corresponding method to the scene; and a format processor for processing the scene into a format including display position information of each MPEG object so as to form a complete MPEG video frame.
2. The tool according to claim 1 wherein when an MPEG object is placed within the scene window, the editor snaps the resource to an MPEG macroblock boundary.
3. The tool according to claim 1, wherein when an MPEG object is added properties associated with the MPEG object are displayed.
4. The tool according to claim 3, wherein the selected properties are user modifiable.
5. The tool according to claim 4, wherein a user can create a user definable script if an object has a plurality of states.
6. The tool according to claim 5, wherein different MPEG video elements can be assigned to each state.
7. The tool according to claim 5, wherein different MPEG frames can be assigned to each state.
8. The tool according to claim 7 wherein the MPEG object represents a button.
9. The tool according to claim 1, wherein after a scene is defined, the editor creates an XML-based output file.
10. A tool for creating interactive MPEG content, the tool comprising: a stitcher for receiving MPEG elements from multiple MPEG objects, arranging the MPEG elements in scan order according to content layout information to form an MPEG video frame, and a multiplexor for outputting the MPEG video frame.
11. The tool according to claim 10 further comprising: a processor for maintaining the content layout information and based upon a received signal over a network from a client device obtaining a new MPEG element causing the stitcher to insert the MPEG element into a subsequent MPEG video frame.
12. A method for producing interactive MPEG content for display on a client device, the method comprising: accessing one or more MPEG objects wherein an MPEG object has associated visual MPEG content and at least one associated method; implementing the method associated with the MPEG object producing an output; in response to the output, stitching the visual MPEG content with other MPEG content to form a sequence of video frames.
13. The method according to claim 12 wherein the method allows for the maintenance of state information.
14. The method according to claim 12, wherein the method is implemented in response to a received signal from the user device.
15. An MPEG object data structure on a computer readable storage medium for use with a computer in communication with a client device for providing interactive MPEG video to the client device, the MPEG object data structure comprising: an MPEG object interface defining data received by the MPEG object and data output by the MPEG object; a plurality of MPEG video elements wherein each element relates to a different MPEG object state; and a computer method for receiving input through the MPEG object interface from the client device indicative of an MPEG object state and in response outputting the MPEG video element related to the MPEG object state indicated in the input through the MPEG object interface.
16. An MPEG object data structure according to claim 16 wherein the MPEG video elements are located on a separate computer readable storage medium and the MPEG object data structure further comprises: a computer method for retrieving the MPEG video elements from the separate computer readable storage medium.
17. An MPEG object data structure according to claim 15 further comprising: a stitching directive including a pointer for use by a stitcher that points to a current
MPEG video frame and is incremented with each new MPEG video frame.
18. An MPEG object data structure according to claim 16 further comprising: a method for synchronizing audio data with each MPEG video frame.
19. An MPEG object data structure on a computer readable storage medium for use with a computer in communication with a client device for providing interactive MPEG video to the client device, the MPEG object data structure comprising: an MPEG object interface defining data received by the MPEG object and data output by the MPEG object; a computer method for receiving input through the MPEG object interface from the client device indicative of a request for streaming MPEG video content; a computer method for requesting the streaming MPEG video content from a source external to the computer; and a computer method for outputting the MPEG video content through the MPEG object interface.
20. An MPEG object data structure according to claim 19, further comprising: a computer method for requesting streaming audio content from a source external to the computer.
21. An MPEG object data structure according to claim 20 wherein the audio content is MPEG audio content.
22. An MPEG object data structure according to claim 19 wherein the computer method for outputting the MPEG video content outputs the MPEG video content to a stitcher.
23. An MPEG object data structure according to claim 22, wherein the computer method for outputting also outputs size information for the MPEG video content.
24. A method for preparing MPEG video content for use in an interactive communications network, the method comprising: maintaining a current state of an MPEG object within a memory; receiving a request for a change in state of the MPEG object from a client device within the interactive communications network; accessing an MPEG element associated with the MPEG object and representative of the change in state; and stitching the MPEG element representative of the change in state into a data sequence representative of an MPEG frame based in part on the current state of the MPEG object.
25. The method according to claim 24, further comprising: establishing an interactive session with a client device associated with a display.
26. The method according to claim 24, wherein the MPEG object includes one or more computer methods.
27. The method according to claim 24 further comprising: forwarding the MPEG frame to the client device requesting the change in state
28. The method according to claim 24 further comprising: obtaining a mark-up language file providing state information for an MPEG object and position information about one or more MPEG elements representative of a state.
29. The method according to claim 28, wherein the step of stitching is based in part upon the position information within the MPEG frame for the MPEG element.
30. The method according to claim 24, further comprising: providing an MPEG object to from a first session processor to a second session processor.
PCT/US2008/000450 2007-01-12 2008-01-11 Mpeg objects and systems and methods for using mpeg objects WO2008088772A2 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP08705578A EP2116051A2 (en) 2007-01-12 2008-01-11 Mpeg objects and systems and methods for using mpeg objects

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US88474407P 2007-01-12 2007-01-12
US88477207P 2007-01-12 2007-01-12
US88477307P 2007-01-12 2007-01-12
US60/884,772 2007-01-12
US60/884,773 2007-01-12
US60/884,744 2007-01-12

Publications (3)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2008088772A2 WO2008088772A2 (en) 2008-07-24
WO2008088772A9 true WO2008088772A9 (en) 2008-12-31
WO2008088772A3 WO2008088772A3 (en) 2009-06-18

Family

ID=39596336

Family Applications (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2008/000419 WO2008088752A2 (en) 2007-01-12 2008-01-11 System and method for encoding scrolling raster images
PCT/US2008/000400 WO2008088741A2 (en) 2007-01-12 2008-01-11 Interactive encoded content system including object models for viewing on a remote device
PCT/US2008/000450 WO2008088772A2 (en) 2007-01-12 2008-01-11 Mpeg objects and systems and methods for using mpeg objects

Family Applications Before (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2008/000419 WO2008088752A2 (en) 2007-01-12 2008-01-11 System and method for encoding scrolling raster images
PCT/US2008/000400 WO2008088741A2 (en) 2007-01-12 2008-01-11 Interactive encoded content system including object models for viewing on a remote device

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (4) US8155202B2 (en)
EP (5) EP3145200A1 (en)
HK (2) HK1134729A1 (en)
WO (3) WO2008088752A2 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9338479B2 (en) 2010-07-30 2016-05-10 Guest Tek Interactive Entertainment Ltd. Virtualizing user interface and set top box functionality while providing media over network
US9800939B2 (en) 2009-04-16 2017-10-24 Guest Tek Interactive Entertainment Ltd. Virtual desktop services with available applications customized according to user type
US10356467B2 (en) 2010-01-15 2019-07-16 Guest Tek Interactive Entertainment Ltd. Virtual user interface including playback control provided over computer network for client device playing media from another source

Families Citing this family (90)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN1867068A (en) 1998-07-14 2006-11-22 联合视频制品公司 Client-server based interactive television program guide system with remote server recording
KR20190096450A (en) 2000-10-11 2019-08-19 로비 가이드스, 인크. Systems and methods for delivering media content
US7944953B2 (en) 2002-04-03 2011-05-17 Tvworks, Llc Method and apparatus for transmitting data in a data stream
US7493646B2 (en) 2003-01-30 2009-02-17 United Video Properties, Inc. Interactive television systems with digital video recording and adjustable reminders
US8074248B2 (en) 2005-07-26 2011-12-06 Activevideo Networks, Inc. System and method for providing video content associated with a source image to a television in a communication network
EP3145200A1 (en) 2007-01-12 2017-03-22 ActiveVideo Networks, Inc. Mpeg objects and systems and methods for using mpeg objects
US20080201736A1 (en) * 2007-01-12 2008-08-21 Ictv, Inc. Using Triggers with Video for Interactive Content Identification
US9826197B2 (en) 2007-01-12 2017-11-21 Activevideo Networks, Inc. Providing television broadcasts over a managed network and interactive content over an unmanaged network to a client device
US20090025027A1 (en) 2007-07-20 2009-01-22 Michael Craner Systems & methods for allocating bandwidth in switched digital video systems based on interest
US10070164B2 (en) 2008-01-10 2018-09-04 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Predictive allocation of multimedia server resources
EP2086236A1 (en) * 2008-01-31 2009-08-05 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Method and system for accessing applications
US8281377B1 (en) 2008-04-15 2012-10-02 Desktone, Inc. Remote access manager for virtual computing services
EP2304953A4 (en) * 2008-06-25 2012-11-28 Activevideo Networks Inc Providing television broadcasts over a managed network and interactive content over an unmanaged network to a client device
US8411754B2 (en) * 2008-11-10 2013-04-02 Activevideo Networks, Inc. System, method, and computer program product for translating an element of a static encoded image in the encoded domain
US10063934B2 (en) 2008-11-25 2018-08-28 Rovi Technologies Corporation Reducing unicast session duration with restart TV
US8904470B2 (en) * 2008-12-03 2014-12-02 At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp Apparatus and method for managing media distribution
JP5675765B2 (en) * 2009-03-17 2015-02-25 アクティブビデオ ネットワークス, インコーポレイテッド Apparatus and method for on-demand video syndication
US8875129B2 (en) * 2010-02-05 2014-10-28 Tripwire, Inc. Systems and methods for monitoring and alerting events that virtual machine software produces in a virtual infrastructure
US8566823B2 (en) 2010-02-05 2013-10-22 Tripwire, Inc. Systems and methods for triggering scripts based upon an alert within a virtual infrastructure
US8868987B2 (en) * 2010-02-05 2014-10-21 Tripwire, Inc. Systems and methods for visual correlation of log events, configuration changes and conditions producing alerts in a virtual infrastructure
US20110219308A1 (en) * 2010-03-02 2011-09-08 Twentieth Century Fox Film Corporation Pre-processing and encoding media content
US10264305B2 (en) * 2010-03-02 2019-04-16 Twentieth Century Fox Film Corporation Delivery of encoded media content
US10339570B2 (en) 2010-04-21 2019-07-02 Fox Entertainment Group, Inc. Customized billboard website advertisements
US8584256B2 (en) 2010-04-21 2013-11-12 Fox Entertainment Group, Inc. Digital delivery system and user interface for enabling the digital delivery of media content
EP2403247A1 (en) * 2010-06-30 2012-01-04 British Telecommunications public limited company Transmission of visual tag motions in a video signal
KR101700365B1 (en) 2010-09-17 2017-02-14 삼성전자주식회사 Method for providing media-content relation information, device, server, and storage medium thereof
US9014269B2 (en) 2010-09-30 2015-04-21 General Instrument Corporation Method and apparatus for managing bit rate
KR20130138263A (en) 2010-10-14 2013-12-18 액티브비디오 네트웍스, 인코포레이티드 Streaming digital video between video devices using a cable television system
US20120226976A1 (en) * 2011-03-03 2012-09-06 Bob Wolter Scroll-based serialized book reader
EP2695388B1 (en) 2011-04-07 2017-06-07 ActiveVideo Networks, Inc. Reduction of latency in video distribution networks using adaptive bit rates
US8542934B2 (en) * 2011-05-18 2013-09-24 Microsoft Corporation Transform space difference compression
US9740377B1 (en) 2011-06-06 2017-08-22 Vuemix, Inc. Auxiliary information data exchange within a video environment
US9172982B1 (en) 2011-06-06 2015-10-27 Vuemix, Inc. Audio selection from a multi-video environment
US9077578B1 (en) 2011-06-06 2015-07-07 Vuemix, Inc. Scalable real-time video compositing systems and methods
US8352626B1 (en) 2011-06-06 2013-01-08 Vyumix, Inc. Program selection from within a plurality of active videos
US9219945B1 (en) * 2011-06-16 2015-12-22 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Embedding content of personal media in a portion of a frame of streaming media indicated by a frame identifier
US20130101014A1 (en) * 2011-10-25 2013-04-25 Microsoft Corporation Layered Screen Video Encoding
US9332271B2 (en) 2011-11-03 2016-05-03 Cisco Technology, Inc. Utilizing a search scheme for screen content video coding
US9153207B2 (en) 2011-11-03 2015-10-06 Cisco Technology, Inc. Utilizing scrolling detection for screen content encoding
US9262986B2 (en) 2011-12-07 2016-02-16 Cisco Technology, Inc. Reference frame management for screen content video coding using hash or checksum functions
US8805418B2 (en) 2011-12-23 2014-08-12 United Video Properties, Inc. Methods and systems for performing actions based on location-based rules
US10409445B2 (en) 2012-01-09 2019-09-10 Activevideo Networks, Inc. Rendering of an interactive lean-backward user interface on a television
US8325821B1 (en) 2012-02-08 2012-12-04 Vyumix, Inc. Video transcoder stream multiplexing systems and methods
US9467305B2 (en) 2012-03-07 2016-10-11 Vmware, Inc. Multitenant access to multiple desktops on host machine partitions in a service provider network
US9503510B2 (en) * 2012-03-10 2016-11-22 Headwater Partners Ii Llc Content distribution based on a value metric
US9800945B2 (en) 2012-04-03 2017-10-24 Activevideo Networks, Inc. Class-based intelligent multiplexing over unmanaged networks
US9123084B2 (en) 2012-04-12 2015-09-01 Activevideo Networks, Inc. Graphical application integration with MPEG objects
US10699361B2 (en) * 2012-11-21 2020-06-30 Ati Technologies Ulc Method and apparatus for enhanced processing of three dimensional (3D) graphics data
US9633358B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-04-25 Knowledgevision Systems Incorporated Interactive presentations with integrated tracking systems
WO2014145921A1 (en) 2013-03-15 2014-09-18 Activevideo Networks, Inc. A multiple-mode system and method for providing user selectable video content
US9716737B2 (en) 2013-05-08 2017-07-25 Qualcomm Incorporated Video streaming in a wireless communication system
US9326047B2 (en) 2013-06-06 2016-04-26 Activevideo Networks, Inc. Overlay rendering of user interface onto source video
US9219922B2 (en) 2013-06-06 2015-12-22 Activevideo Networks, Inc. System and method for exploiting scene graph information in construction of an encoded video sequence
US9294785B2 (en) 2013-06-06 2016-03-22 Activevideo Networks, Inc. System and method for exploiting scene graph information in construction of an encoded video sequence
CN105324746B (en) * 2013-06-19 2019-08-13 索尼公司 Display control apparatus, display control method and program
US10721530B2 (en) 2013-07-29 2020-07-21 Koninklijke Kpn N.V. Providing tile video streams to a client
US9253158B2 (en) 2013-08-23 2016-02-02 Vmware, Inc. Remote access manager for virtual computing services
JP6692087B2 (en) * 2013-12-27 2020-05-13 サン パテント トラスト Delivery method and system
US9854258B2 (en) * 2014-01-06 2017-12-26 Disney Enterprises, Inc. Video quality through compression-aware graphics layout
US10033825B2 (en) * 2014-02-21 2018-07-24 Knowledgevision Systems Incorporated Slice-and-stitch approach to editing media (video or audio) for multimedia online presentations
US10257316B2 (en) * 2014-03-30 2019-04-09 Cisco Technology, Inc. Monitoring of node.js applications
US9788029B2 (en) 2014-04-25 2017-10-10 Activevideo Networks, Inc. Intelligent multiplexing using class-based, multi-dimensioned decision logic for managed networks
US20150350295A1 (en) * 2014-05-28 2015-12-03 Joel Solomon Isaacson System And Method For Loading Assets During Remote Execution
WO2015197818A1 (en) 2014-06-27 2015-12-30 Koninklijke Kpn N.V. Hevc-tiled video streaming
WO2015197815A1 (en) 2014-06-27 2015-12-30 Koninklijke Kpn N.V. Determining a region of interest on the basis of a hevc-tiled video stream
US20160112707A1 (en) * 2014-10-15 2016-04-21 Intel Corporation Policy-based image encoding
US9955159B2 (en) * 2014-10-31 2018-04-24 Google Llc Multi-video decoding with input switching
US10348826B2 (en) * 2014-11-17 2019-07-09 Red Hat, Inc. Pattern-based object serving
KR101844032B1 (en) * 2014-12-26 2018-05-14 주식회사 케이티 Method for sending video in region of interest from panoramic-video, server and device
US10091511B2 (en) * 2015-01-05 2018-10-02 Getgo, Inc. Efficient video block matching
US9918114B2 (en) 2015-06-01 2018-03-13 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Transmission of applications with content
WO2017029400A1 (en) 2015-08-20 2017-02-23 Koninklijke Kpn N.V. Forming one or more tile streams on the basis of one or more video streams
US10313765B2 (en) * 2015-09-04 2019-06-04 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Selective communication of a vector graphics format version of a video content item
WO2017060423A1 (en) 2015-10-08 2017-04-13 Koninklijke Kpn N.V. Enhancing a region of interest in video frames of a video stream
US9866862B2 (en) * 2016-03-18 2018-01-09 Google Llc Motion vector reference selection through reference frame buffer tracking
US10951874B2 (en) * 2016-09-02 2021-03-16 Mediatek Inc. Incremental quality delivery and compositing processing
US20180109577A1 (en) * 2016-10-13 2018-04-19 Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. Systems and methods for enabling communications associated with digital media distribution
CN108282635B (en) * 2018-02-11 2020-11-10 中国联合网络通信集团有限公司 Panoramic image generation method and system and Internet of vehicles big data service platform
CN108429803B (en) * 2018-03-08 2021-10-26 南京坚卓软件科技有限公司 User design data communication device of electronic commerce website and communication method thereof
WO2020113229A1 (en) * 2018-11-30 2020-06-04 Warner Bros. Entertainment Inc. Partial frame replacement enabling multiple versions in an integrated video package
CN109847358A (en) * 2018-12-24 2019-06-07 苏州蜗牛数字科技股份有限公司 A method of reducing scene pixel filling rate
US10558824B1 (en) 2019-02-04 2020-02-11 S2 Systems Corporation Application remoting using network vector rendering
US10552639B1 (en) 2019-02-04 2020-02-04 S2 Systems Corporation Local isolator application with cohesive application-isolation interface
US10452868B1 (en) 2019-02-04 2019-10-22 S2 Systems Corporation Web browser remoting using network vector rendering
US11880422B2 (en) 2019-02-04 2024-01-23 Cloudflare, Inc. Theft prevention for sensitive information
US11366823B2 (en) * 2019-03-15 2022-06-21 Unity Technologies Sf Method and system for transforming and delivering digital assets over a network
US11523185B2 (en) 2019-06-19 2022-12-06 Koninklijke Kpn N.V. Rendering video stream in sub-area of visible display area
CN111669622A (en) * 2020-06-10 2020-09-15 北京奇艺世纪科技有限公司 Method and device for determining default play relationship of videos and electronic equipment
CN111669626A (en) * 2020-06-10 2020-09-15 北京奇艺世纪科技有限公司 Method and device for determining default play relationship of videos and electronic equipment
CN112004116B (en) * 2020-08-26 2021-08-24 北京字节跳动网络技术有限公司 Method, device, electronic equipment and medium for determining object adding mode

Family Cites Families (841)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CA682776A (en) 1964-03-24 Zenith Radio Corporation Subscription television system
US3997718A (en) 1973-02-01 1976-12-14 The Magnavox Company Premium interactive communication system
US3934079A (en) 1973-10-26 1976-01-20 Jerrold Electronics Corporation Bilateral communications system for distributing commerical and premium video signaling on an accountable basis
US4002843A (en) 1973-12-17 1977-01-11 Rackman Michael I Tamper-proof two-way cable system
US3889050A (en) 1974-04-11 1975-06-10 Gte Sylvania Inc Subscription television system and switching station therefor
GB1504112A (en) 1976-03-17 1978-03-15 Ibm Interactive enquiry systems
JPS51115718A (en) 1975-02-24 1976-10-12 Pioneer Electronic Corp Bi-directional catv system
US4077006A (en) 1975-03-14 1978-02-28 Victor Nicholson Bidirectional unicable switching system
GB1554411A (en) 1975-08-09 1979-10-17 Communications Patents Ltd Control systems
US4253114A (en) 1976-04-08 1981-02-24 Twin County Trans-Video Inc. High security subscription television system employing real time control of subscriber's program reception
US4081831A (en) 1976-04-08 1978-03-28 Twin County Trans-Video, Inc. High security subscription television system employing real time control of subscriber's program reception
US4032972A (en) 1976-06-23 1977-06-28 Idr, Inc. Piggy back row grabbing system
JPS534612A (en) 1976-06-30 1978-01-17 Fuji Kagaku Shikogyo Endless ribbon
US4145720A (en) 1976-07-22 1979-03-20 Morton Weintraub Remote control
US4107735A (en) 1977-04-19 1978-08-15 R. D. Percy & Company Television audience survey system providing feedback of cumulative survey results to individual television viewers
US4107734A (en) 1977-01-31 1978-08-15 R. D. Percy & Company Television viewer reaction determining system
FR2386211A1 (en) 1977-03-31 1978-10-27 Europ Teletransmission DIGITAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
US4308554A (en) 1977-04-19 1981-12-29 R. D. Percy & Company Television viewer reaction determining system
DE2807986A1 (en) 1978-02-22 1979-08-30 Hertz Inst Heinrich SYSTEM FOR INTERACTIVE CABLE TV
US4264924A (en) 1978-03-03 1981-04-28 Freeman Michael J Dedicated channel interactive cable television system
US4247106A (en) 1978-04-12 1981-01-27 Jerrold Electronics Corporation System arrangement for distribution and use of video games
US4222068A (en) 1978-11-02 1980-09-09 American Television And Communications Corporation Subscription television apparatus and methods
JPS5571382A (en) 1978-11-24 1980-05-29 Hitachi Ltd Buffer memory dispersive arrangement-type picture sound transmission system
US4860379A (en) 1979-05-18 1989-08-22 General Instrument Corporation Data communications system
US4264925A (en) 1979-08-13 1981-04-28 Michael J. Freeman Interactive cable television system
CA1142244A (en) 1979-08-22 1983-03-01 Eric J. Gargini Wired broadcasting system with subscriber controlled switched programme selection
US4350980A (en) 1980-02-21 1982-09-21 Energy Optics, Inc. Electric meter consumption and demand communicator
JPS57500537A (en) 1980-03-31 1982-03-25
JPS56152582A (en) 1980-04-25 1981-11-26 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Electrodeposited grindstone
DE3022725A1 (en) 1980-06-18 1981-12-24 Licentia Patent-Verwaltungs-Gmbh, 6000 Frankfurt SERVICE INTEGRATED MESSAGE TRANSMISSION AND MEDIATION SYSTEM
NL8006976A (en) 1980-12-22 1982-07-16 Delta Kabel Bv SWITCHING SYSTEM.
US4823386A (en) 1981-04-02 1989-04-18 Texscan Corporation Addressable subscriber cable television system
US4475123A (en) 1981-04-02 1984-10-02 Theta-Com., Division Of Texscan Addressable subscriber cable television system
US4491983A (en) 1981-05-14 1985-01-01 Times Fiber Communications, Inc. Information distribution system
US4408225A (en) 1981-07-06 1983-10-04 Zenith Radio Corporation Subscription television decoder
JPS5819087A (en) 1981-07-24 1983-02-03 Pioneer Electronic Corp Data in catv system
US4965825A (en) 1981-11-03 1990-10-23 The Personalized Mass Media Corporation Signal processing apparatus and methods
US4466017A (en) 1981-12-23 1984-08-14 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Sync suppression scrambling of television signals for subscription TV
US4471380A (en) 1982-03-15 1984-09-11 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Scrambling and descrambling of television signals for subscription TV
US4450477A (en) 1982-03-31 1984-05-22 Lovett Bruce E Television information system
US4509073A (en) 1982-04-29 1985-04-02 Packet Technologies, Inc. Two-way cable-television system
US4533948A (en) 1982-04-30 1985-08-06 General Instrument Corporation CATV Communication system
US4484217A (en) 1982-05-11 1984-11-20 Telease, Inc. Method and system for remote reporting, particularly for pay television billing
EP0094794B1 (en) 1982-05-14 1992-04-22 Communications Patents Limited Communications system
US4507680A (en) 1982-06-22 1985-03-26 Freeman Michael J One way interactive multisubscriber communication system
IE54171B1 (en) 1982-06-22 1989-07-05 Univ Glasgow Device for introducing nutrients and/or therapeutic materials into ruminant animals
FR2529739A1 (en) 1982-06-30 1984-01-06 Visiodis Sa Cabled teledistribution network.
US4554581A (en) 1982-12-20 1985-11-19 Zenith Radio Corporation STV Decoder with improved data signal recognition capability
US4523228A (en) 1983-02-15 1985-06-11 Scientific Atlanta Inc. Sync suppression scrambling of television signals for subscription TV
US4567517A (en) 1983-02-15 1986-01-28 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Descrambler for sync-suppressed TV signals
US4625235A (en) 1983-05-19 1986-11-25 Westinghouse Electric Corp. Remote control switching of television sources
US4506387A (en) 1983-05-25 1985-03-19 Walter Howard F Programming-on-demand cable system and method
US4571615A (en) 1983-06-10 1986-02-18 General Instrument Corporation Timing generator for sync suppressed television signals
US4562465A (en) 1983-06-14 1985-12-31 General Instrument Corporation Adaptive video descrambling system
US4633462A (en) 1983-07-18 1986-12-30 The Board Of Trustees Of The University Of Illinois Multiple access communication on a CATV reverse channel
JPS6054324A (en) 1983-09-05 1985-03-28 Noda Shiyokukin Kogyo Kk Production of antiviral agent
JPS6055022A (en) 1983-09-07 1985-03-29 Sunstar Giken Kk Polyurethane resin composition
US4709418A (en) 1983-09-14 1987-11-24 British Telecommunications Public Limited Company Wideband cable network
US4553161A (en) 1983-12-09 1985-11-12 Zenith Electronics Corporation Upstream data packet time slot synchronization with downstream VBI for two-way CATV system
US4614970A (en) 1983-12-13 1986-09-30 U.S. Computer Systems Descrambler apparatus
US4682360A (en) 1983-12-22 1987-07-21 Frederiksen Jeffrey E Video transmission system
US4573072A (en) 1984-03-21 1986-02-25 Actv Inc. Method for expanding interactive CATV displayable choices for a given channel capacity
US4602279A (en) 1984-03-21 1986-07-22 Actv, Inc. Method for providing targeted profile interactive CATV displays
JPS60185684U (en) 1984-05-18 1985-12-09 ブラザー工業株式会社 Movement guide device for carriage drive unit in knitting machine
US4754426A (en) 1984-05-31 1988-06-28 American Television & Communications Corporation System for controlling communications on a cable television network
JPS60263590A (en) 1984-06-11 1985-12-27 Sumitomo Electric Ind Ltd Picture signal transmitting system
JPH0738719B2 (en) 1984-08-20 1995-04-26 パイオニア株式会社 Channel setting device for CATV terminal
JPS61139176A (en) 1984-12-10 1986-06-26 Pioneer Electronic Corp Audio visual control device of catv
US4616263A (en) 1985-02-11 1986-10-07 Gte Corporation Video subsystem for a hybrid videotex facility
US4941040A (en) 1985-04-29 1990-07-10 Cableshare, Inc. Cable television system selectively distributing pre-recorded video and audio messages
CA1284211C (en) 1985-04-29 1991-05-14 Terrence Henry Pocock Cable television system selectively distributing pre-recorder video and audio messages
US4760442A (en) 1985-07-10 1988-07-26 American Telephone And Telegraph Company, At&T Bell Laboratories Wideband digital signal distribution system
US4706121B1 (en) 1985-07-12 1993-12-14 Insight Telecast, Inc. Tv schedule system and process
US4695880A (en) 1985-07-30 1987-09-22 Postron Corp. Electronic information dissemination system
DE3528252A1 (en) 1985-08-07 1987-02-12 Standard Elektrik Lorenz Ag FIBER OPTICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM FOR BROADBAND SIGNALS
US4889369A (en) 1985-09-16 1989-12-26 Albrecht David E Adapter fitting
US4789863A (en) 1985-10-02 1988-12-06 Bush Thomas A Pay per view entertainment system
US4763317A (en) 1985-12-13 1988-08-09 American Telephone And Telegraph Company, At&T Bell Laboratories Digital communication network architecture for providing universal information services
US4706285A (en) 1985-12-24 1987-11-10 Rca Corporation Automatic gain control of a scrambled video signal
US4805134A (en) 1986-01-09 1989-02-14 International Business Machines Corporation Electronic system for accessing graphical and textual information
US4670904A (en) 1986-01-15 1987-06-02 Rca Corporation System for processing a scrambled video signal
US4591906A (en) 1986-02-12 1986-05-27 Morales Garza Fernando Wireless transmission from the television set to the television station
US4876592A (en) 1986-03-10 1989-10-24 Henry Von Kohorn System for merchandising and the evaluation of responses to broadcast transmissions
US4718086A (en) 1986-03-27 1988-01-05 Rca Corporation AGC in sound channel of system for processing a scrambled video signal
US4769833A (en) 1986-03-31 1988-09-06 American Telephone And Telegraph Company Wideband switching system
JPS62264778A (en) 1986-05-12 1987-11-17 Toshiba Corp Agc circuit
US5177604A (en) 1986-05-14 1993-01-05 Radio Telcom & Technology, Inc. Interactive television and data transmission system
US4750036A (en) 1986-05-14 1988-06-07 Radio Telcom & Technology, Inc. Interactive television and data transmission system
USRE35314E (en) 1986-05-20 1996-08-20 Atari Games Corporation Multi-player, multi-character cooperative play video game with independent player entry and departure
JPS62290219A (en) 1986-06-10 1987-12-17 Hitachi Ltd Two-way optical transmission network
US4749992B1 (en) 1986-07-03 1996-06-11 Total Energy Management Consul Utility monitoring and control system
JPS6333980A (en) 1986-07-29 1988-02-13 Sony Corp Video display device
US4864613A (en) 1986-11-10 1989-09-05 General Instrument Corporation Broadband converter/descrambler interface for cable TV
US4937821A (en) 1987-01-27 1990-06-26 Readtronics Pipeline information delivery system
JP2577736B2 (en) 1987-04-22 1997-02-05 ミハル通信株式会社 Signal transmission method between center and terminal in television co-listening system
US4816905A (en) 1987-04-30 1989-03-28 Gte Laboratories Incorporated & Gte Service Corporation Telecommunication system with video and audio frames
US4827253A (en) 1987-05-18 1989-05-02 Dubner Computer Systems, Inc. Video compositing using a software linear keyer
JPS647791A (en) 1987-06-30 1989-01-11 Nec Corp Multiscreen video conference method and device therefor
US4847698A (en) 1987-07-16 1989-07-11 Actv, Inc. Interactive television system for providing full motion synched compatible audio/visual displays
US4847699A (en) 1987-07-16 1989-07-11 Actv, Inc. Method for providing an interactive full motion synched compatible audio/visual television display
US4847700A (en) 1987-07-16 1989-07-11 Actv, Inc. Interactive television system for providing full motion synched compatible audio/visual displays from transmitted television signals
US5113496A (en) 1987-08-04 1992-05-12 Mccalley Karl W Bus interconnection structure with redundancy linking plurality of groups of processors, with servers for each group mounted on chassis
US5195092A (en) 1987-08-04 1993-03-16 Telaction Corporation Interactive multimedia presentation & communication system
US5191410A (en) 1987-08-04 1993-03-02 Telaction Corporation Interactive multimedia presentation and communications system
US4792849A (en) 1987-08-04 1988-12-20 Telaction Corporation Digital interactive communication system
US4829372A (en) 1987-08-20 1989-05-09 Telaction Corporation Presentation player
US5208665A (en) 1987-08-20 1993-05-04 Telaction Corporation Presentation player for an interactive digital communication system
US4807031A (en) 1987-10-20 1989-02-21 Interactive Systems, Incorporated Interactive video method and apparatus
US4918516A (en) 1987-10-26 1990-04-17 501 Actv, Inc. Closed circuit television system having seamless interactive television programming and expandable user participation
US5136411A (en) 1987-12-11 1992-08-04 General Instrument Corporation Dynamically responsive CATV system with shared fiber optic link
US4829558A (en) 1988-01-19 1989-05-09 Peac Media Research, Inc. System and device for data transmission, and related method
US4912760A (en) 1988-03-10 1990-03-27 Scientific Atlanta, Inc. Off-premises cable television channel interdiction method and apparatus
GB8806111D0 (en) 1988-03-15 1988-04-13 British Telecomm Television networks
US5487066A (en) 1988-03-21 1996-01-23 First Pacific Networks, Inc. Distributed intelligence network using time and frequency multiplexing
US5003384A (en) 1988-04-01 1991-03-26 Scientific Atlanta, Inc. Set-top interface transactions in an impulse pay per view television system
US5058160A (en) 1988-04-29 1991-10-15 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. In-band controller
US4924498A (en) 1988-04-29 1990-05-08 Scientific Atlanta, Inc. Method and apparatus for improving video scrambling and employing split snyc pulses
US5142575A (en) 1988-04-29 1992-08-25 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Method and apparatus for improving video scrambling and employing split sync pulses
US4848698A (en) 1988-06-02 1989-07-18 Newell Research Corporation Method for writing and means for reading position-indicating markers on tape
US4995078A (en) 1988-06-09 1991-02-19 Monslow H Vincent Television broadcast system for selective transmission of viewer-chosen programs at viewer-requested times
US4890320A (en) 1988-06-09 1989-12-26 Monslow H Vincent Television broadcast system for selective transmission of viewer-chosen programs at viewer-requested times
US4905094A (en) 1988-06-30 1990-02-27 Telaction Corporation System for audio/video presentation
US4922532A (en) 1988-07-29 1990-05-01 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Sync suppression scrambling and descrambling of television signals for subscription TV
JP3002471B2 (en) 1988-08-19 2000-01-24 株式会社日立製作所 Program distribution device
JPH0830426B2 (en) 1988-08-23 1996-03-27 株式会社小松製作所 Engine output control method based on shoe slip
US4924303A (en) 1988-09-06 1990-05-08 Kenneth Dunlop Method and apparatus for providing interactive retrieval of TV still frame images and audio segments
US4903126A (en) 1989-02-10 1990-02-20 Kassatly Salim A Method and apparatus for tv broadcasting
US4975771A (en) 1989-02-10 1990-12-04 Kassatly Salim A Method and apparatus for TV broadcasting
JPH02108386A (en) 1988-10-18 1990-04-20 Pioneer Electron Corp Catv system
US5119188A (en) 1988-10-25 1992-06-02 Telaction Corporation Digital audio-video presentation display system
US4891694A (en) 1988-11-21 1990-01-02 Bell Communications Research, Inc. Fiber optic cable television distribution system
US4901367A (en) 1988-11-30 1990-02-13 Victor Nicholson Cable communications system with remote switching and processing converters
US5077607A (en) 1988-12-23 1991-12-31 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Cable television transaction terminal
US4963995A (en) 1988-12-27 1990-10-16 Explore Technology, Inc. Audio/video transceiver apparatus including compression means
US4920566A (en) 1989-02-01 1990-04-24 General Instrument Corporation Dual loop sinewave descrambler and method of descrambling
US5088111A (en) 1989-02-28 1992-02-11 First Pacific Networks Modulation and demodulation system employing AM-PSK and FSK for communication system using digital signals
US4989245A (en) 1989-03-06 1991-01-29 General Instrument Corporation Controlled authorization of descrambling of scrambled programs broadcast between different jurisdictions
US4947244A (en) 1989-05-03 1990-08-07 On Command Video Corporation Video selection and distribution system
CA1302554C (en) 1989-05-03 1992-06-02 Alan Frank Graves Video signal distribution system
US4994909A (en) 1989-05-04 1991-02-19 Northern Telecom Limited Video signal distribution system
US5014125A (en) 1989-05-05 1991-05-07 Cableshare, Inc. Television system for the interactive distribution of selectable video presentations
US5083800A (en) 1989-06-09 1992-01-28 Interactive Network, Inc. Game of skill or chance playable by several participants remote from each other in conjunction with a common event
US5051822A (en) 1989-10-19 1991-09-24 Interactive Television Systems, Inc. Telephone access video game distribution center
US5155591A (en) 1989-10-23 1992-10-13 General Instrument Corporation Method and apparatus for providing demographically targeted television commercials
US5051720A (en) 1989-11-13 1991-09-24 Secure Telecom, Inc. Remote control system using power line of remote site
US5130792A (en) 1990-02-01 1992-07-14 Usa Video Inc. Store and forward video system
JPH03284087A (en) 1990-03-30 1991-12-13 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Pay television receiver
JPH03291083A (en) 1990-04-09 1991-12-20 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Key signal converter for catv system
GB9008162D0 (en) 1990-04-10 1990-06-06 British Telecomm Signal distribution
US5060262A (en) 1990-05-07 1991-10-22 Bevins Jr George L Video scrambling, audio masking and data transmission methods for wireless cable systems
FR2662009B1 (en) 1990-05-09 1996-03-08 Apple Computer MULTIPLE FACES MANOPULABLE ICON FOR DISPLAY ON COMPUTER.
US5057917A (en) 1990-06-20 1991-10-15 The United States Of America As Represented By The Administrator Of The National Aeronautics And Space Administration Real-time data compression of broadcast video signals
CA2022302C (en) 1990-07-30 1995-02-28 Douglas J. Ballantyne Method and apparatus for distribution of movies
US5144448A (en) * 1990-07-31 1992-09-01 Vidar Systems Corporation Scanning apparatus using multiple CCD arrays and related method
US5442700A (en) 1990-09-28 1995-08-15 Ictv, Inc. Scrambling method
US5319455A (en) 1990-09-28 1994-06-07 Ictv Inc. System for distributing customized commercials to television viewers
US5093718A (en) 1990-09-28 1992-03-03 Inteletext Systems, Inc. Interactive home information system
US5526034A (en) 1990-09-28 1996-06-11 Ictv, Inc. Interactive home information system with signal assignment
US5594507A (en) 1990-09-28 1997-01-14 Ictv, Inc. Compressed digital overlay controller and method for MPEG type video signal
US5557316A (en) 1990-09-28 1996-09-17 Ictv, Inc. System for distributing broadcast television services identically on a first bandwidth portion of a plurality of express trunks and interactive services over a second bandwidth portion of each express trunk on a subscriber demand basis
US5883661A (en) 1990-09-28 1999-03-16 Ictv, Inc. Output switching for load levelling across multiple service areas
US5412720A (en) 1990-09-28 1995-05-02 Ictv, Inc. Interactive home information system
US5220420A (en) 1990-09-28 1993-06-15 Inteletext Systems, Inc. Interactive home information system for distributing compressed television programming
US5361091A (en) 1990-09-28 1994-11-01 Inteletext Systems, Inc. Interactive home information system for distributing video picture information to television viewers over a fiber optic telephone system
US5587734A (en) 1990-09-28 1996-12-24 Ictv, Inc. User interface for selecting television information services through pseudo-channel access
US5133009A (en) 1990-10-04 1992-07-21 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. Method and apparatus for defeating the operation of an ic built-in noise inverter
KR920008694A (en) 1990-10-18 1992-05-28 강진구 Function selection circuit of electronic equipment and its control method
US5172413A (en) 1990-12-20 1992-12-15 Sasktel Secure hierarchial video delivery system and method
US5132992A (en) 1991-01-07 1992-07-21 Paul Yurt Audio and video transmission and receiving system
ES2087522T3 (en) 1991-01-08 1996-07-16 Dolby Lab Licensing Corp DECODING / CODING FOR MULTIDIMENSIONAL SOUND FIELDS.
JP2925338B2 (en) 1991-01-30 1999-07-28 株式会社カンセイ Vehicle air purifier
CA2061519C (en) * 1991-02-20 2004-05-18 Naoki Asakawa Packings combining protein to a support via a spacer
US5253341A (en) 1991-03-04 1993-10-12 Rozmanith Anthony I Remote query communication system
JPH0583696A (en) 1991-06-07 1993-04-02 Sony Corp Picture encoding device
US5236199A (en) 1991-06-13 1993-08-17 Thompson Jr John W Interactive media system and telecomputing method using telephone keypad signalling
JPH04373286A (en) 1991-06-21 1992-12-25 Sony Corp Picture encoder
AU645914B2 (en) 1991-07-15 1994-01-27 Hitachi Limited Picture codec and teleconference terminal equipment
US6034678A (en) 1991-09-10 2000-03-07 Ictv, Inc. Cable television system with remote interactive processor
US5257113A (en) 1991-09-20 1993-10-26 International Business Machines Corporation Video mixing technique using JPEG compressed data
IN180215B (en) 1991-09-24 1998-01-17 Ictv Inc
US5528281A (en) 1991-09-27 1996-06-18 Bell Atlantic Network Services Method and system for accessing multimedia data over public switched telephone network
US5247347A (en) 1991-09-27 1993-09-21 Bell Atlantic Network Services, Inc. Pstn architecture for video-on-demand services
US5790174A (en) 1991-09-27 1998-08-04 Bell Atlantic Network Services, Inc. PSTN architecture for video-on-demand services
US5404393A (en) 1991-10-03 1995-04-04 Viscorp Method and apparatus for interactive television through use of menu windows
US5231494A (en) 1991-10-08 1993-07-27 General Instrument Corporation Selection of compressed television signals from single channel allocation based on viewer characteristics
JPH05109196A (en) 1991-10-14 1993-04-30 Sony Corp Recording method
JP2995960B2 (en) 1991-10-25 1999-12-27 日本電気株式会社 Infrared CCD
US5422887A (en) 1991-11-27 1995-06-06 Ncr Corporation Medium access protocol for wireless local area network
US5497187A (en) 1991-11-29 1996-03-05 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. In-band/out-of-band data transmission method and apparatus for a television system
US5262854A (en) 1992-02-21 1993-11-16 Rca Thomson Licensing Corporation Lower resolution HDTV receivers
JPH05268590A (en) 1992-03-17 1993-10-15 Nec Corp Moving picture coding decoding circuit
US5351129A (en) 1992-03-24 1994-09-27 Rgb Technology D/B/A Rgb Spectrum Video multiplexor-encoder and decoder-converter
US5262860A (en) 1992-04-23 1993-11-16 International Business Machines Corporation Method and system communication establishment utilizing captured and processed visually perceptible data within a broadcast video signal
FR2690799B1 (en) 1992-04-30 1994-06-10 Cit Alcatel OPTICAL SYSTEM FOR CONNECTING SUBSCRIBER FACILITIES TO A SWITCHING CENTER OF A TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK PROVIDING INTERACTIVE AND NON-INTERACTIVE SERVICES.
US5371532A (en) 1992-05-15 1994-12-06 Bell Communications Research, Inc. Communications architecture and method for distributing information services
JP3091018B2 (en) 1992-05-28 2000-09-25 株式会社片山化学工業研究所 Antifouling agent for marine fouling organisms
JPH0654324A (en) 1992-07-31 1994-02-25 Nec Corp Agc circuit of catv terminal
JPH06153180A (en) 1992-09-16 1994-05-31 Fujitsu Ltd Picture data coding method and device
US5446490A (en) 1992-10-23 1995-08-29 At&T Corp. Interactive television with tailored programming
US5418559A (en) 1992-10-23 1995-05-23 At&T Corp. Multi-channel television converter for conventional and interactive signals
US5359601A (en) 1992-10-30 1994-10-25 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Apparatus providing dynamic virtual service selection in a multi-service communications system
US5596693A (en) 1992-11-02 1997-01-21 The 3Do Company Method for controlling a spryte rendering processor
US5319707A (en) 1992-11-02 1994-06-07 Scientific Atlanta System and method for multiplexing a plurality of digital program services for transmission to remote locations
US5600573A (en) 1992-12-09 1997-02-04 Discovery Communications, Inc. Operations center with video storage for a television program packaging and delivery system
US5600364A (en) 1992-12-09 1997-02-04 Discovery Communications, Inc. Network controller for cable television delivery systems
WO1994014279A1 (en) 1992-12-09 1994-06-23 Discovery Communications, Inc. Digital cable headend for cable television delivery system
US5442389A (en) 1992-12-28 1995-08-15 At&T Corp. Program server for interactive television system
CA2107047C (en) 1992-12-29 1998-04-28 Alan M. Bentley Switched circuit connection management over public data networks for wide area networks
US5425027A (en) 1993-01-04 1995-06-13 Com21, Inc. Wide area fiber and TV cable fast packet cell network
WO1994019910A1 (en) 1993-02-17 1994-09-01 Ameritech Services, Inc. Universal tv interface and related method
US5408274A (en) 1993-03-11 1995-04-18 The Regents Of The University Of California Method and apparatus for compositing compressed video data
JP3135094B2 (en) 1993-03-13 2001-02-13 株式会社リコー Integrated business network system
FR2703540A1 (en) 1993-03-31 1994-10-07 Trt Telecom Radio Electr Information multiplexing device for network A.T.M ..
US5812216A (en) 1994-04-19 1998-09-22 Avid Technology, Inc. Method and apparatus for creating motion picture transitions according to non-linear light response
TW318315B (en) 1993-05-03 1997-10-21 At & T Corp
US20050114906A1 (en) 1993-05-03 2005-05-26 Ictv, Inc. System for interactive television
US5539449A (en) 1993-05-03 1996-07-23 At&T Corp. Integrated television services system
US5579143A (en) 1993-06-04 1996-11-26 Ciena Corporation Optical system with tunable in-fiber gratings
US5442390A (en) 1993-07-07 1995-08-15 Digital Equipment Corporation Video on demand with memory accessing and or like functions
US5469431A (en) 1993-07-12 1995-11-21 Philips Electronics North America Corp. Method of and apparatus for channel mapping with relative service identification
US5355162A (en) 1993-07-13 1994-10-11 Pacific Ray Video Limited Multi-standard cable television system
US5632003A (en) 1993-07-16 1997-05-20 Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Computationally efficient adaptive bit allocation for coding method and apparatus
US5581653A (en) 1993-08-31 1996-12-03 Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Low bit-rate high-resolution spectral envelope coding for audio encoder and decoder
FR2709905B1 (en) 1993-09-09 1995-10-13 Alcatel Business Systems Interactive control system for multiservice installation with a television program distribution server and a telephone exchange.
US5495283A (en) 1993-09-13 1996-02-27 Albrit Technologies Ltd. Cable television video messaging system and headend facility incorporating same
US5410344A (en) 1993-09-22 1995-04-25 Arrowsmith Technologies, Inc. Apparatus and method of selecting video programs based on viewers' preferences
US5631693A (en) 1993-10-25 1997-05-20 Antec Corporation Method and apparatus for providing on demand services in a subscriber system
JPH07131454A (en) 1993-11-05 1995-05-19 Toshiba Corp Repeating installation, decoder, and enciphered broadcast equipment
US5481542A (en) 1993-11-10 1996-01-02 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Interactive information services control system
AU693148B2 (en) 1993-12-02 1998-06-25 Sedna Patent Services, Llc Network manager for cable television system headends
JP3404837B2 (en) 1993-12-07 2003-05-12 ソニー株式会社 Multi-layer coding device
US5422674A (en) * 1993-12-22 1995-06-06 Digital Equipment Corporation Remote display of an image by transmitting compressed video frames representing background and overlay portions thereof
JPH07202820A (en) 1993-12-28 1995-08-04 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Bit rate control system
JP3149303B2 (en) 1993-12-29 2001-03-26 松下電器産業株式会社 Digital image encoding method and digital image decoding method
JP3192307B2 (en) 1994-02-03 2001-07-23 松下電器産業株式会社 Decoded video image sequence rearrangement method
CA2140850C (en) 1994-02-24 1999-09-21 Howard Paul Katseff Networked system for display of multimedia presentations
US5608446A (en) 1994-03-31 1997-03-04 Lucent Technologies Inc. Apparatus and method for combining high bandwidth and low bandwidth data transfer
CA2144253C (en) 1994-04-01 1999-09-21 Bruce F. Naylor System and method of generating compressed video graphics images
US5668592A (en) 1994-04-06 1997-09-16 Interaxx Television Network, Inc. Interactive television terminal responsive to user commands which combines static service data and recurrently broadcast dynamic service data to produce composite service display signals
GB9407200D0 (en) 1994-04-12 1994-06-08 Tartre Andre Probe and chamber for the monitoring of soil contaminated with petroleum products
JP3435674B2 (en) 1994-05-06 2003-08-11 日本電信電話株式会社 Signal encoding and decoding methods, and encoder and decoder using the same
US5523796A (en) 1994-05-20 1996-06-04 Prevue Networks, Inc. Video clip program guide
US5495295A (en) 1994-06-01 1996-02-27 Zenith Electronics Corporation Use of transmitter assigned phantom channel numbers for data services
US5537397A (en) 1994-06-07 1996-07-16 Aloha Networks, Inc. Spread aloha CDMA data communications
US5748234A (en) 1994-09-13 1998-05-05 Intel Corporation Video processing system and method
US5570363A (en) 1994-09-30 1996-10-29 Intel Corporation Transform based scalable audio compression algorithms and low cost audio multi-point conferencing systems
US5630757A (en) 1994-11-29 1997-05-20 Net Game Limited Real-time multi-user game communication system using existing cable television infrastructure
US5793980A (en) 1994-11-30 1998-08-11 Realnetworks, Inc. Audio-on-demand communication system
US5592470A (en) 1994-12-21 1997-01-07 At&T Broadband wireless system and network architecture providing broadband/narrowband service with optimal static and dynamic bandwidth/channel allocation
US5708767A (en) 1995-02-03 1998-01-13 The Trustees Of Princeton University Method and apparatus for video browsing based on content and structure
US5821945A (en) 1995-02-03 1998-10-13 The Trustees Of Princeton University Method and apparatus for video browsing based on content and structure
US5754941A (en) 1995-02-06 1998-05-19 Broadband Technologies, Inc. Point-to-multipoint broadband services drop with multiple time slot return channel for customer premises equipment served by fiber optic telecommunication system employing STS-based transmission format containing asynchronous transfer mode cells
US5517250A (en) 1995-02-28 1996-05-14 General Instrument Corporation Of Delaware Acquisition of desired data from a packetized data stream and synchronization thereto
US5631846A (en) 1995-02-28 1997-05-20 Lucent Technologies Inc. Upstream communications for interactive networks
CA2214711A1 (en) 1995-03-07 1996-09-12 Multimedia Systems Corporation Couponing issuance and tracking system for a communications network
JP3085135B2 (en) 1995-03-24 2000-09-04 日本ビクター株式会社 Information reproducing apparatus and decoder unit
US5790793A (en) 1995-04-04 1998-08-04 Higley; Thomas Method and system to create, transmit, receive and process information, including an address to further information
US5818438A (en) 1995-04-25 1998-10-06 Bellsouth Corporation System and method for providing television services
US5583927A (en) 1995-05-01 1996-12-10 Bell Communications Research, Inc. Method and apparatus for integrating telephone and broadband networks
GB9510093D0 (en) * 1995-05-18 1995-07-12 Philips Electronics Uk Ltd Interactive image manipulation
US5646676A (en) 1995-05-30 1997-07-08 International Business Machines Corporation Scalable interactive multimedia server system for providing on demand data
US5548340A (en) 1995-05-31 1996-08-20 International Business Machines Corporation Intelligent television receivers combinations including video displays, and methods for diversion of television viewers by visual image modification
US5793927A (en) 1995-06-07 1998-08-11 Hitachi America, Ltd. Methods for monitoring and modifying a trick play data stream to insure MPEG compliance
US5710815A (en) 1995-06-07 1998-01-20 Vtech Communications, Ltd. Encoder apparatus and decoder apparatus for a television signal having embedded viewer access control data
US5812665A (en) 1995-06-08 1998-09-22 Ictv, Inc. Switched channel system
US6209132B1 (en) 1995-06-15 2001-03-27 Intel Corporation Host apparatus for simulating two way connectivity for one way data streams
US5812786A (en) 1995-06-21 1998-09-22 Bell Atlantic Network Services, Inc. Variable rate and variable mode transmission system
US5999189A (en) 1995-08-04 1999-12-07 Microsoft Corporation Image compression to reduce pixel and texture memory requirements in a real-time image generator
US5905522A (en) 1995-08-31 1999-05-18 Microsoft Corporation Resource allocation method for interactive televideo system
US5990862A (en) 1995-09-18 1999-11-23 Lewis; Stephen H Method for efficient input device selection of onscreen objects
US5649283A (en) 1995-09-28 1997-07-15 Lucent Technologies Inc. Program verification for cable television at a consumer location
US20020056136A1 (en) 1995-09-29 2002-05-09 Wistendahl Douglass A. System for converting existing TV content to interactive TV programs operated with a standard remote control and TV set-top box
GB9519921D0 (en) 1995-09-29 1995-11-29 Philips Electronics Nv Graphics image manipulation
US8850477B2 (en) 1995-10-02 2014-09-30 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Systems and methods for linking television viewers with advertisers and broadcasters
US5844594A (en) 1995-10-05 1998-12-01 Microsoft Corporation Method and apparatus for MPEG encoding
US5966163A (en) 1995-10-20 1999-10-12 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Providing constant bit rate upstream data transport in a two way cable system by scheduling preemptive grants for upstream data slots using selected fields of a plurality of grant fields
WO1997017797A2 (en) 1995-10-25 1997-05-15 Sarnoff Corporation Apparatus and method for quadtree based variable block size motion estimation
US6192081B1 (en) 1995-10-26 2001-02-20 Sarnoff Corporation Apparatus and method for selecting a coding mode in a block-based coding system
US5917822A (en) 1995-11-15 1999-06-29 Xerox Corporation Method for providing integrated packet services over a shared-media network
US5828371A (en) 1995-11-22 1998-10-27 International Business Machines Corporation Method and system for graphic video image presentation control
IL117133A (en) 1996-02-14 1999-07-14 Olivr Corp Ltd Method and system for providing on-line virtual reality movies
US5959690A (en) * 1996-02-20 1999-09-28 Sas Institute, Inc. Method and apparatus for transitions and other special effects in digital motion video
US5862325A (en) 1996-02-29 1999-01-19 Intermind Corporation Computer-based communication system and method using metadata defining a control structure
US5845083A (en) 1996-03-07 1998-12-01 Mitsubishi Semiconductor America, Inc. MPEG encoding and decoding system for multimedia applications
US5774664A (en) 1996-03-08 1998-06-30 Actv, Inc. Enhanced video programming system and method for incorporating and displaying retrieved integrated internet information segments
US5668599A (en) 1996-03-19 1997-09-16 International Business Machines Corporation Memory management for an MPEG2 compliant decoder
US6055314A (en) 1996-03-22 2000-04-25 Microsoft Corporation System and method for secure purchase and delivery of video content programs
US5978756A (en) 1996-03-28 1999-11-02 Intel Corporation Encoding audio signals using precomputed silence
US6240555B1 (en) 1996-03-29 2001-05-29 Microsoft Corporation Interactive entertainment system for presenting supplemental interactive content together with continuous video programs
US5961603A (en) 1996-04-10 1999-10-05 Worldgate Communications, Inc. Access system and method for providing interactive access to an information source through a networked distribution system
US5999970A (en) 1996-04-10 1999-12-07 World Gate Communications, Llc Access system and method for providing interactive access to an information source through a television distribution system
US6253235B1 (en) 1996-04-18 2001-06-26 Bellsouth Corporation Method and system to transmit video/data signals from a device to a communications network connection card
US6141693A (en) 1996-06-03 2000-10-31 Webtv Networks, Inc. Method and apparatus for extracting digital data from a video stream and using the digital data to configure the video stream for display on a television set
US5918013A (en) 1996-06-03 1999-06-29 Webtv Networks, Inc. Method of transcoding documents in a network environment using a proxy server
US5996022A (en) 1996-06-03 1999-11-30 Webtv Networks, Inc. Transcoding data in a proxy computer prior to transmitting the audio data to a client
JPH09325994A (en) 1996-06-07 1997-12-16 Sony Corp System and method for charging
CN1169322C (en) 1996-06-17 2004-09-29 三星电子株式会社 Method and circuit for detecting data division synchronous signals in high-clearity television
US5903727A (en) 1996-06-18 1999-05-11 Sun Microsystems, Inc. Processing HTML to embed sound in a web page
US5929850A (en) 1996-07-01 1999-07-27 Thomson Consumer Electronices, Inc. Interactive television system and method having on-demand web-like navigational capabilities for displaying requested hyperlinked web-like still images associated with television content
US5903816A (en) 1996-07-01 1999-05-11 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. Interactive television system and method for displaying web-like stills with hyperlinks
US5991306A (en) 1996-08-26 1999-11-23 Microsoft Corporation Pull based, intelligent caching system and method for delivering data over a network
US5995488A (en) 1996-10-08 1999-11-30 Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Method and apparatus for regulating data flow in networks
US5952943A (en) 1996-10-11 1999-09-14 Intel Corporation Encoding image data for decode rate control
US5982445A (en) 1996-10-21 1999-11-09 General Instrument Corporation Hypertext markup language protocol for television display and control
US6144698A (en) 1996-10-31 2000-11-07 Mitsubishi Electric Information Technology Center America, Inc. (Ita) Digital video decoder and method of decoding a digital video signal
US6049831A (en) 1996-11-08 2000-04-11 Gte Laboratories Incorporated System for transmitting network-related information where requested network information is separately transmitted as definitions and display information
US20030066085A1 (en) 1996-12-10 2003-04-03 United Video Properties, Inc., A Corporation Of Delaware Internet television program guide system
WO1998026595A1 (en) 1996-12-10 1998-06-18 Ictv, Inc. System manager with hypertext control interface for interactive cable television system
US6177931B1 (en) 1996-12-19 2001-01-23 Index Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for displaying and recording control interface with television programs, video, advertising information and program scheduling information
US5864820A (en) 1996-12-20 1999-01-26 U S West, Inc. Method, system and product for mixing of encoded audio signals
BR9807467B1 (en) 1997-01-06 2010-11-16 method and system for monitoring the use of television media distribution network.
US6253375B1 (en) 1997-01-13 2001-06-26 Diva Systems Corporation System for interactively distributing information services
US5963203A (en) 1997-07-03 1999-10-05 Obvious Technology, Inc. Interactive video icon with designated viewing position
US5995146A (en) 1997-01-24 1999-11-30 Pathway, Inc. Multiple video screen display system
US6031989A (en) 1997-02-27 2000-02-29 Microsoft Corporation Method of formatting and displaying nested documents
US6785865B1 (en) 1997-03-06 2004-08-31 Microsoft Corporation Discoverability and navigation of hyperlinks via tabs
US20050097594A1 (en) 1997-03-24 2005-05-05 O'donnell Frank Systems and methods for awarding affinity points based upon remote control usage
US6182072B1 (en) 1997-03-26 2001-01-30 Webtv Networks, Inc. Method and apparatus for generating a tour of world wide web sites
KR100261254B1 (en) 1997-04-02 2000-07-01 윤종용 Scalable audio data encoding/decoding method and apparatus
US6131182A (en) * 1997-05-02 2000-10-10 International Business Machines Corporation Method and apparatus for synthesizing and optimizing control logic based on SRCMOS logic array macros
US5946352A (en) 1997-05-02 1999-08-31 Texas Instruments Incorporated Method and apparatus for downmixing decoded data streams in the frequency domain prior to conversion to the time domain
WO1998051126A1 (en) 1997-05-08 1998-11-12 Sgs-Thomson Microelectronics Asia Pacific (Pte) Ltd. Method and apparatus for frequency-domain downmixing with block-switch forcing for audio decoding functions
US6236730B1 (en) 1997-05-19 2001-05-22 Qsound Labs, Inc. Full sound enhancement using multi-input sound signals
US6968379B2 (en) 1997-05-30 2005-11-22 Sun Microsystems, Inc. Latency-reducing bandwidth-prioritization for network servers and clients
US6256047B1 (en) 1997-06-04 2001-07-03 Konami Co., Ltd. Method of judging hits and computer-readable storage medium storing game data
DE69816185T2 (en) * 1997-06-12 2004-04-15 Hewlett-Packard Co. (N.D.Ges.D.Staates Delaware), Palo Alto Image processing method and device
US6317885B1 (en) 1997-06-26 2001-11-13 Microsoft Corporation Interactive entertainment and information system using television set-top box
US5990912A (en) 1997-06-27 1999-11-23 S3 Incorporated Virtual address access to tiled surfaces
US6169573B1 (en) * 1997-07-03 2001-01-02 Hotv, Inc. Hypervideo system and method with object tracking in a compressed digital video environment
JP3103045B2 (en) 1997-07-10 2000-10-23 三菱電機株式会社 Image capturing / reproducing method and method, and recording medium recording image reproducing program
GB9715228D0 (en) 1997-07-18 1997-09-24 Sertway Limited Communications system and method
US6266684B1 (en) * 1997-08-06 2001-07-24 Adobe Systems Incorporated Creating and saving multi-frame web pages
JPH1188419A (en) 1997-09-12 1999-03-30 Tsushin Hoso Kiko System for distributing animation information and its method
US6049539A (en) 1997-09-15 2000-04-11 Worldgate Communications, Inc. Access system and method for providing interactive access to an information source through a networked distribution system
US6606746B1 (en) * 1997-10-16 2003-08-12 Opentv, Inc. Interactive television system and method for displaying a graphical user interface using insert pictures
US5907681A (en) 1997-10-20 1999-05-25 International Business Machines Corporation Intelligent method, apparatus and computer program product for automated refreshing of internet web pages
US5867208A (en) 1997-10-28 1999-02-02 Sun Microsystems, Inc. Encoding system and method for scrolling encoded MPEG stills in an interactive television application
JPH11134273A (en) 1997-10-31 1999-05-21 Toshiba Corp Method and system for communication control, and recording medium where program for actualizing the same is recorded
KR100335609B1 (en) 1997-11-20 2002-10-04 삼성전자 주식회사 Scalable audio encoding/decoding method and apparatus
US6564378B1 (en) 1997-12-08 2003-05-13 United Video Properties, Inc. Program guide system with browsing display
US6205582B1 (en) 1997-12-09 2001-03-20 Ictv, Inc. Interactive cable television system with frame server
WO1999030497A1 (en) 1997-12-09 1999-06-17 Ictv, Inc. Modular controller and modulator system for interactive cable television system
WO1999030496A1 (en) 1997-12-09 1999-06-17 Ictv, Inc. Distributed scrambling method and system
US6184878B1 (en) 1997-12-23 2001-02-06 Sarnoff Corporation Interactive world wide web access using a set top terminal in a video on demand system
US6453459B1 (en) * 1998-01-21 2002-09-17 Apple Computer, Inc. Menu authoring system and method for automatically performing low-level DVD configuration functions and thereby ease an author's job
DE69831725T2 (en) * 1998-01-30 2006-06-22 Alcatel Method for routing Internet data packets: Access node, terminal and communication network for execution
US6198822B1 (en) 1998-02-11 2001-03-06 Ictv, Inc. Enhanced scrambling of slowly changing video signals
US6538701B1 (en) 1998-02-17 2003-03-25 Gemstar Development Corporation Simulated pip window in EPG
JP3544852B2 (en) 1998-03-12 2004-07-21 株式会社東芝 Video coding device
US6956899B2 (en) 1998-03-23 2005-10-18 International Business Machines Corporation Precise bit control apparatus with look-ahead for MPEG encoding
KR100281462B1 (en) 1998-03-30 2001-02-01 전주범 Method for encoding motion vector of binary shape signals in interlaced shape coding technique
US6459427B1 (en) 1998-04-01 2002-10-01 Liberate Technologies Apparatus and method for web-casting over digital broadcast TV network
US6266053B1 (en) 1998-04-03 2001-07-24 Synapix, Inc. Time inheritance scene graph for representation of media content
US6385771B1 (en) 1998-04-27 2002-05-07 Diva Systems Corporation Generating constant timecast information sub-streams using variable timecast information streams
CA2330031A1 (en) 1998-04-27 1999-11-04 Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corporation Method and system for providing bi-directional communications to a broadband network without degrading downstream bandwidth
DE69937816T2 (en) 1998-04-28 2008-12-24 Canon K.K. Data processing device and method
JP3854737B2 (en) 1998-11-16 2006-12-06 キヤノン株式会社 Data processing apparatus and method, and data processing system
US7689898B2 (en) * 1998-05-07 2010-03-30 Astute Technology, Llc Enhanced capture, management and distribution of live presentations
US6141645A (en) 1998-05-29 2000-10-31 Acer Laboratories Inc. Method and device for down mixing compressed audio bit stream having multiple audio channels
US6314573B1 (en) 1998-05-29 2001-11-06 Diva Systems Corporation Method and apparatus for providing subscription-on-demand services for an interactive information distribution system
US6078328A (en) * 1998-06-08 2000-06-20 Digital Video Express, Lp Compressed video graphics system and methodology
US6130912A (en) 1998-06-09 2000-10-10 Sony Electronics, Inc. Hierarchical motion estimation process and system using block-matching and integral projection
US6266369B1 (en) 1998-06-09 2001-07-24 Worldgate Service, Inc. MPEG encoding technique for encoding web pages
DE69934119T2 (en) 1998-07-06 2007-09-20 Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd., Moriguchi SOUND / VIBRATION GENERATOR
US6324217B1 (en) 1998-07-08 2001-11-27 Diva Systems Corporation Method and apparatus for producing an information stream having still images
US6862622B2 (en) 1998-07-10 2005-03-01 Van Drebbel Mariner Llc Transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) packet-centric wireless point to multi-point (PTMP) transmission system architecture
BR9912386A (en) 1998-07-23 2001-10-02 Diva Systems Corp System and process for generating and using an interactive user interface
US6754905B2 (en) 1998-07-23 2004-06-22 Diva Systems Corporation Data structure and methods for providing an interactive program guide
US6584153B1 (en) 1998-07-23 2003-06-24 Diva Systems Corporation Data structure and methods for providing an interactive program guide
US6415437B1 (en) 1998-07-23 2002-07-02 Diva Systems Corporation Method and apparatus for combining video sequences with an interactive program guide
IL141104A0 (en) * 1998-07-27 2002-02-10 Webtv Networks Inc Remote computer access
US7360230B1 (en) 1998-07-27 2008-04-15 Microsoft Corporation Overlay management
US6226041B1 (en) 1998-07-28 2001-05-01 Sarnoff Corporation Logo insertion using only disposable frames
US20100325668A1 (en) 1998-08-11 2010-12-23 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Television schedule system
GB9817618D0 (en) 1998-08-14 1998-10-07 Benedictis Alfredo De Hair treatment device and method
US6697869B1 (en) 1998-08-24 2004-02-24 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Emulation of streaming over the internet in a broadcast application
TW447221B (en) 1998-08-26 2001-07-21 United Video Properties Inc Television message system
US6167084A (en) 1998-08-27 2000-12-26 Motorola, Inc. Dynamic bit allocation for statistical multiplexing of compressed and uncompressed digital video signals
US7272556B1 (en) 1998-09-23 2007-09-18 Lucent Technologies Inc. Scalable and embedded codec for speech and audio signals
US6030406A (en) 1998-10-05 2000-02-29 Origin Medsystems, Inc. Method and apparatus for tissue dissection
JP2000107442A (en) 1998-10-06 2000-04-18 Konami Co Ltd Character behavior control method in video game, video game device, and readable recording medium on which video game program is recorded
US6675385B1 (en) 1998-10-21 2004-01-06 Liberate Technologies HTML electronic program guide for an MPEG digital TV system
US7143434B1 (en) 1998-11-06 2006-11-28 Seungyup Paek Video description system and method
US6438140B1 (en) 1998-11-19 2002-08-20 Diva Systems Corporation Data structure, method and apparatus providing efficient retrieval of data from a segmented information stream
US6697376B1 (en) 1998-11-20 2004-02-24 Diva Systems Corporation Logical node identification in an information transmission network
US6598229B2 (en) 1998-11-20 2003-07-22 Diva Systems Corp. System and method for detecting and correcting a defective transmission channel in an interactive information distribution system
US6310915B1 (en) * 1998-11-20 2001-10-30 Harmonic Inc. Video transcoder with bitstream look ahead for rate control and statistical multiplexing
US6578201B1 (en) 1998-11-20 2003-06-10 Diva Systems Corporation Multimedia stream incorporating interactive support for multiple types of subscriber terminals
US6732370B1 (en) * 1998-11-30 2004-05-04 Diva Systems Corporation Service provider side interactive program guide encoder
US6389218B2 (en) 1998-11-30 2002-05-14 Diva Systems Corporation Method and apparatus for simultaneously producing compressed play and trick play bitstreams from a video frame sequence
US6804825B1 (en) 1998-11-30 2004-10-12 Microsoft Corporation Video on demand methods and systems
US6253238B1 (en) 1998-12-02 2001-06-26 Ictv, Inc. Interactive cable television system with frame grabber
US7185353B2 (en) 2000-08-31 2007-02-27 Prime Research Alliance E., Inc. System and method for delivering statistically scheduled advertisements
US7260823B2 (en) 2001-01-11 2007-08-21 Prime Research Alliance E., Inc. Profiling and identification of television viewers
US6952221B1 (en) 1998-12-18 2005-10-04 Thomson Licensing S.A. System and method for real time video production and distribution
US6452612B1 (en) 1998-12-18 2002-09-17 Parkervision, Inc. Real time video production system and method
EP1142341A1 (en) 1998-12-20 2001-10-10 Morecom, Inc. System for transporting streaming video from an html web page as mpeg video
EP1014712A1 (en) 1998-12-21 2000-06-28 Deutsche Thomson-Brandt Gmbh Method and apparatus for providing OSD data for OSD display in a video signal having an encoded format
US6386980B1 (en) 1998-12-26 2002-05-14 Kabushiki Kaisha Sega Enterprises Game apparatus, game system using same, and information processing unit
WO2000041395A1 (en) 1999-01-06 2000-07-13 Sarnoff Corporation Latency-based statistical multiplexing
US6588017B1 (en) 1999-01-27 2003-07-01 Diva Systems Corporation Master and slave subscriber stations for digital video and interactive services
US6741608B1 (en) 1999-01-29 2004-05-25 Avaya Technology Corp. Dynamically configurable system and method for transcoding streaming data and telecommunications infrastructure the same
GB9902235D0 (en) 1999-02-01 1999-03-24 Emuse Corp Interactive system
JP2000245964A (en) 1999-03-03 2000-09-12 Konami Computer Entertaiment Tokyo:Kk Game machine, method for controlling it and recording medium storing game program
US6691208B2 (en) 1999-03-12 2004-02-10 Diva Systems Corp. Queuing architecture including a plurality of queues and associated method for controlling admission for disk access requests for video content
US6415031B1 (en) 1999-03-12 2002-07-02 Diva Systems Corporation Selective and renewable encryption for secure distribution of video on-demand
US6229895B1 (en) 1999-03-12 2001-05-08 Diva Systems Corp. Secure distribution of video on-demand
JP4135251B2 (en) 1999-03-19 2008-08-20 ソニー株式会社 Information processing device
US7543325B2 (en) 1999-03-30 2009-06-02 Tivo Inc. System for remotely controlling client recording and storage behavior
US8479251B2 (en) 1999-03-31 2013-07-02 Microsoft Corporation System and method for synchronizing streaming content with enhancing content using pre-announced triggers
US6604224B1 (en) 1999-03-31 2003-08-05 Diva Systems Corporation Method of performing content integrity analysis of a data stream
US6721794B2 (en) 1999-04-01 2004-04-13 Diva Systems Corp. Method of data management for efficiently storing and retrieving data to respond to user access requests
US6639896B1 (en) 1999-04-01 2003-10-28 Diva Systems Corporation Asynchronous serial interface (ASI) ring network for digital information distribution
US6675387B1 (en) 1999-04-06 2004-01-06 Liberate Technologies System and methods for preparing multimedia data using digital video data compression
US6651252B1 (en) 1999-10-27 2003-11-18 Diva Systems Corporation Method and apparatus for transmitting video and graphics in a compressed form
US6754271B1 (en) 1999-04-15 2004-06-22 Diva Systems Corporation Temporal slice persistence method and apparatus for delivery of interactive program guide
US6904610B1 (en) 1999-04-15 2005-06-07 Sedna Patent Services, Llc Server-centric customized interactive program guide in an interactive television environment
US6621870B1 (en) 1999-04-15 2003-09-16 Diva Systems Corporation Method and apparatus for compressing video sequences
US7096487B1 (en) 1999-10-27 2006-08-22 Sedna Patent Services, Llc Apparatus and method for combining realtime and non-realtime encoded content
US6704359B1 (en) 1999-04-15 2004-03-09 Diva Systems Corp. Efficient encoding algorithms for delivery of server-centric interactive program guide
US6614843B1 (en) 1999-04-15 2003-09-02 Diva Systems Corporation Stream indexing for delivery of interactive program guide
US6718552B1 (en) 1999-04-20 2004-04-06 Diva Systems Corporation Network bandwidth optimization by dynamic channel allocation
US6477182B2 (en) 1999-06-08 2002-11-05 Diva Systems Corporation Data transmission method and apparatus
US6687663B1 (en) 1999-06-25 2004-02-03 Lake Technology Limited Audio processing method and apparatus
US6560496B1 (en) 1999-06-30 2003-05-06 Hughes Electronics Corporation Method for altering AC-3 data streams using minimum computation
US6330719B1 (en) 1999-06-30 2001-12-11 Webtv Networks, Inc. Interactive television receiver unit browser that waits to send requests
US6480210B1 (en) 1999-06-30 2002-11-12 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Video browsing space
FR2796181B1 (en) * 1999-07-09 2001-10-05 France Telecom SYSTEM FOR FAST DEVELOPMENT OF INTERACTIVE APPLICATIONS
JP4697500B2 (en) 1999-08-09 2011-06-08 ソニー株式会社 TRANSMISSION DEVICE, TRANSMISSION METHOD, RECEPTION DEVICE, RECEPTION METHOD, AND RECORDING MEDIUM
US6446037B1 (en) 1999-08-09 2002-09-03 Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Scalable coding method for high quality audio
US6525746B1 (en) * 1999-08-16 2003-02-25 University Of Washington Interactive video object processing environment having zoom window
US6944877B1 (en) 1999-08-27 2005-09-13 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Closed loop addressable advertising system and method of operation
JP2001094433A (en) 1999-09-17 2001-04-06 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Sub-band coding and decoding medium
EP1098244A3 (en) * 1999-11-02 2001-06-13 CANAL + Société Anonyme Graphical user interface
US7031385B1 (en) 1999-10-01 2006-04-18 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for detecting scene change of a compressed moving-picture, and program recording medium therefor
US7987431B2 (en) 1999-10-29 2011-07-26 Surfcast, Inc. System and method for simultaneous display of multiple information sources
US7028264B2 (en) 1999-10-29 2006-04-11 Surfcast, Inc. System and method for simultaneous display of multiple information sources
KR100308055B1 (en) 1999-11-13 2001-11-02 구자홍 Apparatus and method for transmitting/receiving of game on demand
WO2001039494A1 (en) 1999-11-22 2001-05-31 America Online, Inc. Managing electronic content from different sources
US7016540B1 (en) 1999-11-24 2006-03-21 Nec Corporation Method and system for segmentation, classification, and summarization of video images
US6947509B1 (en) * 1999-11-30 2005-09-20 Verance Corporation Oversampled filter bank for subband processing
US6810528B1 (en) 1999-12-03 2004-10-26 Sony Computer Entertainment America Inc. System and method for providing an on-line gaming experience through a CATV broadband network
US6579184B1 (en) 1999-12-10 2003-06-17 Nokia Corporation Multi-player game system
US20020026642A1 (en) 1999-12-15 2002-02-28 Augenbraun Joseph E. System and method for broadcasting web pages and other information
US7093028B1 (en) 1999-12-15 2006-08-15 Microsoft Corporation User and content aware object-based data stream transmission methods and arrangements
US6976229B1 (en) 1999-12-16 2005-12-13 Ricoh Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for storytelling with digital photographs
US6785902B1 (en) 1999-12-20 2004-08-31 Webtv Networks, Inc. Document data structure and method for integrating broadcast television with web pages
JP3366308B2 (en) 1999-12-24 2003-01-14 コナミ株式会社 Gaming machines and their operating methods
US8418214B2 (en) 2000-01-13 2013-04-09 Arris Group, Inc. Method and apparatus for identifying a signal route for delivery of video-on-demand to a subscriber terminal
US7089577B1 (en) 2000-01-14 2006-08-08 Terayon Communication Systems, Inc. Process for supplying video-on-demand and other requested programs and services from a headend
US6681397B1 (en) 2000-01-21 2004-01-20 Diva Systems Corp. Visual improvement of video stream transitions
WO2001054400A1 (en) 2000-01-24 2001-07-26 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Image synthesizing device, recorded medium, and program
US7159233B2 (en) 2000-01-28 2007-01-02 Sedna Patent Services, Llc Method and apparatus for preprocessing and postprocessing content in an interactive information distribution system
US8413185B2 (en) 2000-02-01 2013-04-02 United Video Properties, Inc. Interactive television application with navigable cells and regions
US20020016161A1 (en) 2000-02-10 2002-02-07 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Method and apparatus for compression of speech encoded parameters
DE10009067A1 (en) 2000-02-25 2001-08-30 Endress Hauser Gmbh Co Measuring device with rope probe and method for shortening the rope probe
US6771704B1 (en) 2000-02-28 2004-08-03 Intel Corporation Obscuring video signals for conditional access
JP2001245291A (en) 2000-02-29 2001-09-07 Nec Corp Image communication system
US7325043B1 (en) 2000-03-08 2008-01-29 Music Choice System and method for providing a personalized media service
US20020056083A1 (en) 2000-03-29 2002-05-09 Istvan Anthony F. System and method for picture-in-browser scaling
US20020049975A1 (en) 2000-04-05 2002-04-25 Thomas William L. Interactive wagering system with multiple display support
US20020040482A1 (en) 2000-04-08 2002-04-04 Sextro Gary L. Features for interactive television
US9788058B2 (en) 2000-04-24 2017-10-10 Comcast Cable Communications Management, Llc Method and system for automatic insertion of interactive TV triggers into a broadcast data stream
US20020010928A1 (en) 2000-04-24 2002-01-24 Ranjit Sahota Method and system for integrating internet advertising with television commercials
US6747991B1 (en) 2000-04-26 2004-06-08 Carnegie Mellon University Filter and method for adaptively modifying the bit rate of synchronized video and audio streams to meet packet-switched network bandwidth constraints
JP2002011243A (en) 2000-04-27 2002-01-15 Sony Computer Entertainment Inc Storage medium, program, entertainment system and entertainment device
US20060117340A1 (en) 2000-05-05 2006-06-01 Ictv, Inc. Interactive cable television system without a return path
US6941019B1 (en) 2000-05-10 2005-09-06 International Business Machines Corporation Reentry into compressed data
US7490166B2 (en) 2000-05-26 2009-02-10 Citrix Systems, Inc. Remote control of a client's off-screen surface
JP2003536319A (en) 2000-06-09 2003-12-02 アイムーヴ インコーポレイテッド Panorama video streaming method and system
US6731605B1 (en) 2000-06-19 2004-05-04 Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. Prioritized optimal server side bandwidth allocation in a multimedia session with push and pull sources
CN1193599C (en) 2000-06-19 2005-03-16 皇家菲利浦电子有限公司 Method of automatic execution, receiving station
GB0015065D0 (en) 2000-06-21 2000-08-09 Macnamee Gerard System and method of personalised interactive TV advertising over broadcast television system
US6614442B1 (en) 2000-06-26 2003-09-02 S3 Graphics Co., Ltd. Macroblock tiling format for motion compensation
US6999432B2 (en) 2000-07-13 2006-02-14 Microsoft Corporation Channel and quality of service adaptation for multimedia over wireless networks
US20020027567A1 (en) 2000-07-18 2002-03-07 Niamir Bern B. Listing network for classified information
JP3672235B2 (en) 2000-07-31 2005-07-20 インターナショナル・ビジネス・マシーンズ・コーポレーション Broadcast system and web browsing method in broadcast system
US6727929B1 (en) 2000-08-16 2004-04-27 International Business Machines Corporation Automatic determination of nearest window controller having a function consistent with motion of cursor
US6757860B2 (en) 2000-08-25 2004-06-29 Agere Systems Inc. Channel error protection implementable across network layers in a communication system
US7421729B2 (en) 2000-08-25 2008-09-02 Intellocity Usa Inc. Generation and insertion of indicators using an address signal applied to a database
US6657647B1 (en) 2000-09-25 2003-12-02 Xoucin, Inc. Controlling the order in which content is displayed in a browser
JP2002112220A (en) 2000-10-03 2002-04-12 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Moving picture information distribution method
US7028307B2 (en) 2000-11-06 2006-04-11 Alcatel Data management framework for policy management
US20020083464A1 (en) 2000-11-07 2002-06-27 Mai-Ian Tomsen System and method for unprompted, context-sensitive querying during a televison broadcast
US7146628B1 (en) 2000-11-08 2006-12-05 Sedna Patent Services, Llc Messaging protocol for interactive delivery system
WO2002047388A2 (en) 2000-11-14 2002-06-13 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Networked subscriber television distribution
US7124424B2 (en) 2000-11-27 2006-10-17 Sedna Patent Services, Llc Method and apparatus for providing interactive program guide (IPG) and video-on-demand (VOD) user interfaces
US20020066101A1 (en) 2000-11-27 2002-05-30 Gordon Donald F. Method and apparatus for delivering and displaying information for a multi-layer user interface
US6907574B2 (en) 2000-11-29 2005-06-14 Ictv, Inc. System and method of hyperlink navigation between frames
US7870592B2 (en) 2000-12-14 2011-01-11 Intertainer, Inc. Method for interactive video content programming
US6717600B2 (en) 2000-12-15 2004-04-06 International Business Machines Corporation Proximity selection of selectable item in a graphical user interface
US20020078171A1 (en) 2000-12-19 2002-06-20 Robert Schneider Document delivery system with integrated feedback generation facilities
US7242324B2 (en) 2000-12-22 2007-07-10 Sony Corporation Distributed on-demand media transcoding system and method
US7421082B2 (en) 2000-12-28 2008-09-02 Sony Corporation Data delivery method and data delivery system using sets of passkeys generated by dividing an encryption key
JP4610747B2 (en) 2001-01-10 2011-01-12 株式会社バンダイナムコゲームス Image generation system, program, and information storage medium
US20020095689A1 (en) 2001-01-12 2002-07-18 Novak Robert E. Hardware decoding of media streams from multiple sources
US20020136298A1 (en) 2001-01-18 2002-09-26 Chandrashekhara Anantharamu System and method for adaptive streaming of predictive coded video data
US7305697B2 (en) 2001-02-02 2007-12-04 Opentv, Inc. Service gateway for interactive television
SE519884C2 (en) 2001-02-02 2003-04-22 Scalado Ab Method for zooming and producing a zoomable image
US7143347B2 (en) 2001-02-02 2006-11-28 Opentv, Inc. Method and apparatus for reformatting of content for display on interactive television
KR20020069145A (en) 2001-02-22 2002-08-29 오정석 Realtime/on-demand wireless multicasting system using mobile terminal and method thereof
JP4655384B2 (en) 2001-02-28 2011-03-23 ソニー株式会社 Portable information terminal device, information processing method, program storage medium, and program
EP1374080A2 (en) 2001-03-02 2004-01-02 Kasenna, Inc. Metadata enabled push-pull model for efficient low-latency video-content distribution over a network
WO2002071736A2 (en) 2001-03-05 2002-09-12 Intervideo, Inc. Systems and methods of error resilience in a video decoder
CA2441819A1 (en) * 2001-03-20 2002-09-26 Intellocity Usa, Inc. Video combiner
US6766407B1 (en) 2001-03-27 2004-07-20 Microsoft Corporation Intelligent streaming framework
US20020178447A1 (en) 2001-04-03 2002-11-28 Plotnick Michael A. Behavioral targeted advertising
JP4705265B2 (en) 2001-04-19 2011-06-22 三菱電機株式会社 Video or audio transmission system
GB2374687A (en) 2001-04-19 2002-10-23 Ibm Managing configuration changes in a data processing system
US20020188628A1 (en) 2001-04-20 2002-12-12 Brian Cooper Editing interactive content with time-based media
DE10120806B4 (en) 2001-04-27 2005-12-15 Fenkart Informatik & Telekommunikations Kg Device and method for the transmission of multimedia data objects
US20020191851A1 (en) 2001-05-01 2002-12-19 Giora Keinan Efficient encoding of video frames using pre-encoded primitives
US6807528B1 (en) 2001-05-08 2004-10-19 Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Adding data to a compressed data frame
US7444418B2 (en) 2001-05-11 2008-10-28 Bytemobile, Inc. Transcoding multimedia information within a network communication system
US20050076134A1 (en) 2001-05-17 2005-04-07 Gil Bialik Apparatus and method for multiple rich media formats video broadcasting
US20050160088A1 (en) 2001-05-17 2005-07-21 Todd Scallan System and method for metadata-based distribution of content
US6940904B2 (en) 2001-05-29 2005-09-06 Broadcom Corporation Artifact-free displaying of MPEG-2 video in the progressive-refresh mode
US7197070B1 (en) * 2001-06-04 2007-03-27 Cisco Technology, Inc. Efficient systems and methods for transmitting compressed video data having different resolutions
US6813690B1 (en) 2001-06-12 2004-11-02 Network Appliance, Inc. Caching media data using content-sensitive identifiers
US7266832B2 (en) 2001-06-14 2007-09-04 Digeo, Inc. Advertisement swapping using an aggregator for an interactive television system
US7003795B2 (en) 2001-06-26 2006-02-21 Digeo, Inc. Webcam-based interface for initiating two-way video communication
US7065213B2 (en) 2001-06-29 2006-06-20 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. In a subscriber network receiving digital packets and transmitting digital packets below a predetermined maximum bit rate
JP2003087785A (en) 2001-06-29 2003-03-20 Toshiba Corp Method of converting format of encoded video data and apparatus therefor
US20030189980A1 (en) 2001-07-02 2003-10-09 Moonlight Cordless Ltd. Method and apparatus for motion estimation between video frames
CN1297134C (en) 2001-07-09 2007-01-24 三星电子株式会社 Moving estimating device and method for reference macro block window in scanning search area
EP1276325A3 (en) 2001-07-11 2004-07-14 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Mpeg encoding apparatus, mpeg decoding apparatus, and encoding program
US6721956B2 (en) 2001-07-17 2004-04-13 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Interactive information services system and associated method for capturing transaction data
GB0118872D0 (en) 2001-08-02 2001-09-26 Vis Itv Ltd Multiplayer computer game for interactive television
US9544523B2 (en) 2001-08-06 2017-01-10 Ati Technologies Ulc Wireless display apparatus and method
WO2003017129A1 (en) 2001-08-16 2003-02-27 Goldpocket Interactive Interactive television tracking system
US7139470B2 (en) * 2001-08-17 2006-11-21 Intel Corporation Navigation for MPEG streams
US7024045B2 (en) 2001-08-21 2006-04-04 Sun Microsystems, Inc. Dynamic bandwidth adaptive image compression/decompression scheme
US20030038893A1 (en) 2001-08-24 2003-02-27 Nokia Corporation Digital video receiver that generates background pictures and sounds for games
WO2003026275A2 (en) * 2001-09-19 2003-03-27 Meta Tv, Inc. Interactive user interface for television applications
KR20040041170A (en) 2001-09-21 2004-05-14 브리티쉬 텔리커뮤니케이션즈 파블릭 리미티드 캄퍼니 Data communications method and system using receiving buffer size to calculate transmission rate for congestion control
US6766422B2 (en) 2001-09-27 2004-07-20 Siemens Information And Communication Networks, Inc. Method and system for web caching based on predictive usage
US20030065739A1 (en) 2001-10-01 2003-04-03 J. Mitchell Shnier Methods for independently generating a reference to desired information available from a remote source
US6956902B2 (en) * 2001-10-11 2005-10-18 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Method and apparatus for a multi-user video navigation system
US6978424B2 (en) 2001-10-15 2005-12-20 General Instrument Corporation Versatile user interface device and associated system
US7072081B2 (en) 2001-10-24 2006-07-04 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Compact portable 2D/ 3D image capture system
EP1440300B1 (en) 2001-11-02 2005-12-28 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Encoding device, decoding device and audio data distribution system
GB0219509D0 (en) 2001-12-05 2002-10-02 Delamont Dean Improvements to interactive TV games system
JP3930307B2 (en) 2001-12-11 2007-06-13 アルプス電気株式会社 Integrated circuit for oscillator
US20030126611A1 (en) 2001-12-28 2003-07-03 International Business Machines Corporation Methods and apparatus for controlling interactive television information and commerce services
US20030126608A1 (en) 2001-12-31 2003-07-03 General Instrument Corporation Methods and systems for providing streaming media content in existing video delivery systems
US6747658B2 (en) 2001-12-31 2004-06-08 Intel Corporation Automatic memory management for zone rendering
US7218738B2 (en) 2002-01-02 2007-05-15 Sony Corporation Encryption and content control in a digital broadcast system
US7823174B2 (en) * 2002-01-02 2010-10-26 Sony Corporation Macro-block based content replacement by PID mapping
US20030131349A1 (en) 2002-01-04 2003-07-10 General Instrument Corporation Methods and systems for managing and collecting impulse pay-per-view data in smart card enabled television terminals
US7634795B2 (en) 2002-01-11 2009-12-15 Opentv, Inc. Next generation television receiver
CN1897701A (en) 2002-01-18 2007-01-17 株式会社东芝 Video encoding method and apparatus and video decoding method and apparatus
CN1625880B (en) 2002-01-30 2010-08-11 Nxp股份有限公司 Streaming multimedia data over a network having a variable bandwith
JP3900413B2 (en) 2002-02-14 2007-04-04 Kddi株式会社 Video information transmission method and program
US20030200336A1 (en) 2002-02-15 2003-10-23 Suparna Pal Apparatus and method for the delivery of multiple sources of media content
WO2003075116A2 (en) 2002-03-01 2003-09-12 T5 Labs Ltd Centralised interactive graphical application server
HUE035334T2 (en) 2002-03-05 2018-05-02 Opentv Inc Multicasting of interactive data
US20050141613A1 (en) * 2002-03-21 2005-06-30 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Editing of encoded a/v sequences
US7050113B2 (en) 2002-03-26 2006-05-23 International Business Machines Corporation Digital video data scaler and method
AU2003226225B2 (en) 2002-04-04 2007-11-08 Intellocity Usa, Inc. Interactive television notification system
US7742609B2 (en) 2002-04-08 2010-06-22 Gibson Guitar Corp. Live performance audio mixing system with simplified user interface
US8255968B2 (en) 2002-04-15 2012-08-28 Universal Electronics, Inc. System and method for adaptively controlling the recording of program material using a program guide
AU2003216686A1 (en) 2002-04-22 2003-11-03 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Parametric multi-channel audio representation
US20040016000A1 (en) 2002-04-23 2004-01-22 Zhi-Li Zhang Video streaming having controlled quality assurance over best-effort networks
WO2003091832A2 (en) 2002-04-26 2003-11-06 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Method of content adaptation for apparatuses of universal multimedia framework terminal, server, and gateway
AU2003243183A1 (en) 2002-05-01 2003-11-17 Index Systems, Inc. Method and system for facilitating advertising and t-commerce transactions in connection with content stored on a storage medium
US8443383B2 (en) 2002-05-03 2013-05-14 Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc Use of messages in program signal streams by set-top terminals
US7111314B2 (en) 2002-05-03 2006-09-19 Time Warner Entertainment Company, L.P. Technique for delivering entertainment programming content including interactive features in a communications network
AU2003239385A1 (en) 2002-05-10 2003-11-11 Richard R. Reisman Method and apparatus for browsing using multiple coordinated device
JP2004056777A (en) 2002-05-30 2004-02-19 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Wireless remote control system
US7038676B2 (en) 2002-06-11 2006-05-02 Sony Computer Entertainmant Inc. System and method for data compression
US20030231218A1 (en) 2002-06-14 2003-12-18 Lou Amadio System and method for indicating the focused control on a graphical user interface
US7039698B2 (en) 2002-06-18 2006-05-02 Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corporation Notification device interaction
US7016888B2 (en) 2002-06-18 2006-03-21 Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corporation Learning device interaction rules
US6889207B2 (en) 2002-06-18 2005-05-03 Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corporation Content control in a device environment
US7224731B2 (en) 2002-06-28 2007-05-29 Microsoft Corporation Motion estimation/compensation for screen capture video
US9445133B2 (en) * 2002-07-10 2016-09-13 Arris Enterprises, Inc. DVD conversion for on demand
AU2002950210A0 (en) 2002-07-11 2002-09-12 Mediaware Solutions Pty Ltd Mosaic construction from a video sequence
EP1383334B1 (en) * 2002-07-17 2012-02-01 Panasonic Corporation Video data transmitting apparatus, video data receiving apparatus, and broadcasting system
JP2005535181A (en) 2002-07-31 2005-11-17 ブルーストリーク テクノロジー インコーポレイテッド System and method for providing real-time ticker information
AU2003259338A1 (en) 2002-08-21 2004-03-11 Lime Studios Limited Improvements to interactive tv games system
US7606314B2 (en) 2002-08-29 2009-10-20 Raritan America, Inc. Method and apparatus for caching, compressing and transmitting video signals
US7424434B2 (en) 2002-09-04 2008-09-09 Microsoft Corporation Unified lossy and lossless audio compression
US20040055007A1 (en) 2002-09-13 2004-03-18 David Allport Point-based system and method for interacting with electronic program guide grid
JP2004112441A (en) 2002-09-19 2004-04-08 Casio Comput Co Ltd Advertising information providing system and method therefor
CA2406047A1 (en) 2002-09-30 2004-03-30 Ali Solehdin A graphical user interface for digital media and network portals using detail-in-context lenses
JP2004135932A (en) 2002-10-18 2004-05-13 Am3 Inc Digital content reproducing method for game machine
US8015584B2 (en) 2002-10-18 2011-09-06 Seachange International, Inc. Delivering interactive content to a remote subscriber
KR100478934B1 (en) 2002-10-22 2005-03-28 한국전자통신연구원 Apparatus and method of object-based MPEG-4 content editing and authoring and retrieval
US20050015816A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2005-01-20 Actv, Inc System and method of providing triggered event commands via digital program insertion splicing
US20040088375A1 (en) 2002-11-01 2004-05-06 Sethi Bhupinder S. Method for prefetching Web pages to improve response time networking
KR100930043B1 (en) * 2002-11-23 2009-12-08 삼성전자주식회사 Motion estimating apparatus and method for detecting scrolling text or graphic data
JP3795856B2 (en) 2002-12-09 2006-07-12 株式会社スクウェア・エニックス Video game apparatus, video game progress control method, program, and recording medium
US20040111526A1 (en) 2002-12-10 2004-06-10 Baldwin James Armand Compositing MPEG video streams for combined image display
US20040117827A1 (en) 2002-12-11 2004-06-17 Jeyhan Karaoguz Media processing system supporting personal advertisement channel and advertisement insertion into broadcast media
WO2004056098A1 (en) 2002-12-16 2004-07-01 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Method for a mosaic program guide
WO2004056126A1 (en) 2002-12-16 2004-07-01 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. System for modifying the time-base of a video signal
US7555017B2 (en) 2002-12-17 2009-06-30 Tls Corporation Low latency digital audio over packet switched networks
CN1726552A (en) 2002-12-20 2006-01-25 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 Creating edit effects on MPEG-2 compressed video
CN100423581C (en) 2002-12-30 2008-10-01 Nxp股份有限公司 Coding/decoding method and its device for dynamic image
US7840905B1 (en) 2003-01-06 2010-11-23 Apple Inc. Creating a theme used by an authoring application to produce a multimedia presentation
US7987489B2 (en) 2003-01-07 2011-07-26 Openpeak Inc. Legacy device bridge for residential or non-residential networks
US7426539B2 (en) 2003-01-09 2008-09-16 Sony Computer Entertainment America Inc. Dynamic bandwidth control
JP4536325B2 (en) 2003-02-04 2010-09-01 ソニー株式会社 Image processing apparatus and method, recording medium, and program
WO2004073310A1 (en) 2003-02-05 2004-08-26 Ictv, Inc. Peripheral unit for upstream cable television system communication
JP3806097B2 (en) 2003-04-04 2006-08-09 株式会社エヌ・ティ・ティ・ドコモ Individual video distribution control method
GB2400290A (en) 2003-04-04 2004-10-06 Autodesk Canada Inc Multidimensional image data processing in a hierarchical dat structure
US7912001B2 (en) 2003-05-15 2011-03-22 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Methods, systems, and products for a metering application
US7212573B2 (en) 2003-06-13 2007-05-01 Lsi Logic Corporation Method and/or apparatus for determining minimum positive reference indices for a direct prediction mode
EP1645115A1 (en) 2003-06-19 2006-04-12 Ictv, Inc. Interactive picture-in-picture video
US7757261B2 (en) 2003-06-20 2010-07-13 N2 Broadband, Inc. Systems and methods for providing flexible provisioning architectures for a host in a cable system
US20040268419A1 (en) 2003-06-24 2004-12-30 Microsoft Corporation Interactive content without embedded triggers
JP2005033741A (en) 2003-07-14 2005-02-03 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Television character information display device, and television character information display method
US7315505B2 (en) * 2003-07-14 2008-01-01 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Storage device having a probe with plural tips
US7383180B2 (en) 2003-07-18 2008-06-03 Microsoft Corporation Constant bitrate media encoding techniques
US7508941B1 (en) 2003-07-22 2009-03-24 Cisco Technology, Inc. Methods and apparatus for use in surveillance systems
US8200775B2 (en) 2005-02-01 2012-06-12 Newsilike Media Group, Inc Enhanced syndication
CN101065963B (en) 2003-08-29 2010-09-15 Rgb网络有限公司 Video multiplexer system providing low-latency VCR-like effects and program changes
JP2005095599A (en) 2003-09-03 2005-04-14 Aruze Corp Mobile communication terminal, game server and game program
US7617510B2 (en) 2003-09-05 2009-11-10 Microsoft Corporation Media network using set-top boxes as nodes
US7500235B2 (en) 2003-09-05 2009-03-03 Aol Time Warner Interactive Video Group, Inc. Technique for updating a resident application and associated parameters in a user terminal through a communications network
JP2005084987A (en) 2003-09-09 2005-03-31 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Service server and composite moving picture preparation service method
ES2470976T3 (en) 2003-09-12 2014-06-24 Open Tv, Inc. Method and system to control the recording and playback of interactive applications
US9325998B2 (en) 2003-09-30 2016-04-26 Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. Wireless video transmission system
US8763044B2 (en) 2003-10-10 2014-06-24 Concurrent Computer Corporation Method, apparatus, and system for preparing images for integration and combining images into an integrated image
US7444306B2 (en) 2003-10-24 2008-10-28 Thomas Bryan Varble Method and apparatus for the rental or sale, and secure distribution of digital content
JP4246039B2 (en) 2003-11-18 2009-04-02 日立建機株式会社 Construction machine operation information management device
US8170096B1 (en) 2003-11-18 2012-05-01 Visible World, Inc. System and method for optimized encoding and transmission of a plurality of substantially similar video fragments
JP2005156996A (en) 2003-11-26 2005-06-16 Pioneer Electronic Corp Information recording-reproducing terminal unit, advertising information distribution server, advertising information distribution system, advertising information distribution method, content data reproducing program, advertising information distribution program and information recording medium
US7346111B2 (en) 2003-12-10 2008-03-18 Lsi Logic Corporation Co-located motion vector storage
US20050132305A1 (en) 2003-12-12 2005-06-16 Guichard Robert D. Electronic information access systems, methods for creation and related commercial models
US20050135385A1 (en) * 2003-12-17 2005-06-23 Tellabs Operations, Inc. Method and apparatus for digital cross connect
JP2004110850A (en) 2003-12-19 2004-04-08 Sony Computer Entertainment Inc Pseudorandom number generator
US20050149988A1 (en) 2004-01-06 2005-07-07 Sbc Knowledge Ventures, L.P. Delivering interactive television components in real time for live broadcast events
EP1709807A2 (en) 2004-01-29 2006-10-11 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Transmission apparatus, content reproduction apparatus and license distribution system
US8737219B2 (en) 2004-01-30 2014-05-27 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Methods and systems that use information about data packets to determine an order for sending the data packets
US20050213586A1 (en) 2004-02-05 2005-09-29 David Cyganski System and method to increase network throughput
US7492820B2 (en) 2004-02-06 2009-02-17 Apple Inc. Rate control for video coder employing adaptive linear regression bits modeling
US8036271B2 (en) 2004-02-24 2011-10-11 Lsi Corporation Method and apparatus for determining a second picture for temporal direct-mode block prediction
US20060020960A1 (en) 2004-03-24 2006-01-26 Sandeep Relan System, method, and apparatus for secure sharing of multimedia content across several electronic devices
US20050216933A1 (en) 2004-03-25 2005-09-29 Comcast Cable Holdings, Llc Method and system which enables users to select videos from cable provider web site for on-demand delivery from the cable provider to user televisions via cable television network
US20050216940A1 (en) 2004-03-25 2005-09-29 Comcast Cable Holdings, Llc Method and system which enables subscribers to select videos from websites for on-demand delivery to subscriber televisions via cable television network
EP1733394A1 (en) 2004-03-30 2006-12-20 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. System and method for supporting improved trick mode performance for disc-based multimedia content
KR20070006905A (en) 2004-04-14 2007-01-11 타일파일 피티와이 리미티드 A media package and a system and method for managing a media package
SE0400998D0 (en) 2004-04-16 2004-04-16 Cooding Technologies Sweden Ab Method for representing multi-channel audio signals
JP4170949B2 (en) 2004-04-21 2008-10-22 株式会社東芝 Data utilization apparatus, data utilization method, and program
US7536636B2 (en) 2004-04-26 2009-05-19 Kodak Graphic Communications Canada Company Systems and methods for comparing documents containing graphic elements
US7970263B1 (en) 2004-05-28 2011-06-28 Adobe Systems Incorporated Seamless integration of video capture in demonstration applications
KR101193698B1 (en) 2004-06-03 2012-10-22 힐크레스트 래보래토리스, 인크. Client-server architectures and methods for zoomable user interface
US20060001737A1 (en) 2004-07-01 2006-01-05 Dawson Thomas P Video conference arrangement
CN102592638A (en) 2004-07-02 2012-07-18 尼尔逊媒介研究股份有限公司 Method and apparatus for mixing compressed digital bit streams
US20060020994A1 (en) 2004-07-21 2006-01-26 Ron Crane Television signal transmission of interlinked data and navigation information for use by a chaser program
US7941645B1 (en) * 2004-07-28 2011-05-10 Nvidia Corporation Isochronous pipelined processor with deterministic control
US9344765B2 (en) 2004-07-30 2016-05-17 Broadband Itv, Inc. Dynamic adjustment of electronic program guide displays based on viewer preferences for minimizing navigation in VOD program selection
JP4125270B2 (en) 2004-08-06 2008-07-30 キヤノン株式会社 Information processing apparatus, notification method thereof, and program
JP2006054818A (en) 2004-08-16 2006-02-23 Sony Corp Information processing system, recording apparatus, communication device, information processing method, and program
JP4645102B2 (en) 2004-08-27 2011-03-09 パナソニック株式会社 Advertisement receiver and advertisement receiving system
WO2006025337A1 (en) 2004-08-31 2006-03-09 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Stereo signal generating apparatus and stereo signal generating method
US20060088105A1 (en) 2004-10-27 2006-04-27 Bo Shen Method and system for generating multiple transcoded outputs based on a single input
JP4890459B2 (en) 2004-10-29 2012-03-07 イーエイティー.ティーブイ、インコーポレイテッド A system for enabling video-based interactive applications
US7784076B2 (en) 2004-10-30 2010-08-24 Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. Sender-side bandwidth estimation for video transmission with receiver packet buffer
US8677274B2 (en) 2004-11-10 2014-03-18 Apple Inc. Highlighting items for search results
US9420230B2 (en) * 2004-11-12 2016-08-16 Nbcuniversal Media, Llc Distributed composition of broadcast television programs
US8878851B2 (en) 2004-11-12 2014-11-04 Synchronica Plc Method and system for streaming documents, e-mail attachments and maps to wireless devices
US20070124282A1 (en) 2004-11-25 2007-05-31 Erland Wittkotter Video data directory
US7543073B2 (en) 2004-12-10 2009-06-02 Microsoft Corporation System and process for performing an exponentially weighted moving average on streaming data to establish a moving average bit rate
US20060143678A1 (en) 2004-12-10 2006-06-29 Microsoft Corporation System and process for controlling the coding bit rate of streaming media data employing a linear quadratic control technique and leaky bucket model
WO2006067697A2 (en) 2004-12-20 2006-06-29 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Method and apparatus for detecting abnormality in tooth structure
US20060174026A1 (en) 2005-01-05 2006-08-03 Aaron Robinson System and method for a remote user interface
US7623575B2 (en) 2005-01-05 2009-11-24 Lsi Corporation Method and apparatus for sub-pixel motion compensation
US20060168291A1 (en) 2005-01-05 2006-07-27 Van Zoest Alexander Interactive multichannel data distribution system
JP2008527827A (en) * 2005-01-07 2008-07-24 コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エレクトロニクス エヌ ヴィ Method of processing a video signal using a quantization step size dynamically based on normal flow
US7669121B2 (en) 2005-01-19 2010-02-23 Microsoft Corporation Transcode matrix
US7567565B2 (en) 2005-02-01 2009-07-28 Time Warner Cable Inc. Method and apparatus for network bandwidth conservation
EP1844612B1 (en) 2005-02-04 2017-05-10 Barco NV Method and device for image and video transmission over low-bandwidth and high-latency transmission channels
CN101208723A (en) * 2005-02-23 2008-06-25 克雷格·萨默斯 Automatic scene modeling for the 3D camera and 3D video
KR100723403B1 (en) 2005-02-28 2007-05-30 삼성전자주식회사 A prediction image generating method and apparatus using using single coding mode among color components, and an image and video encoding/decoding method and apparatus using it
US7860013B2 (en) 2005-03-09 2010-12-28 Comcast Cable Holdings, Llc Methods and systems for using in-stream data within an on demand content delivery path
WO2006097937A2 (en) 2005-03-17 2006-09-21 Videocells Ltd. A method for a clustered centralized streaming system
WO2006105480A1 (en) * 2005-03-30 2006-10-05 United Video Properties, Inc. Systems and methods for video-rich navigation
CN101156388B (en) 2005-04-11 2011-03-02 艾利森电话股份有限公司 Product and method for controlling variable-digit speed data package transmission
US20060230428A1 (en) 2005-04-11 2006-10-12 Rob Craig Multi-player video game system
US7751572B2 (en) 2005-04-15 2010-07-06 Dolby International Ab Adaptive residual audio coding
US20060239563A1 (en) * 2005-04-25 2006-10-26 Nokia Corporation Method and device for compressed domain video editing
US20080052742A1 (en) 2005-04-26 2008-02-28 Slide, Inc. Method and apparatus for presenting media content
GB2426168B (en) 2005-05-09 2008-08-27 Sony Comp Entertainment Europe Audio processing
US20060285586A1 (en) 2005-05-16 2006-12-21 Ensequence, Inc. Methods and systems for achieving transition effects with MPEG-encoded picture content
US20060256865A1 (en) 2005-05-16 2006-11-16 Ensequence, Inc. Flexible use of MPEG encoded images
US20070011717A1 (en) 2005-07-06 2007-01-11 Lauder Gary M Distribution of interactive information content within a plurality of disparate distribution networks
US7936819B2 (en) 2005-07-08 2011-05-03 Tag Networks, Inc. Video encoder with latency control
US9060101B2 (en) 2005-07-08 2015-06-16 Activevideo Networks, Inc. Video game system having an infinite playing field
WO2007008356A1 (en) 2005-07-08 2007-01-18 Tag Networks, Inc. Video game system using pre-encoded macro-blocks
US20070009042A1 (en) 2005-07-08 2007-01-11 Robert Craig Video game system using pre-encoded macro-blocks in an I-frame
US9061206B2 (en) 2005-07-08 2015-06-23 Activevideo Networks, Inc. Video game system using pre-generated motion vectors
US8270439B2 (en) 2005-07-08 2012-09-18 Activevideo Networks, Inc. Video game system using pre-encoded digital audio mixing
US8284842B2 (en) 2005-07-08 2012-10-09 Activevideo Networks, Inc. Video game system using pre-encoded macro-blocks and a reference grid
US8118676B2 (en) 2005-07-08 2012-02-21 Activevideo Networks, Inc. Video game system using pre-encoded macro-blocks
AU2005203074A1 (en) 2005-07-14 2007-02-01 Canon Information Systems Research Australia Pty Ltd Image browser
US8042140B2 (en) 2005-07-22 2011-10-18 Kangaroo Media, Inc. Buffering content on a handheld electronic device
US8074248B2 (en) 2005-07-26 2011-12-06 Activevideo Networks, Inc. System and method for providing video content associated with a source image to a television in a communication network
US20070028278A1 (en) 2005-07-27 2007-02-01 Sigmon Robert B Jr System and method for providing pre-encoded audio content to a television in a communications network
US7474802B2 (en) 2005-07-28 2009-01-06 Seiko Epson Corporation Method and apparatus for automatically estimating the layout of a sequentially ordered series of frames to be used to form a panorama
US8155194B2 (en) 2005-08-05 2012-04-10 Lsi Corporation Method and apparatus for MPEG-2 to H.264 video transcoding
US7151782B1 (en) 2005-08-09 2006-12-19 Bigband Networks, Inc. Method and system for providing multiple services to end-users
US20070067296A1 (en) 2005-08-19 2007-03-22 Malloy Patrick J Network capacity planning
US8104054B2 (en) 2005-09-01 2012-01-24 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Methods, systems, and devices for bandwidth conservation
FR2891098B1 (en) 2005-09-16 2008-02-08 Thales Sa METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MIXING DIGITAL AUDIO STREAMS IN THE COMPRESSED DOMAIN.
KR100652876B1 (en) 2005-09-26 2006-12-01 볼보 컨스트럭션 이키프먼트 홀딩 스웨덴 에이비 System of wireless electronic devices for construction equipment and maintenance system thereof
US20070074251A1 (en) 2005-09-27 2007-03-29 Oguz Seyfullah H Method and apparatus for using random field models to improve picture and video compression and frame rate up conversion
EP1771003A1 (en) 2005-09-29 2007-04-04 Siemens Informatica S.p.A. Multiple interactivity enabling technology in a DVB-T environment
EP1946564A2 (en) 2005-09-29 2008-07-23 Thomson Licensing Method and apparatus for motion projection error concealment in block-based video
US8132203B2 (en) 2005-09-30 2012-03-06 Microsoft Corporation In-program content targeting
US8243630B2 (en) 2005-10-19 2012-08-14 Microsoft Corporation Application-level routing protocol for multiparty audio-video conferencing
US8824454B2 (en) 2005-10-24 2014-09-02 West Corporation Peering network for parameter-based routing of special number calls
US7555715B2 (en) 2005-10-25 2009-06-30 Sonic Solutions Methods and systems for use in maintaining media data quality upon conversion to a different data format
JP4774921B2 (en) 2005-11-01 2011-09-21 Kddi株式会社 File display method and system
US7634296B2 (en) 2005-12-02 2009-12-15 General Instrument Corporation Set top box with mobile phone interface
JP2007156824A (en) 2005-12-05 2007-06-21 Nec Electronics Corp Processor system, task control method
CN102169415A (en) 2005-12-30 2011-08-31 苹果公司 Portable electronic device with multi-touch input
US7644373B2 (en) 2006-01-23 2010-01-05 Microsoft Corporation User interface for viewing clusters of images
US20070178243A1 (en) 2006-01-30 2007-08-02 Roman Decorating Products Water-based faux finish and methods
US7830388B1 (en) 2006-02-07 2010-11-09 Vitie Inc. Methods and apparatus of sharing graphics data of multiple instances of interactive application
JP5697332B2 (en) 2006-03-27 2015-04-08 ヴィドヨ,インコーポレーテッド System and method for management of scalability information using control messages in a scalable video and audio coding system
US7656413B2 (en) 2006-03-29 2010-02-02 Autodesk, Inc. Large display attention focus system
US8494052B2 (en) 2006-04-07 2013-07-23 Microsoft Corporation Dynamic selection of motion estimation search ranges and extended motion vector ranges
US20070245019A1 (en) 2006-04-12 2007-10-18 United Video Properties, Inc. Interactive media content delivery using a backchannel communications network
JP4921551B2 (en) 2006-06-02 2012-04-25 テレフオンアクチーボラゲット エル エム エリクソン(パブル) HiGA IMS Service Proxy
US8131971B2 (en) 2006-06-20 2012-03-06 Patentvc Ltd. Methods and systems for push-to-storage
US20070300280A1 (en) 2006-06-21 2007-12-27 Turner Media Group Interactive method of advertising
KR101262342B1 (en) 2006-06-29 2013-05-08 주식회사 케이티 Internet Protocol Television Broadcasting System And Receiver And Data Transmission System And Method For Internet Protocol Television System
US7840979B2 (en) 2006-06-30 2010-11-23 Microsoft Corporation Graphical tile-based expansion cell guide
US7831364B2 (en) 2006-08-11 2010-11-09 Clark Equipment Company “Off-board” control for a power machine or vehicle
US7864163B2 (en) 2006-09-06 2011-01-04 Apple Inc. Portable electronic device, method, and graphical user interface for displaying structured electronic documents
US20080066135A1 (en) 2006-09-11 2008-03-13 Apple Computer, Inc. Search user interface for media device
NL1033929C1 (en) 2006-09-29 2008-04-01 Avinity Systems B V Parallel user session streaming method, involves assembling data stream per session by applying encoded fragments that are suitable for assembling video data in predefined format and for application in images, to video data
JP5936805B2 (en) 2006-09-29 2016-06-22 アビニティ・システムズ・ベスローテン・フェンノートシャップAvinity Systems B.V. Method, system, and computer software for streaming parallel user sessions
NL1032594C2 (en) 2006-09-29 2008-04-01 Avinity Systems B V Parallel user session streaming method, involves assembling data stream per session by applying encoded fragments that are suitable for assembling video data in predefined format and for application in images, to video data
US8196045B2 (en) 2006-10-05 2012-06-05 Blinkx Uk Limited Various methods and apparatus for moving thumbnails with metadata
JP5093557B2 (en) 2006-10-10 2012-12-12 ソニー株式会社 Image processing apparatus, image processing method, and program
US20080098450A1 (en) 2006-10-16 2008-04-24 Toptrend Global Technologies, Inc. Dual display apparatus and methodology for broadcast, cable television and IPTV
US8005847B2 (en) * 2006-10-20 2011-08-23 Adobe Systems Incorporated Pattern-based file relationship inference
EP1918802A1 (en) 2006-10-30 2008-05-07 Research In Motion Limited Method of improved viewing of visual objects on a display by enlarging a focused object
US8375304B2 (en) * 2006-11-01 2013-02-12 Skyfire Labs, Inc. Maintaining state of a web page
US8656445B2 (en) 2006-11-27 2014-02-18 Genband Us Llc Multimedia subsystem control for internet protocol based television services
US20080163059A1 (en) * 2006-12-28 2008-07-03 Guideworks, Llc Systems and methods for creating custom video mosaic pages with local content
US8869189B2 (en) 2006-12-29 2014-10-21 Echostar Technologies L.L.C. Controlling access to content and/or services
EP3145200A1 (en) 2007-01-12 2017-03-22 ActiveVideo Networks, Inc. Mpeg objects and systems and methods for using mpeg objects
US9826197B2 (en) 2007-01-12 2017-11-21 Activevideo Networks, Inc. Providing television broadcasts over a managed network and interactive content over an unmanaged network to a client device
US20080212942A1 (en) 2007-01-12 2008-09-04 Ictv, Inc. Automatic video program recording in an interactive television environment
US20080201736A1 (en) 2007-01-12 2008-08-21 Ictv, Inc. Using Triggers with Video for Interactive Content Identification
US20080178243A1 (en) 2007-01-19 2008-07-24 Suiwu Dong Multimedia client/server system with audio synchronization and methods for use therewith
US20080178125A1 (en) 2007-01-23 2008-07-24 Microsoft Corporation Providing dynamic content in a user interface in an application
US8301669B2 (en) 2007-01-31 2012-10-30 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Concurrent presentation of video segments enabling rapid video file comprehension
SE533185C2 (en) 2007-02-16 2010-07-13 Scalado Ab Method for processing a digital image and image representation format
US7680882B2 (en) 2007-03-06 2010-03-16 Friendster, Inc. Multimedia aggregation in an online social network
US9967620B2 (en) 2007-03-16 2018-05-08 Adobe Systems Incorporated Video highlights for streaming media
US8107571B2 (en) 2007-03-20 2012-01-31 Microsoft Corporation Parameterized filters and signaling techniques
KR101446939B1 (en) 2007-03-30 2014-10-06 삼성전자주식회사 System and method for remote control
US8782698B2 (en) 2007-04-30 2014-07-15 Google Inc. Customizable media channels
US7974472B2 (en) 2007-06-29 2011-07-05 Microsoft Corporation Feature design for HMM based Eastern Asian character recognition
US8254455B2 (en) 2007-06-30 2012-08-28 Microsoft Corporation Computing collocated macroblock information for direct mode macroblocks
US20090025027A1 (en) 2007-07-20 2009-01-22 Michael Craner Systems & methods for allocating bandwidth in switched digital video systems based on interest
US20090031341A1 (en) 2007-07-24 2009-01-29 General Instrument Corporation Method and apparatus for reducing the number of control messages transmitted by a set top terminal in an sdv system
US20090094113A1 (en) 2007-09-07 2009-04-09 Digitalsmiths Corporation Systems and Methods For Using Video Metadata to Associate Advertisements Therewith
CN104219560B (en) 2007-09-18 2018-05-25 汤姆森许可贸易公司 The user interface of set-top box
US20090083781A1 (en) 2007-09-21 2009-03-26 Microsoft Corporation Intelligent Video Player
US8683519B2 (en) 2007-09-26 2014-03-25 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Favorites mosaic
US20090083811A1 (en) 2007-09-26 2009-03-26 Verivue, Inc. Unicast Delivery of Multimedia Content
US8869181B2 (en) 2007-09-28 2014-10-21 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Method and system for message notification
US20090094646A1 (en) 2007-10-04 2009-04-09 At&T Knowledge Ventures, L.P. Method and system for content mapping
US8316409B2 (en) 2007-10-11 2012-11-20 James Strothmann Simultaneous access to media in a media delivery system
EP2210190B1 (en) 2007-10-15 2013-09-11 Verimatrix, Inc. Content delivery proxy system and method
US8299889B2 (en) 2007-12-07 2012-10-30 Cisco Technology, Inc. Home entertainment system providing presence and mobility via remote control authentication
US8281337B2 (en) 2007-12-14 2012-10-02 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. System and method to display media content and an interactive display
US7774487B2 (en) 2007-12-18 2010-08-10 The Directv Group, Inc. Method and apparatus for checking the health of a connection between a supplemental service provider and a user device of a primary service provider
US20090160694A1 (en) 2007-12-20 2009-06-25 Cristiano Di Flora Interaction with autonomous consumer electronics devices
US9900557B2 (en) 2007-12-28 2018-02-20 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Method and apparatus for remote set-top box management
WO2009094673A2 (en) 2008-01-27 2009-07-30 Citrix Systems, Inc. Methods and systems for remoting three dimensional graphics
US8149917B2 (en) 2008-02-01 2012-04-03 Activevideo Networks, Inc. Transition creation for encoded video in the transform domain
US9503691B2 (en) 2008-02-19 2016-11-22 Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc Methods and apparatus for enhanced advertising and promotional delivery in a network
US8719868B2 (en) 2008-03-05 2014-05-06 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Presentation of combined video signals from multiple sources
US20090228620A1 (en) 2008-03-05 2009-09-10 Fred Thomas Digital Adapter
US8170107B2 (en) 2008-03-06 2012-05-01 Lsi Corporation Flexible reduced bandwidth compressed video decoder
US20090228922A1 (en) 2008-03-10 2009-09-10 United Video Properties, Inc. Methods and devices for presenting an interactive media guidance application
EP2269376A2 (en) 2008-03-12 2011-01-05 Echostar Technologies L.L.C. Apparatus and methods for controlling an entertainment device using a mobile communication device
US9210355B2 (en) 2008-03-12 2015-12-08 Echostar Technologies L.L.C. Apparatus and methods for controlling an entertainment device using a mobile communication device
US8212806B2 (en) 2008-04-08 2012-07-03 Autodesk, Inc. File format extensibility for universal rendering framework
KR20090110244A (en) 2008-04-17 2009-10-21 삼성전자주식회사 Method for encoding/decoding audio signals using audio semantic information and apparatus thereof
JP2009260818A (en) 2008-04-18 2009-11-05 Nec Corp Server apparatus, content distribution method, and program
US8196165B2 (en) 2008-04-28 2012-06-05 General Instrument Corporation Method and apparatus for delivering emergency alert system (EAS) messages over a switched digital video (SDV) system
JP5090246B2 (en) 2008-05-09 2012-12-05 ソニー株式会社 Information providing apparatus, portable information terminal, content processing device, content processing system, and program
US8150387B2 (en) 2008-06-02 2012-04-03 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Smart phone as remote control device
CN102057685A (en) 2008-06-10 2011-05-11 汤姆逊许可证公司 Methods and systems for providing a program guide for near video on demand systems
US20090313674A1 (en) 2008-06-17 2009-12-17 Ictv, Inc. PID Obfuscation
EP2304953A4 (en) 2008-06-25 2012-11-28 Activevideo Networks Inc Providing television broadcasts over a managed network and interactive content over an unmanaged network to a client device
US20110191684A1 (en) 2008-06-29 2011-08-04 TV1.com Holdings, LLC Method of Internet Video Access and Management
US8824861B2 (en) 2008-07-01 2014-09-02 Yoostar Entertainment Group, Inc. Interactive systems and methods for video compositing
US20100058404A1 (en) 2008-09-04 2010-03-04 Tandberg Television, Inc. Fulfilling Extended Video on Demand Customer Content Requests
US8649426B2 (en) 2008-09-18 2014-02-11 Magor Communications Corporation Low latency high resolution video encoding
US8136033B1 (en) 2008-10-13 2012-03-13 Adobe Systems Incorporated Converting a graphic object from a first format to a second format with the aid of a stored checksum
US8687702B2 (en) 2008-10-27 2014-04-01 Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Remote transmission and display of video data using standard H.264-based video codecs
US9124769B2 (en) 2008-10-31 2015-09-01 The Nielsen Company (Us), Llc Methods and apparatus to verify presentation of media content
US8411754B2 (en) 2008-11-10 2013-04-02 Activevideo Networks, Inc. System, method, and computer program product for translating an element of a static encoded image in the encoded domain
US8443411B2 (en) 2008-11-26 2013-05-14 At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp System and method to distribute video-on-demand content
WO2010063314A1 (en) 2008-12-02 2010-06-10 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Method and apparatus for influencing the selection of peer data sources in a p2p network
US9009337B2 (en) 2008-12-22 2015-04-14 Netflix, Inc. On-device multiplexing of streaming media content
US20100211983A1 (en) 2009-02-19 2010-08-19 Pixel8 Networks, Inc. Virtual private content delivery network and method thereof
EP2224357A1 (en) 2009-02-27 2010-09-01 BRITISH TELECOMMUNICATIONS public limited company Video segmentation
US20100226428A1 (en) 2009-03-09 2010-09-09 Telephoto Technologies Inc. Encoder and decoder configuration for addressing latency of communications over a packet based network
JP5675765B2 (en) 2009-03-17 2015-02-25 アクティブビデオ ネットワークス, インコーポレイテッド Apparatus and method for on-demand video syndication
US8751955B2 (en) 2009-03-28 2014-06-10 International Business Machines Corporation Scrollbar user interface for multitouch devices
US8374172B2 (en) 2009-04-03 2013-02-12 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Method and apparatus for managing communication sessions
US8830339B2 (en) 2009-04-15 2014-09-09 Qualcomm Incorporated Auto-triggered fast frame rate digital video recording
CN102172033B (en) 2009-06-17 2013-07-17 松下电器产业株式会社 Reproduction device, recording method abd recording medium reproduction system
US20110002376A1 (en) 2009-07-01 2011-01-06 Wham! Inc. Latency Minimization Via Pipelining of Processing Blocks
US20110023069A1 (en) 2009-07-27 2011-01-27 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. System and Method for Creating and Managing an Internet Protocol Television Personal Movie Library
US8194862B2 (en) 2009-07-31 2012-06-05 Activevideo Networks, Inc. Video game system with mixing of independent pre-encoded digital audio bitstreams
US20110063522A1 (en) 2009-09-14 2011-03-17 Jeyhan Karaoguz System and method for generating television screen pointing information using an external receiver
US20110096828A1 (en) 2009-09-22 2011-04-28 Qualcomm Incorporated Enhanced block-request streaming using scalable encoding
JP5304612B2 (en) 2009-11-20 2013-10-02 株式会社デンソーウェーブ Entrance / exit management system
US20130304818A1 (en) 2009-12-01 2013-11-14 Topsy Labs, Inc. Systems and methods for discovery of related terms for social media content collection over social networks
EP2343881B1 (en) 2010-01-07 2019-11-20 LG Electronics Inc. Method of processing application in digital broadcast receiver connected with interactive network, and digital broadcast receiver
GB2477800A (en) 2010-02-16 2011-08-17 Nds Ltd Video trick mode playback
DE112011101003T5 (en) 2010-03-22 2013-02-07 Mobitv, Inc. Tile-based media content selection
EP2384001A1 (en) 2010-04-29 2011-11-02 Alcatel Lucent Providing of encoded video applications in a network environment
GB201007191D0 (en) 2010-04-29 2010-06-09 British Broadcasting Corp Content provision system
NL2004670C2 (en) 2010-05-04 2012-01-24 Activevideo Networks B V METHOD FOR MULTIMODAL REMOTE CONTROL.
US8898719B2 (en) 2010-05-20 2014-11-25 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Communication for one way devices
US9158444B2 (en) 2010-05-26 2015-10-13 Avaya Inc. User interface for managing communication sessions
NL2004780C2 (en) 2010-05-28 2012-01-23 Activevideo Networks B V VISUAL ELEMENT METHOD AND SYSTEM.
US9047375B2 (en) 2010-07-22 2015-06-02 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Internet video content delivery to television users
WO2012016226A1 (en) 2010-07-30 2012-02-02 Bytemobile, Inc. Systems and methods for video cache indexing
KR20130138263A (en) 2010-10-14 2013-12-18 액티브비디오 네트웍스, 인코포레이티드 Streaming digital video between video devices using a cable television system
US20140081954A1 (en) 2010-11-30 2014-03-20 Kirill Elizarov Media information system and method
US9251855B2 (en) 2011-01-28 2016-02-02 Apple Inc. Efficient media processing
EP2695388B1 (en) 2011-04-07 2017-06-07 ActiveVideo Networks, Inc. Reduction of latency in video distribution networks using adaptive bit rates
US8656430B2 (en) 2011-07-14 2014-02-18 Vixs Systems, Inc. Processing system with electronic program guide authoring and methods for use therewith
US10409445B2 (en) 2012-01-09 2019-09-10 Activevideo Networks, Inc. Rendering of an interactive lean-backward user interface on a television
US9123084B2 (en) 2012-04-12 2015-09-01 Activevideo Networks, Inc. Graphical application integration with MPEG objects
GB2504458B (en) 2012-06-08 2017-02-01 Microsoft Technology Licensing Llc Real-time communication
US20140267074A1 (en) 2013-03-14 2014-09-18 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for virtual user interface controls in multi-display configurations
CN103647980B (en) 2013-12-23 2017-02-15 合肥工业大学 Method for distributing low-bit-rate video streaming composite high definition graphic data and bandwidth of low-bit-rate video streaming composite high definition graphic data

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9800939B2 (en) 2009-04-16 2017-10-24 Guest Tek Interactive Entertainment Ltd. Virtual desktop services with available applications customized according to user type
US10356467B2 (en) 2010-01-15 2019-07-16 Guest Tek Interactive Entertainment Ltd. Virtual user interface including playback control provided over computer network for client device playing media from another source
US9338479B2 (en) 2010-07-30 2016-05-10 Guest Tek Interactive Entertainment Ltd. Virtualizing user interface and set top box functionality while providing media over network

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20080170622A1 (en) 2008-07-17
US20080178249A1 (en) 2008-07-24
HK1134729A1 (en) 2010-05-07
EP3145200A1 (en) 2017-03-22
US8155202B2 (en) 2012-04-10
WO2008088752A2 (en) 2008-07-24
WO2008088772A2 (en) 2008-07-24
EP2106665A2 (en) 2009-10-07
WO2008088752A3 (en) 2009-06-25
EP2632165A3 (en) 2014-05-21
EP2632165A2 (en) 2013-08-28
WO2008088772A3 (en) 2009-06-18
US9042454B2 (en) 2015-05-26
EP2106665B1 (en) 2015-08-05
WO2008088741A3 (en) 2008-10-23
EP2632164A2 (en) 2013-08-28
WO2008088741A2 (en) 2008-07-24
EP2632164A3 (en) 2014-02-26
US9355681B2 (en) 2016-05-31
HK1188661A1 (en) 2014-05-09
EP2632165B1 (en) 2015-09-30
EP2116051A2 (en) 2009-11-11
US20080170619A1 (en) 2008-07-17
US20170053673A1 (en) 2017-02-23

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2008088772A9 (en) Mpeg objects and systems and methods for using mpeg objects
JP5795404B2 (en) Provision of interactive content to client devices via TV broadcast via unmanaged network and unmanaged network
US20080212942A1 (en) Automatic video program recording in an interactive television environment
US9826197B2 (en) Providing television broadcasts over a managed network and interactive content over an unmanaged network to a client device
US20080201736A1 (en) Using Triggers with Video for Interactive Content Identification
JP5936805B2 (en) Method, system, and computer software for streaming parallel user sessions
US20040031052A1 (en) Information platform
Yu et al. Internet-based interactive HDTV
YAN HTTP Live Streaming for zoomable video

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2008705578

Country of ref document: EP

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 08705578

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A2